Kia, The Company: Drive Safely and Enjoy Your Kia!

Kia, THE COMPANY
Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle.

As a global car manufacturer focused on building high-quality vehi-
cles with exceptional value, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you
with a customer service experience that exceeds your expectations.
All information contained in this Owner’s Manual was accurate at the

time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes
at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can
be carried out.
This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descrip-
tions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a
result, you may encounter material in this manual that is not applica-
ble to your specific Kia vehicle.
Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!

Foreword
Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle. The information and specifications provided in this manual
When you require service, remember that your Kia dealer were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right to
knows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained tech- discontinue or change specifications or design at any time
nicians, recommended special tools and genuine Kia replace- without notice and without incurring any obligation. If you
ment parts. It is dedicated to your complete customer satisfac- have questions, always check with your Kia dealer.
tion. We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring
Because subsequent owners require this important information pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.
as well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it is
sold.
This manual will familiarize you with operational, mainte-
nance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is sup-
plemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual
that provides important information on all warranties regarding
your vehicle.
We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow the © 2015 Kia Canada Inc.
recommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operation All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or
of your new vehicle. mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any
Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features information storage and retrieval system or translation in
for its various models. Therefore, some of the equipment whole or part is not permitted without written authorization
described in this manual, along with the various illustrations, from Kia Canada Inc..
may not be applicable to your particular vehicle. Printed in Korea
i
Introduction 1
How to use this manual / Fuel requirements / Vehicle break-in process
Your vehicle at a glance 2

Exterior overview / Interior overview / Instrument panel overview / Engine compartment
Safety features of your vehicle 3

Seats / Seat belts / Child restraint system / Air bag
Features of your vehicle

Keys / Door locks / Tailgate / Windows / Hood / Fuel filler lid / Panoramic sunroof / Steering wheel / Mirrors 4
/ Instrument cluster / Lighting / Wipers & Washers / Climate control system / Audio system / Etc.
table of contents Driving your vehicle
Before driving / Engine start/stop button / Transaxle / Brake system / Cruise control system / 5
Active ECO system / Winter driving / Vehicle load limit / Etc.
What to do in an emergency 6
Road warning / Emergency while driving / Emergency starting / Engine overheat / Flat tire / Towing / Etc.
Maintenance
Engine compartment / Maintenance service / Engine oil / Engine coolant / Brake fluid / Washer fluid / 7
Parking brake / Air cleaner / Wiper blades / Battery / Tire and wheels / Fuses / Etc.
Specifications & Consumer information 8

Index I
ii
Introduction
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1

Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol . . . . . . . . . 1-3
• Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
• Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle Break-In Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Vehicle Data Collection and
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Introduction
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

We want to help you get the greatest The general layout of the manual is You will find various types of safety
possible driving pleasure from your provided in the Table of Contents. instructions in this manual. These
vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can Use the index when looking for a instructions were prepared to
assist you in many ways. We strong- specific area or subject; it has an enhance your personal safety.
ly recommend that you read the alphabetical listing of all located in Carefully read and follow ALL proce-
entire manual. In order to minimize the back of this manual. dures and recommendations provid-
the chance of death or injury, you Sections: This manual has eight sec- ed in these instructions.
must read the WARNING and CAU- tions plus an index. Each section
TION sections in the manual. begins with a brief list of contents so
Illustrations complement the words you can tell at a glance if that section
WARNING
in this manual to best explain how to has the information you want. A WARNING indicates a situation
enjoy your vehicle. By reading your in which harm, serious bodily
manual, you will learn about fea- injury or death could result if the
tures, important safety information, warning is ignored.
and driving tips under various road
conditions.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation
in which damage to your vehicle
could result if the caution is
ignored.
✽ NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or
helpful information is being provided.
1 2
Introduction
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Your new Kia vehicle is designed to ✽ NOTICE Vehicle damage or drivability prob-
use only unleaded fuel having a Tighten the cap until it clicks one lems may not be covered by the
pump octane number ((R+M)/2) of time, otherwise the Check Engine manufacturer's warranty if they result
87 (Research Octane Number 91) or light will illuminate. from the use of:
higher. (Do not use methanol blend-
ed fuels.) Gasoline containing alcohol and 1. Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
methanol
Your new vehicle is designed to obtain Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and 2. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
maximum performance with UNLEAD- ethanol (also known as grain alco- "E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com-
ED FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust hol), and gasoline or gasohol con- prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15
emissions and spark plug fouling. taining methanol (also known as percent gasoline, and is manufac-
wood alcohol) are being marketed tured exclusively for use in Flexible
along with or instead of leaded or Fuel Vehicles. “E85” is not compati-
Never add any fuel system cleaning unleaded gasoline. ble with your vehicle. Use of “E85”
agents to the fuel tank other than Pursuant to EPA regulations, ethanol may result in poor engine perform-
what has been specified. (Consult an may be used in your vehicle. Do not ance and damage to your vehicle's
authorized Kia dealer for details.) use gasohol containing more than engine and fuel system. Kia recom-
10% ethanol, and do not use gaso- mends that customers do not use
WARNING - Refueling line or gasohol containing any fuel with an ethanol content exceed-
methanol. Ethanol provides less ing 10 percent.
• Do not "top off" after the noz- energy than gasoline and it attracts
zle automatically shuts off. water, and it is thus likely to reduce
Attempts to force more fuel your fuel efficiency and could lower ✽ NOTICE
into the tank can cause fuel your MPG results. Methanol may Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
overflow onto you and the cause drivability problems and dam- does not cover damage to the fuel
ground causing a risk of fire. age to the fuel system, engine con- system or any performance prob-
• Always check that the fuel cap trol system and emission control sys- lems caused by the use of “E85” fuel.
is installed securely to pre- tem. Discontinue using gasohol of
vent fuel spillage, especially any kind if drivability problems occur.
in the event of an accident.
1 3
Introduction
Other fuels Gasoline containing MMT

Using fuels that contain Silicone (Si), Some gasoline contains harmful man- CAUTION
MMT (Manganese, Mn), Ferrocene ganese-based fuel additives such as Your New Vehicle Limited
(Fe), and other metallic additives MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Warranty may not cover damage
may cause vehicle and engine dam- Manganese Tricarbonyl). to the fuel system and any per-
age such as, but not limited to misfir- formance problems that are
Kia does not recommend the use of caused by the use of fuels con-
ing, poor acceleration, engine gasoline containing MMT.
stalling, catalyst melting, clogging, taining methanol or fuels con-
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle taining MTBE (Methyl Tertiary
abnormal corrosion, life cycle reduc- Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol.
tion, etc. performance and affect your emis-
sion control system. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)
Also the Malfunciton Indicator Lamp
(MIL) may illuminate. The malfunction indicator lamp on
the cluster may come on.
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood
✽ NOTICE Use of MTBE alcohol) should not be used in your
Damage to the fuel system or per- Kia recommends avoiding fuels con- vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce
formance problem caused by the use taining MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl vehicle performance and damage
of these fuels may not be covered by Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen components of the fuel system,
your New Vehicle Limited Content 2.7% weight) in your vehicle. engine control system and emission
Warranty. Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% control system.
vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight)
may reduce vehicle performance and
produce vapor lock or hard starting.
1 4
Introduction
VEHICLE BREAK-IN
Fuel Additives Operation in foreign countries PROCESS
Kia recommends that you use good If you are going to drive your vehicle No special break-in period is needed.
quality gasolines treated with deter- in another country, be sure to: By following a few simple precautions
gent additives such as TOP TIER for the first 1,000 km (600 miles) you
• Observe all regulations regarding
Detergent Gasoline, which helps may add to the performance, econo-
registration and insurance.
prevent deposit formation in the my and life of your vehicle.
engine. These gasolines will help the • Determine that acceptable fuel is
• Do not race the engine.
engine run cleaner and enhance per- available.
• While driving, keep your engine
formance of the Emission Control speed (rpm, or revolutions per
System. For more information on minute) between 2,000 rpm and
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline, 4,000 rpm.
please go to the website (www.top-
tiergas.com). • Do not maintain a single speed for
long periods of time, either fast or
For Customers who do not use TOP slow. Varying engine speed is
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, needed to properly break-in the
and have problems starting or the engine.
engine does not run smoothly, addi-
tives that you can buy separately • Avoid hard stops, except in emer-
may be added to the gasoline. If gencies, to allow the brakes to seat
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not properly.
available, one bottle of additive • Don't tow a trailer during the first
added to the fuel tank at 12,000 km 2,000 km (1,200 miles) of opera-
or every engine oil change is recom- tion.
mended. Additives are available from
your authorized Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do
not mix other additives.
1 5
Introduction
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

This vehicle is equipped with an These data can help provide a bet- To read data recorded by an EDR,
event data recorder (EDR). The ter understanding of the circum- special equipment is required, and
main purpose of an EDR is to stances in which crashes and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
record, in certain crash or near injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data needed. In addition to the vehicle
crash-like situations, such as an are recorded by your vehicle only manufacturer, other parties, such
air bag deployment or hitting a if a non-trivial crash situation as law enforcement, that have the
road obstacle, data that will assist occurs; no data are recorded by special equipment, can read the
in understanding how a vehicle's the EDR under normal driving con- information if they have access to
systems performed. The EDR is ditions and no personal data (e.g., the vehicle or the EDR.
designed to record data related to name, gender, age, and crash loca-
vehicle dynamics and safety sys- tion) are recorded. However, other
tems for a short period of time, parties, such as law enforcement,
typically 30 seconds or less. The could combine the EDR data with
EDR in this vehicle is designed to the type of personally identifying
record such data as: data routinely acquired during a
* How various systems in your crash investigation.
vehicle were operating;
* Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/ fastened;
* How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
* How fast the vehicle was travel-
ing.
1 6
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview .I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Interior
Exterior overview
overview .II.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-4
Instrument panel overview
Interior overview 2-5
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Engine compartment
Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
panel overview 2-6 2
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
■ Front view
1. Hood...................................................4-32
2. Head lamp..........................................4-98
3. Fog lamp ..........................................4-101
4. Wheel and tire ....................................7-44
5. Outside rearview mirror......................4-51
6. Front windshield wiper blades ...4-102, 7-39
7. Windows.............................................4-27
8. Parking assist system ........................4-89
9. Front removable towing hook .............6-24
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

OYDNIN3001
2 2
■ Rear view
10. Door locks ........................................4-18

11. Fuel filler lid......................................4-34
12. Rear combination lamp
13. High mounted stop lamp
14. Trunk.................................................4-22
15. Antenna..........................................4-147
16. Parking assist system ......................4-89

OYDEIN2002
2 3
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Driver position memory system

button ..................................................3-8
2. Inside door handle ............................4-18
3. Outside rearview mirror folding.........4-53
4. Outside rearview mirror control ........4-52
5. Central door lock switch....................4-19
6. Power window lock switch.................4-31
7. Power window switch ........................4-28
8. Instrument panel illumination control
switch ................................................4-56
9. Active ECO On/Off switch.................5-40
10. Parking assist system On/Off
button ..............................................4-89
11. ESC Off button................................5-27
12. Heated steering wheel On/Off
switch ..............................................4-43
13. Steering wheel ................................4-41
14. Tilt and telescopic steering control
lever ................................................4-42
15. Trunk lid open lever.........................4-22
16. Fuel filler lid open lever...................4-34
17. Inner fuse panel ..............................7-59
18. Hood release lever..........................4-32
OYDNIN2003
2 4
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
1. Instrument cluster................................4-55
2. Lighting control lever ...........................4-96
3. Audio remote control buttons ............4-148
4. Horn.....................................................4-42
5. Driver's front air bag ............................3-45
6. Cruise control button ...........................5-35
7. Wiper and washer control lever .........4-101
8. Ignition switch or
Engine start/stop button .................5-5, 5-7
9. Digital clock .......................................4-144
10. Hazard warning flasher .......................6-2
11. Audio ...............................................4-147
12. Climate control system.........4-110, 4-120
13. Shift lever .................................5-13, 5-16
14. Passenger's front air bag ..................3-45
15. Glove box ........................................4-135
16. Parking brake ....................................5-23
17. Cup holder.......................................4-139
18. LCD display control button ................4-57

OYDEIN2004CN
2 5
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ 1.8 / 2.0 Gasoline engine
1. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-29

2. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-29
3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir ...............7-34
4. Air cleaner.........................................7-36
5. Fuse box ...........................................7-58
■ 1.6 Turbo GDI engine
6. Positive battery terminal ...................7-41
7. Negative battery terminal..................7-41
8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-35
9. Radiator cap .....................................7-32
10. Engine coolant reservoir .................7-31
❈ The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OYDNMC2041/OYDNMC2067
2 6
Safety features of your vehicle
Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 • Occupant detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

• Front seat adjustment - Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 • Driver’s and passenger’s front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
• Front seat adjustment - Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 • Side air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
• Driver position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 • Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
• Headrest (Front seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 • Inflation/non-inflation conditions of air bag . . . . . . 3-50
• Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 • SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
• Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 • Air bag warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56 3
• Headrest (Rear seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
• Folding the rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
• Seat belt warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
• Seat belt (3-point system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
• Pre-tensioner seat belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
• Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
• Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
• Using a child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
• Tether anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
• Lower anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Air bag-supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . 3-34
• Air bag system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
• Do not install a child restraint on a front
passenger’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
• Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
• SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
SEAT
Driver’s seat
(1) Seat adjustment, forward / back-
ward
(2) Seatback recliner
(3) Seat adjustment, height (for driver’s
seat)
(4) Lumbar support (for driver’s seat)
Manual seat
(5) Driver position memory system*
(6) Headrest
(7) Walk-in seat (for 2 Door)
• 5 Door Front passenger’s seat

(8) Seat adjustment, forward / back-
Power seat
ward
(9) Seatback recliner
(10) Headrest
(11) Walk-in seat (for 2 Door)
• 4 Door
Rear seat
(12) Armrest
(13) Headrest
(14) Seatback folding lever
(trunk, for 4 Door)*
(14) Seatback folding lever
(for 5 Door)
OYD033001
* : if equipped
3 2
WARNING - Loose WARNING - Driver WARNING - Driver’s seat

objects responsibility for passengers • Never attempt to adjust the
Do not place anything in the dri- seat while the vehicle is mov-
ver's foot well or under the front ing. This could result in loss
seats. Loose objects in the dri- of control of your vehicle.
ver's foot area could interfere with • Do not allow anything to inter-
the operation of the foot pedals. fere with the normal position
of the seatback and seatback
adjustment.
WARNING - Uprighting • Sit as far back as possible
seat from the steering wheel while
Do not press the release lever on still maintaining comfortable
1KMN3661
a manual seatback without hold- control of your vehicle. A dis-
The driver must advise the pas- tance of at least 10" from your
ing and controlling the seatback. senger to keep the seatback in
The seatback will spring upright chest to the steering wheel is
an upright position whenever recommended. Failure to do
possibly impacting you or other the vehicle is in motion. If a seat
passengers. so could result in air bag infla-
is reclined during an accident, tion injuries to the driver.
the restraint system's ability to
restrain will be greatly reduced.
WARNING - Seat cushion
Occnpants should never sit on
aftermarket seat cushions or sit-
ting cushions. The passenger's
hips may slide under the lap por-
tion of the seat belt during an
accident or a sudden stop.
3 3
Front seat adjustment - manual

WARNING - Seat adjust- Forward and backward
WARNING - Unexpected
ment seat movement
• Do not adjust the seat while After adjusting a manual seat,
wearing seat belts. Moving the always check that it is locked by
seat forward will cause strong shifting your weight to the front
pressure on the abdomen. and back. Sudden or unexpect-
• Do not place your hand near ed movement of the driver's
the seat bottom or seat track seat could cause you to lose
while adjusting the seat. Your control of the vehicle.
hand could get caught in the
seat mechanism.
OYDDSA2002
WARNING - Small Objects
Use extreme caution when pick- To move the seat forward or back-
ing small objects trapped under ward:
the seats or between the seat 1. Pull the seat slide adjustment
and the center console. Your lever up and hold it.
hands might be cut or injured 2. Slide the seat to the position you
by the sharp edges of the seats desire.
mechanism.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place.
Adjust the seat before driving, and
make sure the seat is locked securely
by trying to move forward and back-
ward without using the lever. If the
seat moves, it is not locked properly.
3 4
Seatback angle Seat cushion height Lumbar support (for driver’s seat)
(for driver's seat)
OYDDSA2003 OYDDSA2008
To recline the seatback: OYDDSA2004 Press the front portion of the switch
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the To change the height of the seat to increase support, or the rear por-
seatback recline lever. cushion push the lever upwards or tion of the switch to decrease sup-
downwards. port.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat
and adjust the seatback of the • To lower the seat cushion, push the
seat to the position you desire. lever down several times.
3. Release the lever and make sure • To raise the seat cushion, push the
the seatback is locked in place. lever up several times.
(The lever MUST return to its orig-
inal position for the seatback to
lock.)
3 5
Front seat adjustment - power Forward and backward

CAUTION - Power seat
The front seat can be adjusted by adjustments
using the control switch located on
the outside of the seat cushion. The power seating controls
Before driving, adjust the seat to the function by electronic motor.
proper position so as to easily con- Excessive operation may cause
trol the steering wheel, pedals and damage to the electrical equip-
switches on the instrument panel. ment.
WARNING - Unattended
children CAUTION - Power Seating
Do not leave children unattend- Do not operate two or more
ed in the vehicle. Children might power seat control switches at OYDDSA2005
operate features of the vehicle the same time. Doing so may Push the control switch forward or
that could injure them. damage the power seat motor or backward to move the seat to the
electrical components. desired position. Release the switch
once the seat reaches the desired
position.
When in operation, the power seat-
consumes a large amount of electri-
cal power. To prevent unnecessary
charging system drain, don’t adjust
the power seat longer than neces-
sary while the engine is not running.
3 6
Seatback angle Seat cushion height Lumbar support

(for driver's side) (for driver’s seat, if equipped)
OYDDSA2006
Push the control switch forward or OYDDSA2007 OYDDSA2008
backward to move the seatback to Pull the front portion of the control The lumbar support can be adjusted
the desired angle. Release the switch up to raise or down to lower by pressing the lumbar support
switch once the seat reaches the the front part of the seat cushion. Pull switch on the side of the driver's
desired position. the rear portion of the control switch seat. Press the front portion of the
up to raise or down to lower the rear switch to increase support, or the
part of the seat cushion. Release the rear portion of the switch to decrease
switch once the seat reaches the support.
desired position.
3 7
Driver position memory system Recalling positions from memory

(if equipped, for power seat) WARNING - Driver posi- 1. Shift the shift lever into P while the
tion memory system ignition switch is ON.
Never attempt to operate the 2. To recall the position in memory,
driver position memory system press the desired memory button
while the vehicle is moving. (1 or 2). The system will beep
This could result in loss of con- once, then the driver seat will
trol of your vehicle, and an acci- automatically adjust to the stored
dent causing death, serious positions.
injury. Adjusting the control switch for the
driver seat while the system is recall-
ing the stored position will cause the
Storing positions into memory movement to stop and move in the
OYDDSA2014
using the buttons on the door direction that the control switch is
Storing driver’s seat positions moved.
A driver position memory system is
provided to store and recall the driver 1. Shift the shift lever into P while the
seat position with a simple button ignition switch is ON.
operation. By saving the desired posi- 2. Adjust the driver seat to position
tion into the system memory, different comfortable for the driver.
drivers can reposition the driver seat 3. Press SET button on the control
based upon their driving preference. panel. The system will beep once.
If the battery is disconnected, the
4. Press one of the memory buttons
desired seat position memory will
(1 or 2) within 5 seconds after
need to be re-saved.
pressing the SET button. The sys-
tem will beep twice when memory
has been successfully stored.
3 8
Easy access function Headrest (for front seat) For maximum effectiveness in case
(if equipped) of an accident, the headrest should
With the shift lever in the P position, be adjusted so the middle of the
the system will move the driver's seat headrest is at the same height of the
automatically as follows: center of gravity of an occupant's
head. Generally, the center of gravity
• Without smart key system of most people's head is similar with
- It will move the driver’s seat rear- the height of the top of their eyes.
ward when the ignition key is Also, adjust the headrest as close to
removed and front driver’s door is your head as possible.
opened. For this reason, the use of a cushion
- It will move the driver’s seat for- that holds the body away from the
ward when the ignition key is seatback is not recommended.
inserted. OMG038400
• With smart key system The driver's and front passenger's

- It will move the driver’s seat rear- seats are equipped with a headrest
ward when the engine start/stop for the occupant's safety and comfort.
button is turned to the OFF posi- The headrest not only provides com-
tion and front driver’s door is fort for the driver and front passen-
opened. ger, but also helps protect the head
- It will move the driver’s seat for- and neck in the event of a collision.
ward when the engine start/stop
button is turned to the ACC or
START position.
You can activate or deactivate this

feature. Refer to "User settings" in
chapter 4.
3 9
Adjusting the height up and down

WARNING - Headrest
removal/adjustment
• Do not operate the vehicle
with the headrests removed.
Headrests can provide critical
neck and head support in a
crash.
• Do not adjust the headrest
height while the vehicle is in
motion. Driver may lose con-
trol of the vehicle. OYFH034205
OYDDSA2009 ✽ NOTICE
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the If you recline the seatback towards
desired position (1). To lower the the front with the headrest and seat
headrest, push and hold the release cushion raised, the headrest may
button (2) on the headrest support come in contact with the sunvisor or
and lower the headrest to the desired other parts of the vehicle.
position (3).
3 10
Removal and installation 3. Press the headrest release button ■ Type A

(3) while pulling the headrest up (4).
■ Type A
WARNING - Headrest
Removal
NEVER allow anyone to ride in a
seat with the headrest removed.
Headrests can provide critical
neck and head support in a
crash. OYD034101
■ Type B
OYD034100
■ Type B
OYD034103
OYD034102 To reinstall the headrest :

1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the
To remove the headrest:
holes while pressing the release
1. Recline the seatback (2) with the button (1).
recline switch (1).
2. Recline the seatback (4) with the
2. Raise headrest as far as it can go. recline switch or lever (3).
3 11
3. Adjust the headrest to the appro- Rear seat entry (for 2 door) Seatback pocket
priate height.
WARNING - Headrest
Reinstallation
To reduce the risk of injury to the
head or neck, always make sure
the head rest is locked into posi-
tion and adjusted properly after
reinstalling.
OYD033002 OYDDCO2051
The driver and front passenger's The seatback pocket is provided on

seatback should be tilted to enter the the back of the front passenger’s
rear seat. seatback.
By pulling up the walk-in seat lever (1)
on the back of the driver and front WARNING - Seatback
passenger’s seatback, the seatback pocket
will tilt forward. Then push the seat for-
ward to allow the occupants to enter. Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the seatback pocket.
By pulling up the seatback, the seat- An occupant could contact such
back will recline and return to the objects in a crash. Heavy
original position. objects in the front passenger
seatback could also interfere
with the air bag sensing system.
3 12
Rear seat adjustment For maximum effectiveness in case

of an accident, the headrest should
Headrest (for rear seat) be adjusted so the middle of the
headrest is at the same height of the
center of gravity of an occupant's
head. Generally, the center of gravity
of most people's head is similar with
the height as the top of their eyes.
Also adjust the headrest as close to
your head as possible. For this rea-
son, the use of a cushion that holds
the body away from the seatback is OYDDSA2012
not recommended. Adjusting the height up and down
ONF039401
(if equipped)
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
The rear seat is equipped with head- desired position (1). To lower the
rests in all the seating positions for headrest, push and hold the release
the occupant's safety and comfort. button (2) on the headrest support
The headrest not only provides com- and lower the headrest to the desired
fort for passengers, but also helps position (3).
protect the head and neck in the
event of a collision.
3 13
Armrest Folding the rear seat

The rear seatbacks may be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.
WARNING - Folded
Seatback
Never allow passengers to sit
on top of the folded down seat-
OYDDSA2013 back while the vehicle is mov-
Removal and installation ing. This is not a proper seating
OYDDSA2019 position and no seat belts are
To remove the headrest, raise it as To use the armrest, pull it forward available for use. This could
far as it can go then press the from the seatback. result in serious injury or death
release button (1) while pulling the in case of an accident or sud-
headrest upward (2). den stop.
To reinstall the headrest, put the
headrest poles (3) into the holes
while pressing the release button (1). WARNING - Objects
Then adjust it to the appropriate
height and ensure that it locks in Objects carried on the folded
position. down seatback should not
extend higher than the top of
the front seatbacks. This could
allow cargo to slide forward and
cause injury or damage during
sudden stops.
3 14
OYDDSA2016
OYDDSA2017 OYDDSA3042
To fold the rear seatback • 5 door
• 4 door, 2door 1. Set the front seatback to the
1. Make sure the rear seat belt web- upright position and if necessary,
bing is in the guide to prevent the slide the front seat forward.
seat belt from being damaged. 2. Lower the rear headrests to lowest
2. Set the front seatback to the position.
upright position and if necessary, 3. Pull the lock release lever (1) and
slide the front seat forward. OYDDSA2018 fold the rear seatback forward and
3. Lower the rear headrests to the down firmly.
4.Pull the lock release lever (1) and
lowest position. fold the rear seatback forward and
4. Open the trunk. down firmly.
If the seat belt locks after unfolding
the rear seatback, pull out the
locked seat belt, release it then pull
it out again.
3 15
4. To use the rear seat, lift and pull To unfold the rear seat
the seatback backward. Pull the 1. To use the rear seat, lift and pull WARNING - Rear seatback
seatback firmly until it clicks into the seatback rearward. Pull the When returning the rear seat-
place. Make sure the seatback is seatback firmly until it clicks into back from a folded to an upright
locked in place. When you return place. Make sure the seatback is position, hold the seatback and
the seatback to its upright posi- locked in place. When you return return it slowly. Ensure that the
tion, always be sure it has locked the seatback to its upright posi- seatback is completely locked
into position by pushing on the top tion, always be sure it has locked into its upright position by
of the seatback. into position by pushing on the top pushing on the top of the seat-
If you can not see the red line at of the seatback. back. In an accident or sudden
the folding lever, it means the seat- 2. Return the rear seat belt to the stop, the unlocked seatback
back is locked completely. proper position. could allow cargo to move for-
ward with great force and enter
3. When the seatback is completely the passenger compartment.
installed, check the seatback fold-
ing lever again.
When returning the rear seatbacks to WARNING - Cargo

the upright position, remember to Do not place heavy objects in
return the rear shoulder belts to their the rear seats, since they can-
proper position. not be properly secured and
may hit vehicle occupants in a
frontal collision.
3 16
SEAT BELTS
Seat belt restraint system • For maximum restraint system pro-
Seat belts are designed to bear upon tection, the seat belts must always WARNING - Twisted seat
the bony structure of the body, and be used whenever the vehicle is belt
should be worn low across the front moving. A properly positioned Make sure your seat belt is not
of the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as shoulder belt should be positioned twisted when worn. A twisted
applicable; wearing the lap section of midway over your shoulder across seat belt may not properly pro-
the belt across the abdominal area your collarbone. tect you in an accident and
must be avoided. • Never allow children to ride in the could even cut into your body.
Seat belts should be adjusted as front passenger seat. See child
firmly as possible, consistent with restraint system section for further
discussion.
comfort, to provide the protection for WARNING - Seat belt
which they have been designed. buckle
A slack belt will greatly reduce the WARNING - Shoulder belt Do not allow foreign material
protection afforded to the wearer. Never wear the shoulder belt (gum, crumbs, coins, etc.) to
Care should be taken to avoid con- under your arm or behind your obstruct the seat belt buckle.
tamination of the webbing with pol- back. An improperly positioned This may prevent the seat belt
ishes, oils and chemicals, and partic- shoulder belt cannot protect the from fastening securely.
ularly battery acid. Cleaning may occupant in a crash.
safely be carried out using mild soap
and water. The belt should be
replaced if webbing becomes frayed, WARNING - Damaged
contaminated or damaged. seat belt
Replace the entire seat belt
assembly if any part of the web-
bing or hardware is damaged as
you can no longer be sure that a
damaged seat belt will provide
protection in a crash.
3 17
Seat belt warning Conditions Warning Pattern Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system
(for driver’s seat) Vehicle Chime- with emergency locking retractor
Seat Belt Light-Blink
Speed Sound
Unbuckled 6 seconds
Buckled 6 seconds None
Below 5 km/h
6 seconds None
(3 mph)
Buckled → 5 km/h~
6 seconds
Unbuckled 10 km/h
Above 10 km/h 6 sec. on / 24 sec. off
(6 mph) (11 times)
Above 10 km/h
(6 mph) 6 seconds *1
1GQA2083 B180A01NF-1
Unbuckled ↓ ↓
The driver's seat belt warning light Below 5 km/h Stop * 2
To fasten your seat belt:
and chime will activate to the follow- (3 mph) To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of
ing table when the ignition switch is the retractor and insert the metal tab
in "ON" position. *1 Warning pattern repeats 11 times (1) into the buckle (2). There will be
with an interval of 24 seconds. If an audible "click" when the tab locks
the driver's seat belt is buckled, the into the buckle.
light will stop within 6 seconds and
chime will stop immediately.
* The light will stop within 6 seconds
2
and chime will stop immediately.
3 18
The seat belt automatically adjusts to To raise the height adjuster, pull it up
the proper length only after the lap (1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
belt portion is adjusted manually so pressing the height adjuster button (2).
that it fits snugly around your hips. If Release the button to lock the anchor
you lean forward in a slow, easy into position. Try sliding the height
motion, the belt will extend and let adjuster to make sure that it has
you move around. If there is a sud- locked into position.
den stop or impact, however, the belt Never position the shoulder belt
will lock into position. It will also lock across your neck or face.
if you try to lean forward too quickly.
If you are unable to pull out the seat
belt from the retractor, firmly pull the OMG035038
WARNING - Seat belt
belt out and release it. Then you will replacement
Height adjustment
be able to pull the belt out smoothly. Replace your seat belts after
You can adjust the height of the being in an accident. Failure to
shoulder belt anchor to one of the 4 replace seat belts after an acci-
positions for maximum comfort and dent could leave you with dam-
safety. aged seat belts that will not pro-
The height of the adjusting seat belt vide protection in the event of
should not be too close to your neck. another collision.
The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so that it lies across your
chest and midway over your shoulder
nearest the door and not your neck. WARNING - Shoulder belt
positioning
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height Never position the shoulder belt
adjuster into an appropriate position. across your neck or face.
3 19
Seat belts - Front passenger and It automatically adjusts to the proper

rear seat 3-point system with length only after the lap belt portion
combination locking retractor of the seat belt is adjusted manually
To fasten your seat belt so that it fits snugly around your hips.
Combination retractor type seat belts When the seat belt is fully extended
are installed in the rear seat posi- from the retractor to allow the instal-
tions to help accommodate the lation of a child restraint system, the
installation of child restraint systems. seat belt operation changes to allow
Although a combination retractor is the belt to retract, but not to extend
also installed in the front passenger (Automatic Locking Retractor Type).
seat position, it is strongly recom- Refer to “Using a child restraint sys-
B200A01NF mended that children always be tem” in this section.
You should place the lap belt portion seated in the rear seat. NEVER To convert from the automatic lock-
as low as possible and snugly across place an infant restraint system in ing feature to the emergency locking
your hips. If the lap belt is located too the front seat of the vehicle. operation mode, allow the unbuckled
high on your waist, it may increase This type of seat belt combines the seat belt to fully retract.
the chance of injury in the event of a features of both an emergency lock-
collision. ing retractor seat belt and an auto-
The arm closest to the seat belt matic locking retractor seat belt. To
buckle should be over the belt while fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
the other arm should be under the retractor and insert the metal tab into
belt as shown in the illustration. the buckle. There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the
buckle. When not securing a child
restraint, the seat belt operates in the
same way as the driver's seat belt
(Emergency Locking Retractor Type).
3 20
Shoulder belt extension guide

(for 2 door)
OYDDSA2021 B210A01NF-1
When using the rear center seat belt, To release the seat belt
the buckle with the “CENTER” mark The seat belt is released by pressing OUB031053L
must be used. the release button (1) of the locking
buckle. When it is released, the belt You can adjust the position of the
should automatically draw back into shoulder belt extension guide for
the retractor. easier access to the shoulder belt.
If this does not happen, check the Set the belt extension guide to the
belt to be sure it is not twisted, then position (1~3) when using the seat
try again. belt.
3 21
Pre-tensioner seat belt 2. Emergency Fastening Device

(EFD)
The Emergency Fastening Device
(EFD) is a supplemental system of
the seat belts. The purpose of the
EFD is to tighten the lap belt against
the occupant's pelvis in certain
frontal collisions.
The pre-tensioner seat belts may be

activated, when a frontal collision is
ODMESA2024
severe enough, together with the air
OXMA033101 bags. The seat belt pre-tensioner system
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or consists mainly of the following com-
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's ponents. Their locations are shown in
and front passenger's pre-tensioner if the occupant tries to lean forward
too quickly, the seat belt retractor the illustration:
seat belts. 1. SRS air bag warning light
may lock into position. In certain
1. Retractor pre-tensioner frontal collisions (or side collisions), 2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
The retractor pre-tensioner, which is the pre-tensioner may activate and 3. SRS control module
a supplement system of the seat pull the seat belt into tighter contact
belts. The purpose of the retractor against the occupant's body. 4. Emergency fastening device (EFD)
pre-tensioner is to tighten the shoul- If the system senses excessive ten-
der belt against the occupant's upper sion on the driver or passenger's
body in certain frontal collisions. seat belt when the pre-tensioner acti-
vates, the load limiter inside the
retractor pre-tensioner will release
some of the pressure on the affected
seat belt.
3 22
To obtain maximum benefit from a ✽ NOTICE

pre-tensioner seat belt: When the pre-tensioner seat belts WARNING - Skin irritation
1. The seat belt must be worn cor- are activated, a loud noise may be Wash all exposed skin areas
rectly and adjusted to the proper heard and fine dust, which may thoroughly after an accident in
position. Please read and follow all appear to be smoke, may be visible which the pre-tensioner seat
of the important information and in the passenger compartment. belts were activated. The fine
precautions about your vehicle's These are normal operating condi- dust from the pre-tensioner
occupant safety features - includ- tions and are not hazardous. activation may cause skin irrita-
ing seat belts and air bags - that tion and should not be breathed
are provided in this manual. for prolonged periods.
2. Be sure you and your passengers
always wear seat belts properly.
3 23
Because the sensor that activates the Seat belt precautions

SRS air bag is connected with the WARNING - Hot pre - Infant or small child
pre-tensioner seat belt, the SRS air tensioner
bag warning light ( ) on the instru- You should be aware of the specific
Do not touch the pre-tensioner
ment panel will illuminate for approxi- requirements in your country. Child
seat belt assemblies for several
mately 6 seconds after the ignition and/or infant seats must be properly
minutes after they have been
switch has been turned to the ON placed and installed in the rear seat.
activated. When the pre-ten-
position, and then it should turn off. For more information about the use
sioner seat belt mechanism
of these restraints, refer to “Child
If the pre-tensioner seat belt does fires during a collision the pre-
restraint system” in this section.
not work properly, this warning light tensioner becomes hot and can
will illuminate even if the SRS air bag burn you.
has not malfunctioned. If the SRS air
bag warning light does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned Pre-tensioners are designed to oper-
ON, or if it remains illuminated after ate only one time. After activation,
illuminating for approximately 6 sec- pre-tensioner seat belts must be
onds, or if it illuminates while the replaced. If the pre-tensioner must
vehicle is being driven, please have be replaced, contact an authorized
an authorized Kia dealer inspect the Kia dealer.
pre-tensioner seat belt or SRS air
bag system as soon as possible.
✽ NOTICE
Do not attempt to service or repair
the pre-tensioner seat belt system in
any manner. Do not attempt to
inspect or replace the pre-tensioner
seat belts yourself. This must be
done by an authorized Kia dealer.
3 24
Larger children Restraint of pregnant women

Children who are too large for child WARNING - Small chil- Pregnant women should wear
restraint systems should always occu- dren lap/shoulder belt assemblies when-
py the rear seat and use the available Do not allow small children to ever possible according to specific
lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion ride in the vehicle without an recommendations by their doctors.
should be fastened snug on the hips appropriate child restraint sys- The lap portion of the belt should be
and as low as possible. Periodically tem. If the shoulder belt comes worn AS SNUGLY AND LOW AS
check belt fit. A child's squirming could in contact with your child's neck POSSIBLE on the hips, not across
put the belt out of position. Children or face your child is too small to the abdomen.
are given the most safety in the event ride in the vehicle. In a crash the
of an accident when they are seat belt will inflict injury to your
restrained by a proper restraint system child's neck, throat and face. WARNING - Pregnant
in the rear seat. If a larger child (over women
age 12) must be seated in the front Pregnant women must never
seat, the child should be securely place the lap portion of the seat
restrained by the available lap/shoul- belt above or on the abdomen
der belt and the seat should be placed where the fetus is located. The
in the rearmost position. Children age force of the seat belt during a
12 and under should be restrained collision will crush the fetus.
securely in the rear seat. NEVER
place a child age 12 and under in the
front seat. NEVER place a rear facing
child seat in the front seat of a vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly
touches the child’s neck or face, try
placing the child closer to the center of
the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still
touches their face or neck they need to
be returned to a child restraint system.
3 25
Injured person Care of seat belts When to replace seat belts

A seat belt should be used when an Seat belt systems should never be The entire in-use seat belt assembly
injured person is being transported. disassembled or modified. In addi- or assemblies should be replaced if
When this is necessary, you should tion, care should be taken to assure the vehicle has been involved in an
consult a physician for recommenda- that seat belts and belt hardware are accident. This should be done even if
tions. not damaged by seat hinges, doors no damage is visible. Additional
or other abuse. questions concerning seat belt oper-
ation should be directed to an
One person per belt authorized Kia dealer.
Two people (including children) Periodic inspection
should never attempt to use a single All seat belts should be inspected
seat belt. This could increase the periodically for wear or damage of WARNING - Pinched Seat
severity of injuries in case of an acci- any kind. Any damaged parts should belts
dent. be replaced as soon as possible. Make sure that the webbing
and/or buckle does not get
Do not lie down Keep belts clean and dry caught or pinched in the rear
seat when returning the rear
To reduce the chance of injuries in the Seat belts should be kept clean and seatback to its upright position.
event of an accident and to achieve dry. If belts become dirty, they can be A caught or pinched
maximum effectiveness of the cleaned by using a mild soap solu- webbing/buckle may become
restraint system, all passengers tion and warm water. Bleach, dye, damaged and could fail during a
should be sitting up and the front strong detergents or abrasives collision or sudden stop.
seats should be in an upright position should not be used because they
when the vehicle is moving. A seat may damage and weaken the fabric.
belt cannot provide proper protection
if the person is lying down in the rear
seat or if the front seat is in a reclined
position.
3 26
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

Children riding in the car should sit in Follow all the instructions provided
the rear seat and must always be by the manufacturer when installing WARNING - Holding
properly restrained to minimize the the child restraint system. children
risk of injury in an accident, sudden Never hold a child in your arms
stop or sudden maneuver. According WARNING- Restraint or lap when riding in a vehicle.
to accident statistics, children are location The violent forces created dur-
safer when properly restrained in the ing a crash will tear the child
rear seats than in the front seat. Never install a child or infant seat
on the front passenger's seat. from your arms and throw the
Larger children not in a child restraint child against the car’s interior.
should use one of the seat belts pro- A child riding in the front pas-
vided.You should be aware of the spe- senger seat can be forcefully Always use a child restraint
cific requirements in your country. struck by an inflating air bag. system which is appropriate for
Child and/or infant safety seats must your child's height and weight.
be properly placed and installed in the
rear seat.You must use a commercial- WARNING- Hot child
ly available child restraint system that restraint WARNING - Seat belt use
meets the requirements of the safety
A child restraint system can Do not use one seat belt for two
standards of your country. Child
become very hot if it is left in a occupants at the same time.
restraint systems are designed to be
closed vehicle on a sunny day. Be This will eliminate any safety
secured in vehicle seats by seat belt,
sure to check the seat cover, benefit provided by the seat belt
or by a tether anchor and/or LATCH
buckles and latches before plac- to the occupants.
anchors (if equipped).
ing a child in the restraint system.
Children could be injured or killed in a
crash if their restraints are not proper-
ly secured. For small children and When the child restraint system is not
babies, a child seat or infant seat must in use, store it in the luggage area or
be used. Before buying a particular fasten it with a seat belt so that it will
child restraint system, make sure it fits not be thrown forward in case of a
your car seat and seat belts, and fits sudden stop or an accident.
your child.
3 27
Using a child restraint system For safety reasons, we recommend

Rear- facing child restraint system
that the child restraint system be WARNING - Child seat
used in the rear seats. installation
Since all passenger seat belts move • Always follow the instructions
freely under normal conditions and provided by the child restraint
only lock under extreme or emer- system manufacturer. Child
gency conditions (emergency lock restraint system manufactur-
mode), you must manually change ers know their products best.
these seat belts to the auto lock • Failure to observe this manu-
mode to secure a child restraint. al's instructions regarding
If the seat belt does not operate as child restraint system and the
CRS09 described in this section, have the instructions provided with the
Forward-facing child restraint system system checked immediately by your child restraint system could
authorized Kia dealer. result in the improper installa-
tion of the child restraint sys-
tem which may reduce the
WARNING - Unattended protection to your child in a
Children crash or a sudden stop.
Never leave children unattended
in a vehicle. The vehicle can heat
up very quickly, resulting in ✽ NOTICE
injuries to the child in the vehicle. If the vehicle headrest prevents
OTQ037038 proper installation of a child seat (as
For small children and babies, the described in the child seat system
use of a child seat or infant seat is manual), the headrest of the respec-
required. This child seat or infant tive seating position shall be read-
seat should be of appropriate size for justed or entirely removed.
the child and should be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
3 28
Placing a passenger seat belt

into the auto lock mode
OEN036101 OEN036102
To install a child restraint system on 3. Pull the shoulder portion of the
E2MS103005
the outboard or center rear seats, do seat belt all the way out. When the
the following: shoulder portion of the seat belt is
The auto lock mode will help prevent 1. Place the child restraint system in fully extended, it will shift the
the normal movement of the child in the seat and route the lap/shoul- retractor to the “Auto Lock” (child
the vehicle from causing the seat belt der belt around or through the restraint) mode.
to loosen and compromise the child restraint, following the restraint
restraint system. To secure a child manufacturer’s instructions. Be
restraint system, use the following sure the seat belt webbing is not
procedure. twisted.
2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the dis-
tinct “click” sound.
Position the release button so that it
is easy to access in case of an emer-
gency.
3 29
The lap/shoulder belt automatically

returns to the “emergency lock
mode” whenever the belt is allowed
to retract fully.
Therefore, the preceding seven
steps must be followed each time a
child restraint is installed.
To remove the child restraint, press
the release button on the buckle and
then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of
the restraint and allow the seat belt
OEN036103 OEN036104 to retract fully.
4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion 5. Remove as much slack from the
of the seat belt to retract and listen belt as possible by pushing down
for an audible “clicking” or “ratchet- on the child restraint system while WARNING - Auto lock
ing” sound. This indicates that the feeding the shoulder belt back into mode
retractor is in the “Auto Lock” the retractor. Set the retractor to Automatic
mode. If no distinct sound is 6. Push and pull on the child restraint Lock mode when installing any
heard, repeat steps 3 and 4. system to confirm that the seat belt child restraint system.
is holding it firmly in place. If it is If the retractor is not in the Auto
not, release the seat belt and Lock mode, the child restraint
repeat steps 2 through 6. can move when your vehicle
7. Double check that the retractor is in turns or stops suddenly.
the “Auto Lock” mode by attempting
to pull more of the seat belt out of
the retractor. If you cannot, the
retractor is in the “Auto Lock” mode.
3 30
Securing a child restraint seat This symbol indicates the

with tether anchorage system position of the tether
anchor.
• 4 Door, 2 Door
OTF030030N
OYDESA4022 1.Route the child restraint seat teth-
• 5 Door er strap over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable head-
rests, route the tether strap under
the headrest (remove the headrest
and the re-install it) and between
the headrest posts, otherwise
route the tether strap over the top
of the seatback.
OYDDSA3043
Child restraint hook holders are

located on the package tray (4 Door,
2 Door) or the floor behind the rear
seat (5 Door).
3 31
2. Connect the tether strap hook to Securing a child restraint seat with
the appropriate child restraint child seat lower anchor system
hook holder and tighten to secure
the child restraint seat.
Lower Anchor
Position Indicator
WARNING - Tether strap
Lower Anchor
Never mount more than one
child restraint to a single tether
or to a single lower anchorage
point. The increased load
caused by multiple seats may
OTF030031N
cause the tethers or anchorage
points to break. Child restraint symbols are located
B230D01NF
on the left and right rear seat backs
to indicate the position of the lower
Check that the child restraint system Some child seat manufacturers anchors for child restraints.
is secure by pushing and pulling it in make child restraint seats that are
different directions. Incorrectly fitted labeled as LATCH or LATCH-com-
child restraints may swing, twist, tip patible child restraint seats. LATCH WARNING - Unused rear
or separate causing death or serious stands for "Lower Anchors and seatbelts
injury. Tethers for Children". These seats Always fasten the seatbelts
include two rigid or webbing mount- behind the child restraint seat
ed attachments that connect to two when they are not used to
LATCH anchors at specific seating secure the child seat. Failure to
positions in your vehicle. This type of do so may result in child stran-
child restraint seat eliminates the gulation.
need to use seat belts to attach the
child seat in the rear seats.
3 32
When you install your child's restraint

system using the LATCH anchors WARNING - LATCH lower
buckle the shoulder lap belt, then anchors
lock the retractor and pull the belt to Never attempt to attach a
remove the slack in the belt so it lies LATCH equipped seat in the
flat against the vehicle seat. center seating position. LATCH
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s lower anchors are only to be
instructions to properly install child used with the left and right rear
restraint seats with LATCH or outboard seating positions. You
LATCH-compatible attachments. may damage the anchors or the
Once you have installed the LATCH anchors may fail and break in a
OTD039037N child restraint, assure that the seat is collision.
LATCH anchors have been provided properly attached to the LATCH and
in your vehicle. The LATCH anchors tether anchors.
are located in the left and right out- Also, test the child restraint seat
board rear seating positions. Their before you place the child in it. Tilt
locations are shown in the illustra- the seat from side to side. Also try to
tion. There is no LATCH anchor pro- tug the seat forward. Check to see if
vided for the center rear seating the anchors hold the seat in place.
position.
The LATCH anchors are located
between the seatback and the seat
cushion of the rear seat left and right
outboard seating positions.
3 33
AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

(1) Driver’s front air bag
(2) Passenger’s front air bag
(3) Side air bag
(4) Curtain air bag
Even in vehicles with air bags, you

and your passengers must always
wear the safety belts provided in
order to minimize the risk and sever-
ity of injury in the event of a collision
or rollover.
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OYDESA2024CN
3 34
How does the air bag system • The front air bags will completely • There are even circumstances
operate inflate and deflate in an instant. under which contact with the
• Air bags are activated (able to It is virtually impossible for you to steering wheel air bag can cause
inflate if necessary) only when the see the air bags inflate during an fatal injuries, especially if the
ignition switch is turned to the ON accident. It is much more likely that occupant is positioned exces-
or START the appropriate position. you will simply see the deflated air sively close to the steering
bags hanging out of their storage wheel.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the
event of serious frontal or side col- compartments after the collision.
lision (if equipped with side air bag • In order to help provide protection WARNING - Airbag
or curtain air bag) in order to help in a severe collision, the air bags
Inflation
protect the occupants from serious must inflate rapidly. The speed of
physical injury. air bag inflation is a consequence Sit as far back as possible from
of extremely short time in which a the steering wheel while still
• There is no single speed at which maintaining comfortable con-
the air bags will inflate. collision occurs and the need to
get the air bag between the occu- trol of the your vehicle. A dis-
Generally, air bags are designed to pant and the vehicle structures tance of at least 10" (25cm)
inflate based upon the severity of a before the occupant impacts those from your chest to the steering
collision and its direction. These structures. This speed of inflation wheel is recommended. Failure
two factors determine whether the reduces the risk of serious or life- to do so can result in airbag
sensors produce an electronic threatening injuries in a severe col- inflation injuries to the driver.
deployment/ inflation signal. lision and is thus a necessary part
• Air bag deployment depends on a of air bag design.
number of complex factors includ- However, air bag inflation can also
ing vehicle speed, angles of impact cause injuries which can include
and the density and stiffness of the facial abrasions, bruises and bro-
vehicles or objects which your ken bones because the inflation
vehicle hits in the collision. Though, speed also causes the air bags to
factors are not limited to those expand with a great deal of force.
mentioned above.
3 35
Noise and smoke Installing a child restraint on a

When the air bags inflate, they make WARNING front passenger’s seat is forbidden
a loud noise and they leave smoke - Hot components
and powder in the air inside of the Do not touch the air bag storage
vehicle. This is normal and is a result area's internal components
of the ignition of the air bag inflator. immediately after air bag infla-
After the air bag inflates, you may tion. The air bag related parts in
feel substantial discomfort in breath- the steering wheel, instrument
ing due to the contact of your chest panel and the roof rails above
to both the seat belt and the air bag, the front and rear doors are
as well as from breathing the smoke very hot. Hot components can
and powder. Open your doors result in burn injuries.
and/or windows as soon as possi-
ble after the impact in order to
reduce discomfort and prevent 1JBH3051
prolonged exposure to smoke and Never place a rear-facing child
powder. restraint in the front passenger’s
Though smoke and powder are non- seat. If the air bag deploys, it would
toxic,They may cause irritation to the impact the rear-facing child restraint,
skin (eyes,nose and throat, etc). If causing serious or fatal injury.
this is the case, wash and rinse with In addition, do not place front-facing
cold water immediately and consult a child restraint in the front passen-
doctor if the symptom persists. ger’s seat either. If the front passen-
ger air bag inflates, it would cause
serious or fatal injuries to the child.
3 36
Air bag warning light Have the system checked by an

WARNING - Air bag authorized Kia dealer if:
deployment • The light does not turn on briefly
When children are seated in the when you turn the ignition ON.
rear outboard seats of a vehicle • The light stays on after illuminating
equipped with side and/or cur- for approximately 6 seconds.
tain air bags, install the child
• The light comes on while the vehi-
restraint system as far away
cle is in motion.
from the door side as possible.
Inflation of the side and/or cur-
tain air bags could impact the
child.
W7-147
The purpose of the air bag warning

light in your instrument panel is to
alert you of a potential problem with
your air bag - Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS).
When the ignition switch is turned
ON, the indicator light should illumi-
nate for approximately 6 seconds,
then go off.
3 37
SRS components and func- 10. PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” • The light does not turn on briefly
tions indicator (Front passenger’s seat when you turn the ignition ON.
only) • The light stays on after illuminating
11. Occupant detection system for approximately 6 seconds.
(Front passenger’s seat only) • The light comes on while the vehi-
12. Driver’s and front passenger’s cle is in motion.
seat belt buckle sensors
13. Emergency fastening device
(EFD)
* : if equipped
The SRSCM continually monitors all

OTF032049N
SRS components while the ignition
switch is ON to determine if a crash
The SRS consists of the following impact is severe enough to require
components: air bag deployment or pre-tensioner
1. Driver's front air bag module seat belt deployment.
2. Passenger's front air bag module The SRS air bag warning light on the
3. Side air bag modules instrument panel will illuminate for
about 6 seconds after the ignition
4. Curtain air bag modules switch is turned to the ON position,
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assem- after which the air bag warning light
blies* should go out.
6. Air bag warning light If any of the following conditions
7. SRS control module (SRSCM) occurs, this indicates a malfunction
of the SRS. Have an authorized Kia
8. Front impact sensors
dealer inspect the air bag system as
9. Side impact sensors soon as possible.
3 38
Driver’s front air bag (1) Driver’s front air bag (2) Driver’s front air bag (3)
B240B01L B240B02L B240B03L

The air bag modules are located Upon deployment, tear seams mold- A fully inflated air bag, in combina-
both in the center of the steering ed directly into the pad covers will tion with a properly worn seat belt,
wheel and in the front passenger's separate under pressure from the slows the driver's or the passenger's
panel above the glove box. When the expansion of the air bags. Further forward motion, reducing the risk of
SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe opening of the covers then allows full head and chest injury.
impact to the front of the vehicle, it inflation of the air bags.
will automatically deploy the front air
bags. After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating,
enabling the driver to maintain for-
ward visibility and the ability to steer
or operate other controls.
3 39
Passenger’s front air bag ✽ NOTICE Occupant detection system

Before you replace a fuse or discon-
nect a battery terminal, turn the igni-
tion switch to the LOCK position
and remove the ignition key. Never
remove or replace the air bag related
fuse(s) when the ignition switch is in
the ON position. Failure to heed this
warning will cause the SRS air bag
warning light to illuminate.
B240B05L
OYDNSA2037
WARNING - Air bag Your vehicle is equipped with an occu-
obstructions pant detection system in the front
Do not install or place any passenger's seat.
accessories on the steering The occupant detection system is
wheel, instrument panel, or on designed to detect the presence of a
the front passenger's panel properly-seated front passenger and
above the glove box in a vehicle determine if the passenger's front air
Such objects may become dan- bag should be enabled (may inflate)
gerous projectiles if the air bag or not. The driver's front air bag is not
deploys. affected or controlled by the occu-
pant detection system.
3 40
Main components of occupant If the front passenger seat is occupied • The ODS (Occupant Detection
detection system by a person that the system deter- System) may not function properly if
• A detection device located within mines to be of adult size, and he/she the passenger takes actions which
the front passenger seat track. sits properly (sitting upright with the can defeat the detection system.
seatback in an upright position, cen- These include:
• Electronic system to determine tered on the seat cushion with their
whether passenger air bag sys- (1) Failing to sit in an upright position.
seat belt on, legs comfortably extend-
tems should be activated or deac- ed and their feet on the floor), the (2) Leaning against the door or cen-
tivated. PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indica- ter console.
• An indicator light located on the tor will turn off and the front passen- (3) Sitting towards the sides or the
instrument panel which illuminates ger's air bag will be able to inflate, if front of the seat.
the words PASSENGER AIR BAG necessary, in frontal crashes. (4) Putting legs on the dashboard or
“OFF” indicating the front passen- You will find the PASSENGER AIR resting them on other locations
ger air bag system is deactivated. BAG “OFF” indicator on the center which reduce the passenger
• The instrument panel air bag warn- facia panel. This system detects the weight on the front seat.
ing light is interconnected with the conditions 1~4 in the following table (5) Improperly wearing the safety belt.
occupant detection system. and activates or deactivates the front (6) Reclining the seat back.
passenger air bag based on these
conditions.
Always be sure that you and all vehi-
cle occupants are seated and
restrained properly (sitting upright
with the seat in an upright position,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended,
feet on the floor, and wearing the
safety belt properly) for the most
effective protection by the air bag and
the safety belt.
3 41
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection

system WARNING - ODS system
Riding in an improper position
Indicator/Warning light Devices adversely affects the occupant
Condition detected by the occupant PASSENGER AIR detection system (ODS) and
SRS warning Front passenger
detection system BAG “OFF” indica- may result in the deactivation of
light air bag
tor light front passenger air bag. It is
1. Adult *1 or child age 13 and up*2 Off Off Activated important for the driver to
2. Infant or child restraint system
instruct the passenger as to the
On Off Deactivated proper seating instructions as
with 12 months old*3 *4
contained in this manual.
3. Unoccupied On Off Deactivated (Continued)
4. Malfunction in the system Off On Activated
*1) The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in
the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending
on his/her physique and posture.
*2) Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a smaller child than
the same age sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her
as an infant depending on his/her physique or posture.
*3) Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.
*4) The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator may turn on or off when a child above
12 months to 12 years old (with or without child restraint system) sits in the front
passenger seat. This is a normal condition.
3 42
(Continued)
B990A08O 1KMN3663 1KMN3665

- Never put a heavy load in the - Never sit with the hips shifted - Never place the feet on the
front passenger seat. towards the front of the seat. dashboard.
OVQ036014N 1KMN3662 1KMN3664

- Never place the feet on the - Never excessively recline the - Never lean on the door or cen-
front passenger seatback. front passenger seatback. ter console.
- Never sit on one side of the
front passenger seat.
3 43
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” ✽ NOTICE

indicator is still on, ask the passen- The PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
ger to move to the rear seat. indicator illuminates for about 4 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is
WARNING - “AIR BAG turned to the ON position or after
OFF” light the engine is started. If the front
Do not allow an adult passenger passenger seat is occupied, the occu-
to ride in the front seat when the pant detection sensor will then clas-
PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF” sify the front passenger after several
indicator is illuminated, because more seconds.
the air bag will not deploy in the
B990A01O
event of a crash. The driver must Any child age 12 and under should
When an adult is seated in the front instruct the passenger to reposi- ride in the rear seat. Children too
passenger seat, if the PASSENGER tion himself in the seat. Failure large for child restraints should use
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator is on, turn to properly position yourself the available lap/shoulder belts. No
the ignition switch to the LOCK posi- may lead to air bag deactivation matter what type of crash, children of
tion and ask the passenger to sit resulting in air bag non-deploy- all ages are safer when restrained in
properly (sitting upright with the seat ment in a collision. If the PAS- the rear seat.
back in an upright position, centered SENGER AIR BAG “OFF” indica-
on the seat cushion with their seat tor remains illuminated after the ✽ NOTICE
belt on, legs comfortably extended passenger repositions them- Do not modify or replace the front
and their feet on the floor). Restart selves properly and the car is passenger seat. Don't place anything
the engine and have the person restarted, it is recommended on or attach anything such as a blan-
remain in that position. This will allow that passenger move to the rear ket, front seat covers or after market
the system to detect the person and seat because the passenger's seat heater to the front passenger
to enable the passenger air bag. front air bag will not deploy. seat. This can adversely affect the
occupant detection system.
3 44
(Continued) Driver's and passenger's front

WARNING - ODS air bag
Interference • Do not spill any liquids on the
seat. Driver’s front air bag
• Do not place a heavy load or
an active electronic device (ex. Any of the above could interfere
laptop computer, after market with the proper operation of the
DMB/navigation/satellite ODS sensor thereby increasing
audio, video game machine, the risk of an injury in an acci-
MP3, etc.) in the front passen- dent.
ger seatback pocket or on the
front passenger seat.
If the occupant detection system is
• Do not hang onto the front not working properly, the SRS air bag
passenger seat. warning light on the instrument OYDDSA2025
Passenger’s front air bag
• Do not hang any items such panel will illuminate because the pas-
as seatback table on the front senger's front air bag is connected
passenger seatback. with the occupant detection system. If
• Do not place feet on the front there is a malfunction of the occupant
passenger seatback. detection system, the PASSENGER
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator will not illu-
• Do not place any items under
minate and the passenger's front air
the front passenger seat.
bag will inflate in frontal impact crash-
• Do not place sharp objects on es even if there is no occupant in the
the front passenger seat. front passenger's seat.
These may damage the occu- OYDDSA2026
pant detection system, if they
puncture the seat cushion. ✽ NOTICE Your vehicle is equipped with an
Advanced Supplemental Restraint
(Continued) Air bags can only be used once - have (Air Bag) System and lap/shoulder
an authorized Kia dealer replace the belts at both the driver and passen-
air bag immediately after deployment. ger seating position.
3 45
The indications of the system's pres- The advanced SRS offers the ability Additionally, your vehicle is equipped
ence are the letters "AIR BAG" to control the air bag inflation with with an occupant detection system in
embossed on the air bag pad cover two levels. A first stage level is pro- the front passenger's seat. The occu-
in the steering wheel and the pas- vided for moderate-severity impacts. pant detection system detects the
senger's side front panel pad above A second stage level is provided for presence of a passenger in the front
the glove box. more severe impacts. passenger's seat and will turn off the
front passenger's air bag under cer-
tain conditions. For more detail, see
The SRS consists of air bags The passenger’s front air bag is "Occupant detection system" in this
installed under the pad covers in the designed to help reduce the injury of section.
center of the steering wheel and the children sitting close to the instru-
passenger's side front panel above ment panel in low speed collisions. Do not place any objects that may
the glove box. However, children are safer if they cause magnetic fields near the front
are restraint in the rear seat. seat. These may cause a malfunction
The purpose of the SRS is to provide of the seat track position sensor.
the vehicle's driver and/or the front
passenger with additional protection According to the impact severity,
than that offered by the seat belt sys- seating position and seat belt usage,
tem alone in case of a frontal impact the SRSCM (SRS Control Module)
of sufficient severity. The SRS uses controls the air bag inflation. Failure
sensors to gather information about to properly wear seat belts can
the driver's seat position, the driver's increase the risk or severity of injury
and front passenger's seat belt in an accident.
usage and impact severity.
3 46
Manufacturers are required by gov- Advanced air bags are combined Rear impact
ernment regulations to provide a with pre-tensioner seat belts to help
contact point concerning modifica- provide enhanced occupant protec-
tions to the vehicle for persons with tion in frontal crashes. Front air bags
disabilities, which modifications may are not intended to deploy in colli-
affect the vehicle’s advanced air bag sions in which sufficient protection
system. However, Kia does not can be provided by the pre-tensioner
endorse nor will it support any seat belt alone.
changes to any part or structure of
1JBB3520
the vehicle that could affect the
advanced air bag system, including
WARNING - SRS Wiring Side impact
the occupant detection system. Do not tamper with or discon-

nect SRS wiring or other com-
ponents of the SRS system.
WARNING - Replacement / Doing so could result in injury,
Modifications due to accidental deployment of
The front passenger seat, dash- the air bags or by rendering the
board or door should not be SRS inoperative.
replaced except by an authorized 1JBA3514
Kia dealer using original Kia parts Front air bags are not intended to Rollover
designed for this vehicle and deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or
model. Any other such replace- rollover crashes. In addition, front air
ment or modification could bags will not deploy in frontal crash-
adversely affect the operation of es below the deployment threshold.
the occupant detection system
and your advanced air bags.
1JBA3522
3 47
Side air bag The purpose of the air bag is to pro- The side air bag is supplemental to
vide the vehicle's driver and/or the the driver's and the passenger's seat
Front
front passenger with additional pro- belt systems and is not a substitute
tection than that offered by the seat for them. Therefore your seat belts
belt alone. must be worn at all times while the
The side air bags are designed to vehicle is in operation.
deploy only during certain side- For best protection from the side air
impact collisions, depending on the bag system and to avoid being
crash severity, angle, speed and injured by the deploying side air bag,
point of impact. The side air bags are both front seat occupants should sit
not designed to deploy in all side in an upright position with the seat
OYDDSA2027
impact situations. belt properly fastened. The driver's
hands should be placed on the steer-
ing wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 posi-
WARNING - Unexpected tions. The passenger's arms and
deployment hands should be placed on their laps.
Avoid impact to the side air bag
sensor when the ignition switch
is ON to prevent unexpected WARNING - Deployment
deployment of the side air bag. Do not install any accessories
including seat covers, on the
OYDDSA2037 side or near the side air bag as
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ this may affect the deployment
from the illustration. of the side air bags.
Your vehicle is equipped with a side

air bag in each front seat.
3 48
If seat or seat cover is damaged, Curtain air bag They are designed to help protect
have the vehicle checked and the heads of the front seat occupants
repaired by an authorized Kia dealer. and the rear outboard seat occu-
Inform that your vehicle is equipped pants in certain side impact colli-
with side air bags and an occupant sions.
detection system. The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side
WARNING - Flying impact collisions, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and
objects
impact. The curtain air bags are not
Do not place any objects (an designed to deploy in all side impact
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the OYDDSA2039
situations, collisions from the front or
front door and the front seat. rear of the vehicle or in most rollover
Such objects may become dan- situations.
gerous projectiles if the side air
Do not allow the passengers to lean
bag inflates.
their heads or bodies onto doors, put
their arms on the doors, stretch their
arms out of the window, or place
objects between the doors and pas-
sengers when they are seated on
seats equipped with side and/or cur-
OYDDSA2038
tain air bags.
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
✽ NOTICE
Never try to open or repair any com-
Curtain air bags are located along ponents of the side curtain air bag
both sides of the roof rails above the system. This should only be done by
front and rear doors. an authorized Kia dealer.
3 49
Why didn’t my air bag go off in Air bag collision sensors

a collision? (Inflation and non-
inflation conditions of the air
bag)
There are many types of accidents
in which the air bag would not be
expected to provide additional
protection.
These include rear impacts, sec-
ond or third collisions in multiple
impact accidents, as well as low
speed impacts.
1 2 3
OYDDSA2028/OYDDSA2029/OYDDSA2030/OYDDSA2031
(1) SRS control module (3) Side impact sensor

(2) Front impact sensor
3 50
Problems may arise if the sensor Air bag inflation conditions

WARNING - Air bag installation angles are changed due
sensors to the deformation of the front
• Do not hit or allow any objects bumper, body or B pillar where side
to impact the locations where collision sensors are installed. Have
air bag or sensors are the vehicle checked and repaired by
installed. an authorized Kia dealer.
This may cause unexpected Installing aftermarket bumper guards
air bag deployment, which or replacing a bumper with non-gen-
could result in serious per- uine parts may adversely affect your
sonal injury or death. vehicle’s collision and air bag deploy-
ment performance.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered 1JBA3513
in any way, the air bags may Front air bags
deploy when they should not
or they may not deploy when Front air bags are designed to inflate
they should. in a frontal collision depending on
the intensity, speed or angles of
Therefore, do not try to per- impact of the front collision.
form maintenance on or
around the air bag sensors.
Have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized Kia
dealer.
3 51
Although the front air bags (driver’s Air bag non-inflation conditions
and front passenger’s air bags) are
designed to inflate in frontal colli-
sions, they also may inflate in other
types of collisions if the front impact
sensors detect a sufficient frontal
force in another type of impact. Side
and curtain air bags are designed to
inflate in certain side impact colli-
1JBA3516 sions. They may inflate in other type
of collisions where a side force is
detected by the sensors.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved 1JBA3515
roads or sidewalks, air bags may • In certain low-speed collisions the
deploy. Drive carefully on unim- air bags may not deploy. The air
proved roads or on surfaces not bags are designed not to deploy in
designed for vehicle traffic to prevent such cases because they may not
unintended air bag deployment. provide benefits beyond the pro-
OYDDSA2040 tection of the seat belts in such col-
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ lisions.
Side air bags

Side air bags (side and/or curtain air
bags) are designed to inflate when an
impact is detected by side collision
sensors depending on the strength,
speed or angles of impact resulting
from a side impact collision.
3 52
OED036100 1JBA3516 1JBA3521

• Air bags are not designed to inflate • Front air bags may not inflate in • In a slant or angled collision, the
in rear collisions, because occu- side impact collisions, because force of impact may direct the
pants are moved backward by the occupants move to the direction of occupants in a direction where the
force of the impact. In this case, the collision, and thus in side air bags would not be able to pro-
inflated air bags would not be able impacts, front air bag deployment vide any additional benefit, and
to provide any additional benefit. would not provide additional occu- thus the sensors may not deploy
pant protection. any air bags.
3 53
1JBA3517 1JBA3522 1JBA3518

• Just before impact, drivers often • Air bags does not inflate in most • Air bags may not inflate if the vehi-
brake heavily. Such heavy braking rollover accidents (even if the vehicle collides with objects such as
lowers the front portion of the vehicle is equipped with side impact air utility poles or trees, where the
cle causing it to “ride” under a vehi- bags and curtain air bags). Airbags point of impact is concentrated to
cle with a higher ground clearance. may not inflate in rollover accidents one area and the full force of the
Air bags may not inflate in this where the air bag system indicates impact is not delivered to the sen-
"under-ride" situation because air bag deployment would not pro- sors.
deceleration forces that are detect- vide protection to the occupants.
ed by sensors may be significantly
replaced by such “under-ride” colli-
sions.
3 54
SRS Care Adding equipment to or modi-

The SRS is virtually maintenance-free
WARNING - Tampering fying your air bag-equipped
and there are no parts you can safely with SRS vehicle
service by yourself. If the SRS air bag Do not tamper with or discon- If you modify your vehicle by chang-
warning light does not illuminate, or nect SRS wiring, or other coming your vehicle's frame, bumper sys-
continuously remains on, have your ponents of the SRS system. tem, front end or side sheet metal or
vehicle immediately inspected by an Doing so could result in the ride height, this may affect the oper-
authorized Kia dealer. accidental inflation of the air ation of your vehicle's air bag sys-
bags or by rendering the SRS tem.
inoperative.
Any work on the SRS system, such
as removing, installing, repairing, or
any work on the steering wheel must
If components of the air bag system
be performed by an authorized Kia
must be discarded, or if the vehicle
dealer. Improper handling of the SRS
must be scrapped, certain safety
system may result in serious person-
precautions must be observed. An
al injury.
authorized Kia dealer knows these
precautions and can give you the
For cleaning the air bag pad covers, necessary information. Failure to fol-
use only a soft, dry cloth or one low these precautions and proce-
which has been moistened with plain dures could increase the risk of per-
water. Solvents or cleaners could sonal injury.
adversely affect the air bag covers
and proper deployment of the sys-
tem.
3 55
Air bag warning label
OYDNSA2032
OYDNSA2033
Air bag warning labels, some

required by the Canada Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS),
are attached to the sunvisor to alert
the driver and passengers of poten-
tial risks of the air bag system.
3 56
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 • Emergency trunk safety release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

• Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
• Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 • Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
• Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 • Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
• Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 • Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Remote keyless entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
• Remote keyless entry system operations. . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 • Opening the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
• Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 • Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
• Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
• Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 • Sunroof open warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 4
Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 • Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
• Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 • Tilting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
• Theft-alarm stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 • Sunshade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
• Disarmed stage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 • Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Steering wheel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
• From outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 • Electronic power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
• From inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 • Tilt & telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
• Impact sensing door unlock system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 • Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
• Auto door lock/unlock feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 • Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
• Speed sensing door lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 • FLEX STEER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
• Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 • Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
• Opening the trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 • Outside rearview mirror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
• Closing the trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55 Rearview camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
• Instrument Cluster Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
• LCD Display Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57 • Battery saver function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
• Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57 • Headlamp escort function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
• Transaxle Shift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60 • Daytime running light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61 • Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
• LCD Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61 • High - beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99
• Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62 • Turn signals and lane change signals . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
• User Settings Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63 • Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
• A/V Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66 Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
4 • Turn By Turn Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66 • Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
• Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67 • Windshield washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
Trip computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74 Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
• Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74 • Automatict turn off function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
• Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75 • Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
• Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76 • Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78 • Trunk room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
• Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78 • Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
• Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85 • Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
Parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89 Welcome system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
• Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89 • Headlamp welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
• Non-operational conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92 • Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
• Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94 • Puddle lamp and pocket lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
• Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
• Front wiper deicer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109 • Seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110 • Climate control seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
• Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111 • Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116 • LCD monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
• Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118 • Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
• Refrigerant and compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . . 4-119 • Floor mat anchor(s). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
Automatic climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120 • Navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
• Automatic heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . 4-121 Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
• Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122 • Glass antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
• System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128 • Steering wheel audio control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . 4-130 • Aux, USB and iPod® port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149 4
• Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130 • How vehicle audio works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
• Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131 • Caring for disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
• Defogging logic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132 • Using the USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156
Storage compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135 • Using the iPod® device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
• Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135 • Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161
• Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135 • Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162
• Cool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
• Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
Interior features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
• Cigarette lighter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
• Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
• Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
• Sliding armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
• Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
KEYS
Record your key number Key operations ■ Type B
The key code num- ■ Type A

ber is stamped on
the key code tag
attached to the key
set. Should you
lose your keys, this number will
enable an authorized Kia dealer to
duplicate the keys easily. Remove
the key code tag and store it in a safe
place. Also, record the key code
number and keep it in a safe and OYDDCO2001
handy place, but not in the vehicle. OYDDCO2231/OYDECO2231 Type B
To unfold the key, press the release
Type A button and the key will unfold auto-
Used to start the engine, lock and matically.
unlock the doors. To fold the key, fold the key manually
while pressing the release button.
WARNING - Aftermarket
keys CAUTION - Key button
Use only Kia original parts for operation
the ignition key in your vehicle. Do not fold the key without
If an aftermarket key is used, the pressing the release button.
ignition switch may not return to This may damage the key.
ON after START. If this happens,
the starter will continue to oper-
ate causing possible fire due to
excessive current in the wiring.
4 4
■ Type C
WARNING - Ignition key
(Smart key)
Never leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised chil-
dren. Leaving children unat-
tended in a vehicle with a man-
ual ignition key or a smart key
is dangerous.
Children copy adults and they
could place the key in the igni-
OYDDCO2002 tion switch or press the start
Type C button. The key would enable
To remove the mechanical key, press children to operate power win-
and hold the release button and dows or other controls, or even
remove the mechanical key. make the vehicle move, which
could result in serious bodily
To reinstall the mechanical key, put injury or death.
the key into the hole and push it until
a click sound is heard.
4 5
SMART KEY (IF EQUIPPED)

Smart key functions Locking
Carrying the smart key, you may lock
and unlock the vehicle doors. Also,
you may start the engine. Refer to
the following, for more details.
OYDDCO2007
With a smart key, you can lock or OYDDCO2008
unlock a door and even start the
engine without inserting the key. Pressing the button of the front out-
side door handles with all doors
The functions of the buttons on a closed and any door unlocked, locks
smart key are similar to the remote all the doors. The hazard warning
keyless entry. (Refer to the "Remote lights will blink and the chime will
keyless entry" in this chapter.) sound once to indicate that all doors
are locked. The button will only oper-
ate when the smart key is within
0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the outside
door handle. If you want to make
sure that a door has locked or not,
you should check the door lock but-
ton inside the vehicle or pull the out-
side door handle.
4 6
Even though you press the button, Unlocking Smart key precautions
the doors will not lock and the chime Pressing the button of the driver's • If you lose your smart key, you will
will sound for 3 seconds if any of the outside door handle with all doors not be able to start the engine. Tow
following occurs: closed and locked, unlocks the dri- the vehicle, if necessary, and con-
• The smart key is in the vehicle. ver's door. The hazard warning lights tact an authorized Kia dealer.
• The ignition switch is in the ACC or will blink and the chime will sound • A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
ON position. twice to indicate that the driver's door registered to a single vehicle. If
is unlocked. you lose a smart key, you should
• Any door except the trunk is
opened. Pressing the button in the front pas- immediately take the vehicle and
senger's outside door handle with all key to your authorized Kia dealer
doors closed and locked, unlocks all to protect it from potential theft.
the doors. The hazard warning lights • The smart key will not work if any
will blink and the chime will sound of following occurs:
twice to indicate that all doors are
unlocked. The button will only oper- - The smart key is close to a radio
ate when the smart key is within transmitter such as a radio sta-
0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the outside tion or an airport which can inter-
door handle. fere with normal operation of the
smart key.
- The smart key near a mobile two-
Start-up way radio system or a cellular
You can start the engine without phone.
inserting the key. For detailed infor- - Another vehicle’s smart key is being
mation refer to "Starting the engine operated close to your vehicle.
with a smart key" in section 5. When the smart key does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key. If you
have a problem with the smart key,
contact an authorized Kia dealer.
4 7
• If the smart key is in close proximity This device complies with Industry
to your cell phone or smart phone, Canada Standard RSS-210.
the signal from the smart key could Operation is subject to the following
be blocked by normal operation of two conditions:
your cell phone or smart phone.
This is especially important when 1. This device may not cause harm-
the phone is active such as making ful interference, and
call, receiving calls, text messaging, 2. This device must accept any inter-
and/or sending/receiving emails. ference received, including inter-
Avoid placing the smart key and ference that may cause undesired
your cell phone or smart phone in operation.
the same pants or jacket pocket and
maintain adequate distance ✽ NOTICE
between the two devices.
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
CAUTION - Transmitter responsible for compliance could
Keep the smart key away from void the user’s authority to operate
water or any liquid as it can the equipment. If the keyless entry
become damaged and not func- system is inoperative due to changes
tion properly. or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible
for compliance, it will not be cov-
ered by your manufacturer’s vehicle
warranty.
4 8
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (IF EQUIPPED)

Remote keyless entry system Lock (1) Unlock (2)
operations All doors are locked if the lock button The driver's door is unlocked if the
■ Type A
is pressed. If all doors (and trunk) are unlock button is pressed once. The
closed, the hazard warning lights will hazard warning lights will blink (for
blink once to indicate that all doors smart key, the chime also sounds)
(and trunk) are locked. twice to indicate that the driver's door
Also, if the lock button is pressed is unlocked.
once more within 4 seconds, the All doors are unlocked if the unlock
hazard warning lights will blink and button is pressed once more within 4
the chime will sound once to confirm seconds. The hazard warning lights
that the door is locked. will blink (for smart key, the chime
However, if any door remains open, also sounds) twice again to indicate
OYDDCO2003 the hazard warning lights (and/or the that all doors are unlocked. After
■ Type B
chime) will not operate. But if all pressing this button, the doors will
doors are closed after the lock button lock automatically unless you open
is pressed, the hazard warning lights any door within 30 seconds.
will blink once.
✽ NOTICE
If the keyless entry system is inoper-
ative due to exposure to water or liq-
uids, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer's vehicle warranty.
OYDDCO2004
4 9
Trunk open (3) (if equipped) Transmitter precautions • If the transmitter is in close proximi-
The trunk is opened if the button is The transmitter (or smart key) will not ty to your cell phone or smart phone,
pressed for more than 1 second. work if any of following occurs: the signal from the transmitter could
be blocked by normal operation of
Once the trunk is opened and then • The ignition key is in the ignition your cell phone or smart phone. This
closed, the trunk will lock automatically. switch. is especially important when the
• You exceed the operating distance phone is active such as making call,
Alarm (4) limit (about 30 m [90 feet]). receiving calls, text messaging,
The horn sounds and the hazard • The battery in the transmitter (or and/or sending/receiving emails.
warning lights blink for about 30 sec- smart key) is weak. Avoid placing the transmitter and
onds if this button is pressed for your cell phone or smart phone in
• Other vehicles or objects may be the same pants or jacket pocket and
more than 0.5 seconds. To stop the blocking the signal.
horn and lights, press any button on maintain adequate distance
• The weather is extremely cold. between the two devices.
the transmitter.
• The transmitter (or smart key) is
close to a radio transmitter such as
a radio station or an airport which
can interfere with normal operation
of the transmitter.
When the transmitter (or smart key)
does not work properly, open and
close the door with the ignition key. If
you have a problem with the trans-
mitter (or smart key), contact an
authorized Kia dealer.
4 10
This device complies with Industry Battery replacement Type A

Canada Standard RSS-210. 1. Pry open the transmitter cover.
■ Type A
Operation is subject to the following 2. Replace the battery with a new
two conditions: battery (CR2032). When replacing
1. This device may not cause harm- the battery, make sure the battery
ful interference, and position.
2. This device must accept any inter- 3. Install the battery in the reverse
ference received, including inter- order of removal.
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
Type B
OYDDCO2005 1. Remove the mechanical key.
✽ NOTICE ■ Type B, C
2. Pry open the rear cover.
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party 3. Replace the battery with a new
responsible for compliance could void battery (CR2032). When replacing
the user’s authority to operate the the battery, make sure the battery
equipment. If the keyless entry sys- position.
tem is inoperative due to changes or 4. Install the battery in the reverse
modifications not expressly approved order of removal.
by the party responsible for compli-
ance, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer’s vehicle warranty. OYDDCO2006
A battery should last for several years,

but if the transmitter or smart key is
not working properly, try replacing the
battery with a new one. If you are
unsure how to use or replace the bat-
tery, contact an authorized Kia dealer.
4 11
• The transmitter or smart key is Immobilizer system

designed to give you years of trou- IC WARNING
ble-free use, however it can mal- This device complies with
function if exposed to moisture or Industry Canada licence-
static electricity. If you are unsure exempt RSS standard(s).
how to use or replace the battery,
Operation is subject to the fol-
contact an authorized Kia dealer.
lowing two conditions: (1) this
• Using the wrong battery can cause device may not cause interfer-
the transmitter or smart key to mal- ence, and (2) this device must
function. Be sure to use the correct accept any interference, includ-
battery. ing interference that may cause
• An inappropriately dis- undesired operation of the
posed battery can be harm- device. OHD046100
ful to the environment and
human health. Dispose the Your vehicle may be equipped with
battery according to your an electronic engine immobilizer sys-
local law(s) or regulation. tem to reduce the risk of unautho-
rized vehicle use.
Your immobilizer system is com-
CAUTION - Transmitter prised of a small transponder in the
damage ignition key and electronic devices
The transmitter or smart key can inside the vehicle.
malfunction if dropped, exposed With the immobilizer system, when-
to moisture, static electricity, ever you insert your ignition key into
heat or direct sunlight. the ignition switch and turn it to ON,
it checks and determines and verifies
that the ignition key is valid.
If the key is determined to be valid,
the engine will start.
If the key is determined to be invalid,
the engine will not start.
4 12
To deactivate the immobilizer Do not put metal accessories near This device complies with Industry
system: the ignition switch. Canada Standard RSS-210.
Insert the ignition key into the key Metal accessories may interrupt the Operation is subject to the following
cylinder and turn it to the ON position. transponder signal and may prevent two conditions:
the engine from being started. 1. This device may not cause harm-
To activate the immobilizer sys- If you need additional keys or lose ful interference, and
tem: your keys, consult an authorized Kia 2. This device must accept any inter-
Turn the ignition key to the OFF posi- dealer. ference received, including inter-
tion. The immobilizer system acti- ference that may cause undesired
vates automatically. Without a valid CAUTION - Immobilizer operation.
ignition key for your vehicle, the damage
engine will not start. Do not expose your immobilizer ✽ NOTICE
Your Immobilizer password is a cus- system to moisture, static elec- Changes or modifications not
tomer unique password and should tricity and rough handling. This expressly approved by the party
be kept confidential. Do not leave this may damage your immobilizer. responsible for compliance could
number anywhere in your vehicle. void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
✽ NOTICE CAUTION - Immobilizer
alterations
Keep each key separately in order to
avoid a starting malfunction. Do not change, alter or adjust
the immobilizer system because
it could cause the immobilizer
system to malfunction.
4 13
Limp home (override) proce- 3. To enter the first digit (in this
dure example “2”), turn the ignition
switch to the ON and ACC position
When you turn the ignition switch to
twice. Perform the same proce-
the ON position, if the immobilizer
dure for the next digits between 3
indicator ( ) goes off after blink-
seconds and 10 seconds (for
ing 5 times, your transponder
example, for “3”, turn the ignition
equipped in the ignition key is out of
ON and ACC 3 times).
order. You cannot start the engine
without the limp home procedure. To 4. If all of the digits have been input
start the engine, you have to input successfully, you have to start the
your password by using the ignition engine within 30 seconds. If you
switch. Your password is only avail- attempt to start the engine after 30
able from an authorized Kia dealer- seconds, the engine will not start
ship. Contact an authorized dealer and you will have to input your
for more information. password again.
The following procedure is how to After performing the limp home pro-
input your password of “2345” as an cedure, you have to see an author-
example. ized Kia dealer immediately to
inspect and repair your ignition key
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
or immobilizer system.
position. The immobilizer indicator
( ) will blink 5 times and go off
indicating the beginning of the limp
home procedure.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC
position.
4 14
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Armed stage • Lock the doors by pressing the
Park the vehicle and stop the engine. button of the front outside door
handles with the smart key in
Armed Arm the system as described below. your possession.
stage
1. Remove the ignition key from the After completion of the steps
ignition switch and exit the vehicle. above, the hazard warning lights
2. Make sure that all doors (and will blink once to indicate that the
Disarmed Theft-alarm
trunk) and engine hood are closed system is armed.
stage stage and latched. If any door remains open, the
3. • Lock the doors by depressing the hazard warning lights won’t oper-
door lock button on the transmit- ate and theft-alarm will not arm.
ter (or smart key). Close the door and try again to
This system is designed to provide After completion of the steps lock the doors.
protection from unauthorized entry above, the hazard warning lights If trunk or engine hood remains
into the vehicle. This system is operat- will blink once to indicate that the open, the hazard warning lights
ed in three stages: the first is the system is armed. won’t operate and theft-alarm will
"Armed" stage, the second is the If any door, trunk or engine hood not arm. Close the trunk or engine
"Theft-alarm" stage, and the third is remains open, the hazard warn- hood. The hazard warning lights
the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered, the ing lights won’t operate and blink once and theft-alarm arms.
system provides an audible alarm with theft-alarm will not arm. After
blinking of the hazard warning lights. this, if all doors, trunk and engine
hood are closed, the hazard
warning lights blink once.
4 15
The theft-alarm system can be acti- Theft-alarm stage Disarmed stage

vated by an authorized Kia dealer. The alarm will be activated if any of The system will be disarmed when:
If you want this feature, consult an the following occurs while the system
authorized Kia dealer. is armed.
Transmitter
• A front or rear door is opened without
using the mechanical key or trans- - The door unlock button is pressed.
Do not arm the system until all
passengers have left the vehicle. If mitter (or smart key). - The engine is started. (within 3
the system is armed while a pas- • The trunk is opened without using seconds)
senger(s) remains in the vehicle, the mechanical key or transmitter - The ignition switch is in the "ON"
the alarm may be activated when (or smart key). position for 30 seconds or more.
the remaining passenger(s) • The engine hood is opened.
leaves the vehicle. If any door (or
trunk) or engine hood is opened The horn will sound and the hazard Smart key
within 30 seconds after the sys- warning lights will blink continuously for - The door unlock button is pressed.
tem enters the armed stage, the approximately 27 seconds (2times). To - The button of the front outside door
system will be disarmed to pre- turn off the system, unlock the doors is pressed while carrying the smart
vent unnecessary alarm. with the transmitter (or smart key). key.
- The engine is started. (within 3
seconds)
After the doors are unlocked, the haz-

ard warning lights will blink twice to
indicate that the system is disarmed.
After pressing the unlock button, if any
door (or trunk) is not opened within 30
seconds, the system will be rearmed.
4 16
• Avoid trying to start the engine

while the alarm is activated. The
vehicle starting motor is disabled
during the theft-alarm stage.
If the system is not disarmed with
the transmitter, insert the key into
the ignition switch, turn the ignition
switch to the ON position and wait
for 30 seconds. Then the system
will be disarmed.
• If you lose your keys, consult your
• If the system is not disarmed with
the transmitter, insert the key into
the ignition switch and start the
engine. Then the system will be
disarmed.
• If you lose your keys, consult your
4 17
DOOR LOCKS
Operating door locks from • Doors can also be locked and Operating door locks from
outside the vehicle unlocked with the transmitter key inside the vehicle
(or smart key). (if equipped)
With the door lock button
• Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
Unlock Unlock
• When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure the doors
are closed securely. Lock
Lock Lock
✽ NOTICE Unlock
• In cold and wet climates, door lock

and door mechanisms may not
OYDDCO2009
work properly due to freezing con-
• Turn the key toward the rear of the ditions. OYDDCO2010
vehicle to unlock and toward the • If the door is locked/unlocked • To unlock a door, pull the door lock
front of the vehicle to lock. multiple times in rapid succession button (1) to the "Unlock" position.
• If you lock/unlock the door with a with either the vehicle key or door The red mark (2) on the button will
key, all vehicle doors will lock switch, the system may stop be visible.
lock/unlock automatically. (if operating temporarily in order to
protect the circuit and prevent • To lock a door, push the door lock
equipped with power door locks) button (1) to the "Lock" position. If
damage to system components.
• From the driver’s door, turn the key the door is locked properly, the red
toward the rear of the vehicle once mark (2) on the door lock button
to unlock the driver’s door and will not show.
once more within 4 seconds to • To open a door, pull the door han-
unlock all doors. (if equipped with dle (3) outward.
power door locks)
4 18
• If the inner door handle of the front If a power door lock ever fails to func- With central door lock switch
door is pulled when the door lock tion while you are in the vehicle, try (if equipped)
button is in the lock position, the one or more of the following tech-
■ Driver's door (Type A)
button will unlock and the door will niques to exit:
open. (if equipped) • Operate the door unlock feature
• Front doors cannot be locked if the repeatedly (both electronic and
ignition key is in the ignition switch manual) while simultaneously
(or if the smart key is in the vehicle) pulling on the door handle.
and any front door is opened. (if • Operate the other door locks and
equipped) handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the OYDDCO2011
key to unlock the door from outside. ■ Driver's door (Type B)
OYD043011
■ Passenger’s door
OUB041180N
4 19
Operate by pressing the central door Impact sensing door unlock

lock switch. WARNING - Doors system (if equipped)
• Press the switch to the "Lock" posi- The doors should always be All doors will automatically unlock
tion (1), all vehicle doors will lock. fully closed and locked while when an impact causes the air bags
• Press the switch to the "Unlock" the vehicle is in motion to pre- to deploy.
position (2), all vehicle doors will vent accidental opening of the
unlock. door.
Auto door lock/unlock feature
• If the key is in the ignition switch (or (if equipped)
if the smart key is in the vehicle)
and any front door is opened, the WARNING - Unattended • All doors will automatically lock
doors will not lock when the "Lock" children / when the transaxle shift lever is
position (1) of the central door lock animals shifted out of P (Park).
switch is pressed. (if equipped) Never leave children or animals • All doors will automatically unlock
unattended in your vehicle. when the transaxle shift lever is
An enclosed vehicle can become shifted into P (Park).
extremely hot, causing death or
severe injury to unattended chil-
dren or animals who cannot
escape the vehicle.
4 20
Speed sensing door lock sys- Child-protector rear door lock 3. Close the rear door.
tem (if equipped) To open the rear door, pull the out-
All doors will be automatically locked side door handle (2).
after the vehicle speed exceeds 9.3 Lock
Even though the doors may be
mph. And all doors will be automati- unlocked, the rear door will not open
cally unlocked when you turn the by pulling the inner door handle until
engine off or when you remove the the rear door child safety lock is
ignition key. (if equipped) unlocked.
An authorized Kia dealer can acti- Unlock
vate or deactivate some auto door
lock/ unlock features as follows; WARNING - Rear door
locks
• Auto door unlock by using the dri-
ver's door lock button OYDDCO2012 Use the rear door safety locks
whenever children are in the
• Auto door lock/unlock by shifting The child safety lock is provided to vehicle. If a child accidently
the transaxle shift lever out of P help prevent children from acciden- opens the rear doors while the
(Park) or into P (Park) tally opening the rear doors from vehicle is motion, he can fall out.
• Auto door unlock when the ignition inside the vehicle. The rear door
key is removed from the ignition safety locks should be used whenev-
switch (for smart key, when the er children are in the vehicle.
ENGINE START/STOP button is 1. Open the rear door.
turned to the OFF position) 2. Insert a key (or screwdriver) into the
If you want to activate or deactivate hole and turn it to the lock ( ) posi-
some door lock/unlock feature, con- tion. the child safety lock (1) located
sult an authorized Kia dealer. on the rear edge of the door to the
lock position. When the child safety
lock is in the lock position, rear door
will not open even when the inner
door handle is pulled.
4 21
TRUNK (4 DOOR, 2 DOOR)

Opening the trunk
WARNING
The trunk swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are
near the rear of the vehicle
when opening the trunk.
CAUTION
Make certain that you close the
OYDDCO2014
trunk before driving your vehi-
cle. Possible damage may occur
OYDDCO2013 • To open the trunk from inside the to attached hardware if the
vehicle, pull the trunk lid release trunk is not closed prior to driv-
• Press the trunk unlock button for lever. ing.
more than 1 second on the trans- Once the trunk is opened and then
mitter (or smart key). closed, the trunk locks automati-
• Press the button on the trunk han- cally.
dle with the smart key in your pos-
session.
Once the trunk is opened and then
✽ NOTICE
closed, the trunk locks automati- In cold and wet climates, trunk lock
cally. and trunk mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
4 22
Closing the trunk Emergency trunk safety release

To close, lower the trunk lid, then
press down on it until it locks. To be
sure the trunk lid is securely fas-
tened, always check by trying to pull
it up again.
WARNING - Exhaust
Fumes
The trunk/tailgate lid should
always be kept completely
closed while the vehicle is in OYDDCO2015
motion. If it is left open or ajar,
poisonous exhaust gases may Your vehicle is equipped with an
enter the car and serious illness emergency trunk release lever locat-
or death may result. ed inside the trunk. If someone is
inadvertently locked in the trunk,
moving the handle in the direction of
WARNING the arrow will release the trunk latch
mechanism and open the trunk.
No one should be allowed to
occupy the trunk at any time. No one should be allowed to occupy
The trunk is a very dangerous the trunk at any time. The trunk is a
location in the event of a crash. very dangerous location in the event
of a crash.
Use the release lever for emergen-
cies only. Use extreme caution,
especially while the vehicle is in
motion.
4 23
TAILGATE (5 DOOR)
Opening the tailgate ✽ NOTICE Closing the tailgate
In cold and wet climates, tailgate
lock and tailgate mechanisms may
not work properly due to freezing
conditions.
The tailgate swings upward. Make

sure no objects or people are near
the rear of the vehicle when opening
the tailgate.
CAUTION
OYDDCO3232 OYDDCO3233
Make certain that you close the
• The tailgate is locked or unlocked tailgate before driving your vehi- To close the tailgate, lower and push
when all doors are locked or cle. Possible damage may occur down the tailgate firmly. Make sure
unlocked with the transmitter (or to the tailgate lift cylinders and that the tailgate is securely latched.
smart key) or central door lock attached hardware if the tailgate Make sure your hands, feet and
switch. is not closed prior to driving. other parts of your body are safely
• If unlocked, the tailgate can be out of the way before closing the tail-
opened by pressing the handle and gate.
pulling it up.
• When all doors are lock if the tail-
gate unlock button on the smart key
is pressed for more than 1 second,
the tailgate is unlocked. Once the
tailgate is opened and then closed,
the tailgate is locked automatically.
4 24
Emergency tailgate safety

CAUTION WARNING - Riding in release
Make sure nothing is near the cargo area
tailgate latch and striker while Occupants should never ride in
closing the tailgate. It may dam- the rear cargo area where no
age the tailgate's latch. restraints are available. To avoid
injury in the event of an accident
or sudden stops, occupants
WARNING - Exhaust should always be properly
fumes restrained.
If you drive with the tailgate
open, you will draw dangerous
exhaust fumes into your vehicle
which can cause serious injury OYDDCO3234
or death to vehicle occupants.
Your vehicle is equipped with the
If you must drive with the tail- emergency tailgate safety release
gate open, keep the air vents lever located on the bottom of the
and all windows open so that tailgate. When someone is inadver-
additional outside air comes tently locked in the luggage compart-
into the vehicle. ment. The tailgate can be opened by
doing as follows:
1. Input the machanical key into the
hole.
2. Push the machanical key to the
right.
3. Push up the tailgate.
4 25
✽ NOTICE
WARNING Use the release lever for emergencies
• For emergencies, be fully only. Use with extreme caution,
aware of the location of the especially while the vehicle is in
emergency tailgate safety motion.
release lever in the vehicle
and how to open the tailgate if
you are accidentally locked in
the luggage compartment.
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the luggage compart-
ment of the vehicle at any time.
The luggage compartment is a
very dangerous location in the
event of a crash.
4 26
WINDOWS
(1) Driver’s door power window switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window down*
(7) Power window lock button*
*: if equipped
OYDDCO2016
4 27
In cold and wet climates, power win- ✽ NOTICE Window opening and closing
dows may not work properly due to While driving with the rear windows (if equipped)
freezing conditions. down or with the sunroof (if
equipped) in an open (or partially
Power windows open) position, your vehicle may
demonstrate a wind buffeting or
The ignition switch must be in the ON pulsation noise. This noise is a nor-
position for power windows to oper- mal occurrence and can be reduced
ate. Each door has a power window or eliminated by taking the follow-
switch that controls the door’s win- ing actions. If the noise occurs with
dow. The driver has a power window one or both of the rear windows
lock switch which can block the oper- down, partially lower both front
ation of passenger windows. windows approximately one inch. If
The power windows can be operated you experience the noise with the
for approximately 30 seconds after the sunroof open, slightly reduce the OYDDCO2017
ignition key is removed or turned to the size of the sunroof opening.
ACC or LOCK position. However, if the The driver’s door has a master power
front doors are opened, the power window switch that controls all the
windows cannot be operated even windows in the vehicle.
within the 30 second period. To open or close a window, press
down or pull up the front portion of
the corresponding switch to the first
detent position (5).
4 28
Auto down window (if equipped) Auto up/down window (if equipped) 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(Driver’s window) position.
2. Close the window and continue
pulling up on the driver’s power
window switch for at least 1 second
after the window is completely
closed.
OYDDCO2018
OYDECO2224CN Pressing or pulling up the power win-
dow switch momentarily to the sec-
Pressing the power window switch ond detent position (6) completely
momentarily to the second detent lowers or lifts the window even when
position (6) completely lowers the the switch is released. To stop the
driver’s window even when the window at the desired position while
switch is released. To stop the win- the window is in operation, pull up or
dow at the desired position while the press and release the switch to the
window is in operation, momentarily opposite direction of the movement.
pull up the switch to the opposite
direction of the window movement. If the power window is not operated
correctly, the automatic power win-
dow system must be reset as follows:
4 29
And if the power window switch is Short drop (for 2Door)

pulled up continuously again within 5 When you open the front door(s), if
seconds after the window is lowered the front window(s) fully closed, the
by the automatic window reversal front windows will drop down about
feature, the automatic window rever- 0.4 in.(10mm) automatically. And
sal will not operate. then If you close the door(s), the win-
The automatic reverse feature for the dow(s) will be fully closed automati-
driver’s window is only active when cally. This function prevents damage
the "auto up" feature is used by fully to the windows. This is not a mal-
pulling up the switch. The automatic function. This is a normal condition.
reverse feature will not operate if the If the windows does not drop down
OUN026013 window is raised using the halfway automatically because ice has
Automatic reversal (if equipped) position on the power window switch. formed around it, tap lightly the win-
If the upward movement of the win- Always check for obstructions before dows to break the ice. Do not pry on
dow is blocked by an object or part of raising any window to avoid injuries the windows. If necessary, move the
the body, the window will detect the or vehicle damage. If an object less vehicle to a warm place and allow
resistance and will stop upward than 4 mm (0.16 in.) in diameter is the ice to melt.
movement. The window will then caught between the window glass
lower approximately 30 cm (11.8 in.) and the upper window channel, the
to allow the object to be cleared. automatic reverse window may not
detect the resistance and will not
If the window detects the resistance stop and reverse direction.
while the power window switch is
pulled up continuously, the window
will stop upward movement then
lower approximately 2.5 cm (1 in.).
4 30
Power window lock button

(if equipped) CAUTION - Opening /
closing
Window
To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do
not open or close two windows
or more at the same time. This
will also ensure the longevity of
the fuse.
WARNING - Power
OYDDCO2019 windows
Do not allow children to play
The driver can disable the power with the power windows. Keep
window switches on the rear passen- the driver’s door power window
gers' doors by pressing the power
window lock switch to the lock posi- lock switch in the LOCK position
tion (pressed). (pressed).
When the power window lock
switch is pressed: Always double check to make sure
• The driver's master control can all arms, hands, head and other
operate all the power windows. obstructions are safely out of the way
• The front passenger's control before closing a window.
can operate the front passen-
ger's power window.
• The rear passenger's control
cannot operate the rear passen-
ger's power window.
4 31
HOOD
Opening the hood Closing the hood
1. Before closing the hood, check the
following:
• All filler caps in the engine com-
partment must be correctly
installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be
removed from the engine com-
partment.
OYDDCO2021 2. Return the support rod to its clip to
2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise prevent it from rattling.
OYDDCO2020
the hood slightly, push the second- 3. Lower the hood until it is about 30
1. Pull the release lever to unlatch ary latch (1) left side and lift the cm (1 ft.) above the closed posi-
the hood. The hood should pop hood (2). tion and let it drop. Make sure that
open slightly. 3. Raise the hood. It will raise com- it locks into place.
Open the hood after turning off the pletely by itself after it has been
engine on a flat surface, shifting the raised about halfway. WARNING - Fire risk
shift lever to the P(Park) position for
automatic transaxle and to the Do not leave gloves, rags or any
1st(First) gear or R(Reverse) for other combustible material in the
manual transaxle, and setting the engine compartment. Doing so
parking brake. may cause a heat-induced fire.
4 32
WARNING - Unsecured CAUTION

engine hood Before closing the hood, ensure
Always double check to be sure that all obstructions are
that the hood is firmly latched removed from the engine com-
before driving away. If it is not partment and surrounding body
latched, the hood could fly open sheet metal. Closing the hood
while the vehicle is being driv- with an obstruction present
en, causing a total loss of visi- could result in damage to the
bility, which might result in an engine, sheet metal or the
accident. impacted objects.
The support rod must be inserted

completely into the hole whenever
you inspect the engine compartment.
This will prevent the hood from falling
and possibly injuring you.
4 33
FUEL FILLER LID

Opening the fuel filler lid Closing the fuel filler lid
1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise
until it "clicks" one time. This indi-
cates that the cap is securely tight-
ened.
2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it
lightly and make sure that it is
securely closed.
WARNING - Refueling
OTF040027 Always remove the fuel cap
OYDDCO2023 1. Stop the engine. carefully and slowly. If the cap
2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the is venting fuel or if you hear a
The fuel filler lid must be opened fuel filler lid opener up. hissing sound, wait until the
from inside the vehicle by pulling up condition stops before com-
the fuel filler lid opener. 3. Pull open the fuel filler lid (1) out to pletely removing the cap.
fully open.
If the fuel filler lid does not open If pressurized fuel sprays out, it
because ice has formed around it, 4. To remove the cap turn the fuel can cover your clothes or skin
tap lightly or push on the lid to break filler cap (2) counterclockwise. and subject you to the risk of
the ice and release the lid. Do not pry 5. Refuel as needed. fire and burns.
on the lid. If necessary, spray around
the lid with an approved de-icer fluid
(do not use radiator anti-freeze) or
move the vehicle to a warm place
and allow the ice to melt.
4 34
✽ NOTICE
Tighten the cap until it clicks one time, WARNING - Static WARNING - Portable fuel
otherwise the fuel cap open warning electricity container
indicator light will illuminate. • Before touching the fuel noz- When using an approved
zle, you should eliminate portable fuel container, be sure
Always check that the fuel cap is potentially dangerous static to place the container on the
installed securely to prevent fuel electricity discharge by touch- ground prior to refueling. Static
spillage in the event of an accident. ing another metal part of the electricity discharge from the
vehicle, a safe distance away container can ignite fuel vapors
from the fuel filler neck, noz- causing a fire. Once refueling
WARNING - Fire / zle, or other gas source. has begun, contact with the
explosion risk • Do not get back into a vehicle vehicle should be maintained
Read and follow all warnings once you have begun refuel- until the filling is complete. Use
posted at the gas station facili- ing since you can generate only approved portable plastic
ty. Failure to follow all warnings static electricity by touching, fuel containers designed to
will result in severe personal rubbing or sliding against any carry and store gasoline.
injury, severe burns or death item or fabric (polyester, satin,
due to fire or explosion. nylon, etc.) capable of produc-
ing static electricity. Static WARNING - Cell phone
electricity discharge can fires
ignite fuel vapors resulting in Do not use cellular phones while
rapid burning. If you must re- refueling. Electric current and/or
enter the vehicle, you should electronic interference from cel-
once again eliminate poten- lular phones can potentially
tially dangerous static elec- ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
tricity discharge by touching a
metal part of the vehicle, away
from the fuel filler neck, noz-
zle or other gasoline source.
4 35
Make sure to refuel your vehicle

WARNING - Refueling& according to the "Fuel requirements"
Vehicle fires suggested in chapter 1.
When refueling, always shut the If the fuel filler cap requires replace-
engine off. Sparks produced by ment, use only a genuine Kia cap or
electrical components related the equivalent specified for your vehi-
to the engine can ignite fuel cle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can
vapors causing a fire. Once result in a serious malfunction of the
refueling is complete, check to fuel system or emission control sys-
make sure the filler cap and tem.
filler door are securely closed,
before starting the engine.
CAUTION - Exterior paint
Do not spill fuel on the exterior
WARNING - Smoking surfaces of the vehicle. Any
type of fuel spilled on painted
DO NOT use matches or a lighter surfaces may damage the paint.
and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a
lit cigarette in your vehicle while
at a gas station especially during
refueling. Automotive fuel is
highly flammable and can, when
ignited, result in fire.
4 36
SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)

In cold and wet climates, the sunroof Sunroof open warning
may not work properly due to freez- (if equipped)
ing conditions.
■ Type A
After the vehicle is washed or in a
rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any
water that is on the sunroof before
operating it.
The sunroof cannot slide when it is in
the tilt position nor can it be tilted
while in an open or slide position.
OYDDCO2025 OYDDDI2016
CAUTION - Sunroof ■ Type B
If your vehicle is equipped with a control lever
sunroof, you can slide or tilt your
sunroof with the sunroof control lever Do not continue to press the sun-
located on the overhead console. roof control lever after the sun-
roof is fully opened, closed, or
The sunroof can only be opened, tilted. Damage to the motor or
closed, or tilted when the ignition system components could occur.
switch is in the ON position.
OYDNDI2030
CAUTION WARNING - Sunroof ■ Type C
To prevent damage to the sun- operation

roof, periodically remove any When closing the sunroof, make
dirt that may accumulate on the sure there are no body parts in
guide rail. the movement range of the slid-
ing roof. Parts of the body could
become trapped or crushed.
OYDNDI2052
4 37
If the driver removes the ignition key Sliding the sunroof To open the sunroof to the maximum
(smart key: turns off the engine) and slide open position, press the switch
opens the driver-side door when the towards the rear of the vehicle once
sunroof is not fully closed, the warning again and hold it until the sunroof
chime will sound for a few seconds slide all the way open.
and a warning image will appear on To reduce wind noise while driving,
the LCD display. we recommend you to drive at the
Close the sunroof securely when recommended position (about 5 cm
leaving your vehicle. (2in.) before the maximum slide
open position).
To close the sunroof automatically:

OYDDCO2026 Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward to the second detent position
To open the sunroof automatically: and then release it. The sunroof will
Pull the sunroof control lever back- automatically close all the way.
ward to the second detent position To stop the sunroof sliding at any
and then release it. The sunroof will point, pull or push the sunroof control
slide all the way open. lever momentarily.
The sunroof will slide to the recom- While driving with the sunroof in an
mended open position (about 5 cm open (or partially open position),
(2in.) before the maximum slide your vehicle may demonstrate a wind
open position). buffeting or pulsation noise. This
To stop the sunroof sliding at any noise is a normal occurrence and
point, pull or push the sunroof control can be reduced or eliminated by tak-
lever momentarily. ing the following actions. If you expe-
rience the noise with the sunroof
open, slightly reduce the size of the
sunroof opening.
4 38
Automatic reversal Tilting the sunroof

WARNING - Sunroof
Do not extend the face, neck,
arms or body outside through
the sunroof opening while driv-
ing or operating the sunroof.
CAUTION - Sunroof
motor damage
If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
OYF049215 OYDDCO2027 freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the
If an object or part of the body is To open the sunroof, push the sunroof glass or the motor could be
detected while the sunroof glass or control lever upward until the sunroof damaged.
sunshade is closing automatically, it moves to the desired position.
will reverse the direction, and then To close the sunroof, push the sunroof
stop. lever forward or pull downward until the
The auto reverse function does not sunroof moves to the desired position.
work if a tiny obstacle is between the
sliding glass or sunshade and the
sunroof sash. You should always
check that all passengers and
objects are away from the sunroof
before closing it.
4 39
Sunshade Resetting the sunroof 5.Within 3 seconds, push the sunroof

control lever forward in the direc-
Whenever the vehicle battery is dis-
tion of close until the sunroof oper-
connected or discharged, or related
ates as follows:
fuse is blown, you must reset your
sunroof system as follows:
Tilt down → Slide Open →
Slide Close.
1.Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position or start the engine. We
recommend resetting the sunroof ✽ NOTICE
while the engine is running. Do not release the lever until the
2.Push and release the control lever operation is completed.
forward in the direction of close If you release the lever during oper-
OBK049019
repeatedly until the sunroof does ation, try again from step 2.
When opening the sunroof, the sun- not move. Sunroof will stop at the
shade will also open. Once the sun- close position or the tilt position 6. Release the sunroof control lever
roof is closed, the sunshade can be depends on the sunroof condition. after all operation has completed.
manually closed. 3.Release the control lever when (The sunroof system has been
sunroof does not move. reset.)
4.Push the control lever forward in the ❈ For more detailed information,
direction of close about 10 seconds. contact an authorized Kia dealer.
- When the sunroof is in the close
position : ✽ NOTICE
Glass will tilt up then will move up If the sunroof is not reset when the
and down slightly. vehicle battery is disconnected or
discharged, or related fuse is blown,
- When the sunroof is in the tilt the sunroof may operate improperly.
position:
Glass will move up and down
slightly.
4 40
STEERING WHEEL
Electric power steering (EPS) ✽ NOTICE (Continued)
Power steering uses the motor to The following symptoms may occur • When the charging system warn-
assist you in steering the vehicle. If during normal vehicle operation: ing light comes on or the battery
the engine is off or if the power steer- • The steering effort is increased voltage is low (when the alternator
ing system becomes inoperative, the immediately after turning the igni- or battery does not operate nor-
vehicle may still be steered, but it will tion switch on. This happens as the mally), the steering wheel may get
require increased steering effort. system performs the EPS system heavy and become difficult to con-
diagnostics. When the diagnostics trol operate abnormally.
The motor driven power steering is
controlled by the power steering con- are completed, the steering wheel
will return to its normal condition If the Electric Power Steering System
trol unit which senses the steering does not operate normally, the warn-
wheel torque and vehicle speed to • A click noise may be heard from
the EPS relay after the ignition ing light will illuminate on the instru-
command the motor. ment cluster. The steering wheel may
switch is turned to the ON or
The steering wheel becomes heavier LOCK position. require increased steering effort.
as the vehicle’s speed increases and • Motor noise may be heard when Take your vehicle to an authorized
becomes lighter as the vehicle’s the vehicle is at a stop or at a low Kia dealer and have the vehicle
speed decreases for better control of driving speed. checked as soon as possible.
the steering wheel. • The steering effort increases if the
Should you notice any change in the steering wheel is rotated continu-
effort required to steer during normal ously when the vehicle is not in
vehicle operation, have the power motion. However, after a few min-
steering checked by an authorized utes, it will return to its normal
Kia dealer. condition.
• When you operate the steering
wheel in low temperature, noise
may occur. If the temperature
rises, the noise will likely disap-
pear. This is a normal condition.
(Continued)
4 41
Tilt and telescoping steering Horn

Tilt steering allows you to adjust the
steering wheel before you drive. You
can also raise it to give your legs
more room when you exit and enter
the vehicle.
The steering wheel should be posi-

tioned so that it is comfortable for
you to drive, while permitting you to
see the instrument panel warning OYDDCO3028
lights and gauges.
To change the steering wheel angle, OYDDCO2030
pull down the lock release lever (1),
adjust the steering wheel to the To sound the horn, press the horn
WARNING - Steering desired angle (2) and height (3), then symbol on your steering wheel.
wheel pull up the lock-release lever to lock Check the horn regularly to be sure it
adjustment the steering wheel in place. Be sure operates properly.
Never adjust the angle and to adjust the steering wheel to the To sound the horn, press the area
height of the steering wheel desired position before driving. indicated by the horn symbol on your
while driving. You may lose steering wheel (see illustration). The
steering control horn will operate only when this area
is pressed.
4 42
Heated steering wheel ✽ NOTICE

(if equipped) The heated steering wheel will turn WARNING
off automatically approximately 30 If the steering wheel becomes
minutes after the heated steering too warm, turn the system off.
wheel is turned on. The heated steering wheel may
cause burns even at low tem-
peratures, especially if used for
CAUTION long periods of time.
• Do not install any grip to oper-
ate the steering wheel. This
causes damage to the heated
steering wheel system.
• When cleaning the heated
steering wheel, do not use an
OYDDCO2029
organic solvent such as paint
With the ignition switch in the ON thinner, benzene, alcohol and
position, pressing the heated steer- gasoline. Doing so may dam-
ing wheel button warms the steering age the surface of the steering
wheel. The indicator on the button wheel.
will illuminate and notify you on the • If the surface of the steering
LCD display. wheel is damaged by a sharp
To turn the heated steering wheel off, object, damage to the heated
press the button once again. The steering wheel components
indicator on the button will turn off could occur.
and notify you on the LCD display.
If you turn on the ignition again after
turning off your engine in half an
hour (after operating heater button),
the heating system will be main-
tained in its 'on' condition.
4 43
FLEX STEER (if equipped) ■ Type A Normal mode

■ Type A
OYDECO2233
■ Type B
OYDDCO2204
■ Type B
OYDDCO2223
The FLEX STEER controls steering

effort based upon driver's preference
or road condition.
You can select the desired steering OYDECO2232
mode by pressing the FLEX STEER
button. When the steering mode button is OYDDCO2207
pressed, the selected steering mode
will appear on the LCD display. The normal mode offers medium
If the steering mode button is pressed steering effort.
within 4 seconds, the steering mode
will change as shown above the pic-
tures.
If the steering mode button is not
pressed for about 4 seconds, the
LCD display will change to the previ-
ous screen.
4 44
Sport mode Comfort mode For your safety, if you press the
steering mode button while operating
■ Type A ■ Type A
the steering wheel, the LCD display
will change, but steering effort will
not change immediately. After oper-
ating the steering wheel, the steering
effort will change automatically to the
selected mode.
Use caution when changing the
steering mode while driving.
■ Type B ■ Type B
When the electronic power steering
is not operating, the flex steering
wheel will not work.
The steering wheel becomes heav- The steering wheel becomes lighter.
ier. The sport mode is usually used The comfort mode is usually used
when driving on the highway. when driving in the city or when park-
ing the vehicle.
4 45
MIRRORS
Inside rearview mirror Day/night rearview mirror Electric chromic mirror with
Adjust the rearview mirror so that the (if equipped) homelink® system (if equipped)
center view through the rear window
is seen. Make this adjustment before
you start driving.
Do not place objects in the rear seat
Night
which would interfere with your vision
through the rear window.
WARNING - Mirror
adjustment
Do not adjust the rearview mirror Day
while the vehicle is moving. This OYDDCO2031 OHD046025N
could result in loss of control.
To operate the electric rearview mir-
Make this adjustment before you
ror
start driving and while the day/night
lever is in the day position. Press the I button (1) to turn the
automatic- dimming function on. The
Pull the day/night lever toward you to
mirror indicator light will illuminate.
reduce the glare from the headlights
of the vehicles behind you during Press the O button (2) to turn the
night driving. automatic- dimming function off. The
mirror indicator light will turn off.
Remember that you lose some
rearview clarity in the night position.
* HomeLink® is a registered trade-
mark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
4 46
Glare detection sensor Retain the original transmitter for Flashing

Indicator light
future programming procedures (i.e.,
new vehicle purchase). It is also sug-
gested that upon the sale of the vehi-
cle, the programmed Homelink® but-
tons be erased for security purposes
(follow step 1 in the "Programming"
portion of this text).
Programming
®
Homelink buttons Your vehicle may require the ignition
OHD046305N OHD046306N
switch to be turned to the ACC posi-
®
HomeLink * Wireless Control System tion for programming and/or opera- 1.When programming the buttons for
Your new mirror comes with an inte- tion of Homelink®. It is also recom- the first time, press and hold the
grated Homelink® Universal mended that a new battery be left and center buttons ( , )
Transceiver, which allows you to pro- replaced in the hand-held transmitter simultaneously until the indicator
gram the mirror to activate your of the device being programmed to light begins to flash after approxi-
garage door(s), estate gate, home Homelink® for quicker training and mately 20 seconds. (This proce-
lighting, etc. The mirror actually accurate transmission of the radio- dure erases the factory-set default
learns the codes from your various frequency. codes. Do not perform this step to
existing transmitters. Follow these steps to train your program additional hand-held
Homelink® mirror: transmitters.)
4 47
✽ NOTICE Flashing
✽ NOTICE
For non rolling code garage door Some gate operators and garage
openers, follow steps 2 - 3. door openers may require you to
For rolling code garage door open- replace step #3 with the "cycling"
ers, follow steps 2 - 6. procedure noted in the "Canadian
For Canadian Programming, please Programming" section of this docu-
follow the Canadian Programming ment.
section.
For help with determining whether es
ch
your garage is non-rolling code or -3in
1
rolling code, please refer to the Transmitter
garage door openers owner’s manu- OHD046307N
al or contact Homelink® customer 2.Press and hold the button on the
service at 1-800-355-3515. Homelink® system you wish to train
and the button on the transmitter
while the transmitter is approxi-
mately 1 to 3 inches away from the
mirror. Do not release the buttons
until step 3 has been completed.
3.The Homelink® indicator light will
flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
When the indicator light flashes
rapidly, both buttons may be
released. (The rapid flashing light
indicates successful programming
of the new frequency signal.)
4 48
Rolling code programming 6. Return to the vehicle and firmly Operating Homelink®
To train a garage door opener (or press and release the pro- To operate, simply press the pro-
other rolling code equipped devices) grammed Homelink® button up to grammed Homelink® button.
with the rolling code feature, follow three times. The rolling code Activation will now occur for the
these instructions after completing equipped device should now rec- trained product (garage door, securi-
the "Programming" portion of this ognize the Homelink® signal and ty system, entry door lock, estate
text. (A second person may make the activate when the Homelink® but- gate, or home or office lighting). For
following training procedures quicker ton is pressed. The remaining two convenience, the hand-held trans-
& easier.) buttons may now be programmed mitter of the device may also be used
if this has not previously been at any time. The Homelink® Wireless
4. Locate the "learn" or "smart" but- done. Refer to the "Programming"
ton on the device’s motor head Controls System (once programmed)
portion of this text. or the original hand-held transmitter
unit. Exact location and color of
the button may vary by product may be used to activate the device
brand. If there is difficulty locating (e.g. garage door, entry door lock,
the "learn" or "smart" button, refer- etc.). In the event that there are still
ence the device’s owner’s manual programming difficulties, contact
or contact Homelink® at 1-800- Homelink® at 1-800-355-3515 or on
355-3515 or on the internet at the internet at www.homelink.com.
www.homelink.com.
5. Press and release the "learn" or
"smart" button on the device’s
motor head unit. You have 30 sec-
onds to complete step number 6.
4 49
Erasing programmed Homelink® buttons

To erase the three programmed but- Reprogramming a single Gate operator programming &
tons (individual buttons cannot be Homelink® button canadian programming
To program a device to Homelink® During programming, your hand-held
Flashing using a Homelink® button previously transmitter may automatically stop
trained, follow these steps: transmitting. Continue to press and
1. Press and hold the desired hold the Homelink® button (note
Homelink® button. Do NOT release steps 2 through 4 in the
until step 4 has been completed. "Programming" portion of this text)
while you press and re-press
2. When the indicator light begins to ("cycle") your handheld transmitter
flash slowly (after 20 seconds), every two seconds until the frequen-
position the hand-held transmitter cy signal has been learned. The indi-
1 to 3 inches away from the cator light will flash slowly and then
Homelink® surface. rapidly after several seconds upon
OHD046306N 3. Press and hold the hand-held successful training.
transmitter button (or press and
erased): "cycle" - as described in
• Press and hold the left and center "Canadian Programming" above).
buttons simultaneously, until the 4. The Homelink® indicator light will
indicator light begins to flash flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
(approximately 20 seconds). When the indicator light begins to
Release both buttons. Do not hold flash rapidly, release both buttons.
for longer than 30 seconds. The previous device has now been
Homelink® is now in the train (or erased and the new device can be
learning) mode and can be pro- activated by pushing the Homelink®
grammed at any time. button that has just been pro-
grammed. This procedure will not
affect any other programmed
Homelink® buttons.
4 50
Accessories The Homelink® transmitter has been Outside rearview mirror

If you would like additional informa- tested and complies with FCC and Be sure to adjust mirror angles
tion on the Homelink® Wireless DOC/MDC rules. Changes or modifi- before driving.
Control System, Homelink® compati- cations not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance Your vehicle is equipped with both
ble products, or to purchase other left-hand and right-hand outside
accessories such as the HomeLink® could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment. rearview mirrors. The mirrors can be
Lighting Package, please contact adjusted remotely with the remote
Homelink® at 1-800-355-3515 or on IC: 4112104541A Gentex switch (if equipped). The mirror heads
the internet at www.homelink.com. MODEL/FCC ID: NZLSTDHL3 can be folded to prevent damage dur-
ing an automatic car wash or when
This device complies with Industry passing through a narrow street.
Canada Standard RSS-210. The right outside rearview mirror is
Operation is subject to the following convex. Objects seen in the mirror
two conditions: are closer than they appear.
1. This device may not cause harm- Use your interior rearview mirror or
ful interference, and direct observation to determine the
2. This device must accept any inter- actual distance of following vehicles
ference received, including inter- when changing lanes.
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
4 51
Remote control
CAUTION - Rearview CAUTION - Outside mirror
mirror • The mirrors stop moving when
Do not scrape ice off the mirror they reach the maximum
face; this may damage the sur- adjusting angles, but the
face of the glass. If ice should motor continues to operate
restrict movement of the mirror, while the switch is pressed.
do not force the mirror for Do not press the switch longer
adjustment. To remove ice, use than necessary, the motor
a deicer spray, or a sponge or may be damaged.
soft cloth with very warm water. • Do not attempt to adjust the
outside rearview mirror by
hand. Doing so may damage
OYDDCO2039
WARNING - Mirror the parts.
adjustment Electric type
Do not adjust or fold the outside The electric remote control mirror
rearview mirrors while the vehi- switch allows you to adjust the posi-
cle is moving. This could result tion of the left and right outside
in loss of control. rearview mirrors. To adjust the posi-
tion of either mirror the ignition switch
should be in the ACC or ON position.
Move the lever (1) to R or L to select
the right side mirror or the left side
mirror, then press a corresponding
point on the mirror adjustment con-
trol to position the selected mirror up,
down, left or right.
After the adjustment, put the lever
into neutral (center) position to pre-
vent inadvertent adjustment.
4 52
Folding the outside rearview mirror Center (AUTO, 3) :

The mirrors will fold or unfold auto- CAUTION - Electric type
matically as follows: outside
rearview mirror
• Without smart key system
The electric type outside
- The mirrors will fold or unfold rearview mirror operates even
when the door is locked or though the ignition switch is in
unlocked by the transmitter. the OFF position. However, to
• With smart key system prevent unnecessary battery
- The mirrors will fold or unfold discharge, do not adjust the
when the door is locked or mirrors longer than necessary
unlocked by the smart key. while the engine is not running.
- The mirrors will fold or unfold Do not attempt to fold the elec-
OYDDCO2041 tric type outside rearview mirror
when the door is locked or
Electric type unlocked by the button on the by hand because doing so
The outside rearview mirror can be outside door handle. could cause motor damage or
folded or unfolded by pressing the failure.
- The mirrors will unfold when you
switch as below. approach the vehicle (all doors
Left (1) : The mirrors will unfold. closed and locked) with a smart
Right (2) : The mirrors will fold. key in possession. (if equipped)
4 53
OYDDCO2040
Manual type
To fold outside rearview mirror, grasp
the housing of mirror and then fold it
toward the rear of the vehicle.
4 54
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
■ Type A / Type B
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. Turn signal indicators
6. Warning and indicator lights
■ Type C
7. LCD display
❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ

For more details refer to the "Gauges" in
the next pages.
OYDNDI3001C/OYDNDI2002C
4 55
Instrument Cluster Control

Adjusting Instrument Cluster
Illumination
■ Type A ■ Type B • If the brightness reaches to the
maximum or minimum level, an
alarm will sound.
OYDDDI2011/OYDEDI2020
■ Type C
OYDDDI2017
The instrument panel illumination

intensity can be adjusted by pressing
the control switch with the headlight
switch in any position when the igni-
tion switch is in the ON position.
The illumination intensity is shown
on the instrument cluster LCD dis- OYDEDI2034
play.
• If you hold the illumination control
button ("+" or "-"), the brightness
will be changed continuously.
4 56
LCD Display Control Gauges

■ Type A [Type B] Speedometer
(1) : MODE button for changing ■ Type A, B
modes
(2) : MOVE button for changing
■ Type B
items
(3) : SELECT/RESET button for
setting or resetting the
selected item
❈ For the LCD modes, refer to "LCD

OYDEDI2003L
OYDDDI2018 Display" in this chapter.
■ Type C
The LCD display modes can be
changed by using the control buttons
on the steering wheel.
[Type A]
(1) TRIP : TRIP button for changing
trip modes
(2) RESET : RESET button for reset-
ting items OYDEDI2004L
The speedometer indicates the for-
ward speed of the vehicle.
The speedometer is calibrated in
kilometers per hour and/or miles per
hour.
4 57
Tachometer The tachometer pointer may move Engine coolant temperature

slightly when the ignition switch is in gauge
■ Type A, B
ACC or ON position with the engine
■ Type A, B ■ Type B
OFF. This movement is normal and
will not affect the accuracy of the
tachometer once the engine is run-
ning.
CAUTION - Red zone

Do not operate the engine with-
in the tachometer's RED ZONE.
OYDDDI2005
This may cause severe engine
■ Type C
damage.
OYDDDI2007/OYDDDI2008
This gauge shows the temperature
of the engine coolant when the igni-
tion switch is ON.
Do not continue driving with an over-
heated engine. If your vehicle over-
heats, refer to "If the engine over-
heats" in chapter 6.
OYDDDI2006
If the gauge pointer moves beyond
The tachometer indicates the the normal range area toward the "H"
approximate number of engine revo- position, it indicates overheating that
lutions per minute (rpm). may damage the engine.
Use the tachometer to select the cor-
rect shift points and to prevent lug-
ging and/or over-revving the engine.
4 58
Fuel gauge On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge Odometer

pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel
■ Type A, B ■ Type A ■ Type B
warning light may come on earlier
than usual due to the movement of
fuel in the tank.
✽ NOTICE - Fuel gauge

Running out of fuel can expose vehi-
cle occupants to danger. You must
stop and obtain additional fuel as
soon as possible after the warning
OYDDDI2009 light comes on or when the gauge OYDDDI2902/OYDDDI2904
■ Type C indicator comes close to the "E ■ Type C
(Empty)" level.
CAUTION - Low fuel

Avoid driving with extremely
low fuel level. Running out of
fuel could cause the engine to
misfire, damaging the catalytic OYDDDI2906
converter.
OYDDDI2010 The odometer indicates the total dis-
tance the vehicle has been driven.
The fuel gauge indicates the approx- You will also find the odometer useful
imate amount of fuel remaining in the to determine when periodic mainte-
fuel tank. The fuel tank capacity is nance should be performed.
given in chapter 8. The fuel gauge is
supplemented by a low fuel warning
light, which will illuminate when the
fuel tank is nearly empty.
4 59
Transaxle Shift Indicator

Automatic Transaxle Shift Manual transaxle shift
Indicator (if equipped) indicator
■ Type A ■ Type B • Park : P (if equipped)
• Reverse : R
• Neutral : N This indicator informs you which
gear is desired while driving to save
• Drive : D fuel.
• Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 For example
: Indicates that shifting up to the
3rd gear is desired (currently
the shift lever is in the 2nd
OYDDDI2901/OYDDDI2903 gear).
■ Type C : Indicates that shifting down to
the 3rd gear is desired (current-
ly the shift lever is in the 4th
gear).
✽ NOTICE
When the system is not working
OYDDDI2905
properly, up & down arrow indica-
tor and Gear are not displayed.
This indicator displays which auto-
matic transaxle shift lever is selected.
4 60
LCD DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED)

LCD Modes
Symbol
Modes Explanation
Type B Type C
This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy,
Trip Computer and so on.
For more details, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.
Service This mode informs of service interval (mileage or days).
User Settings On this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, and so on.
A/V
- This mode displays the state of the A/V system.
(if equipped)
Turn By Turn
- On this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, and so on.
(if equipped)
❈ For controlling the LCD modes, refer to "LCD Display Control" in this chapter.
4 61
Service Mode
Service Interval
■ Type B ■ Type C ■ Type B ■ Type C ■ Type B ■ Type C
OYDEDI2059/OYDEDI2035 OYDEDI2060/OYDEDI2036 OYDEDI2021/OYDEDI2037
Service in Service required Service in OFF

It calculates and displays when you If you do not have your vehicle serv- If the service interval is not set,
need a scheduled maintenance iced according to the already inputted "Service in OFF" message is dis-
service (mileage or days). service interval, "Service required" played on the LCD display.
message is displayed for several sec-
If the remaining mileage or time
onds each time you set the ignition
reaches 1,500 km (900 mi.) or 30
switch or Engine Start/Stop Button to ✽ NOTICE
days, "Service in" message is dis- If any of the following conditions
the ON position (The mileage and
played for several seconds each time occurs, the mileage and days may be
time changes to "---").
you set the ignition switch or Engine incorrect.
Start/Stop Button to the ON position. To reset the service interval to the
mileage and days you inputted before: - The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- Press the SELECT/RESET button - The battery is discharged.
for more than 1 second.
4 62
User Settings Mode

Description Door
■ Type B ■ Type C Auto Door Lock (if equipped) Auto Door Unlock (if equipped)
• Off: • Off:
The auto door lock operation will The auto door unlock operation will
be deactivated. be canceled.
• Speed: • Key Out or Power Off:
All doors will be automatically All doors will be automatically
locked when the vehicle speed unlocked when the ignition key is
exceeds 15km/h (9.3mph). removed from ignition switch or
• Shift Lever: Engine Start/Stop Button is set to
the OFF position.
All doors will be automatically
OYDEDI2061/OYDEDI2038 locked if the automatic transaxle • Shift Lever:
On this mode, you can change set- shift lever is shifted from the P All doors will be automatically
ting of the doors, lamps, and so on. (Park) position to the R (Reverse), unlocked if the automatic transaxle
N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position. shift lever is shifted to the P (Park)
position.
4 63
Two Press Unlock (if equipped) Lamp Settings

• Off: Head Lamp Delay (if equipped) Welcome Sound
The two press unlock function will If this item is checked, the headlamp If this item is checked, the welcome
be deactivated. Therefore, all doors delay and headlamp welcome func- sound function will be activated.
will unlock if the door is unlocked. tion will be activated.
• On: Shift Indicator (if equipped)
The driver’s door will unlock if the Welcome Light (if equipped) If this item is checked, the shift indi-
door is unlocked. When the door is If this item is checked, the welcome cator function will be activated.
unlocked again within 4 seconds, light function of the puddle lamp will
all doors will unlock. For more details, refer to "Instrument
be activated. Cluster" in this chapter.
Horn Feedback (if equipped) One Touch Turn Lamp (if equipped) Seat Easy Access (if equipped)
• Off: If this item is checked, the lane If this item is checked, the driver’s
The Horn feedback operation will change signals will blink 3, 5 or 7 seat will automatically move forward
be deactivated. times when the turn signal lever is or rearward for the driver to enter or
• On: moved slightly. exit the vehicle comfortably.
After locking the door by pressing
the lock button on the transmitter, if
you press the lock button again
within 4 seconds, the warning
sound will operate once to indicate
that all doors are locked.
4 64
AVG Fuel Eco Reset Service Interval

• Auto Reset: ■ Type B ■ Type C
The average fuel economy will
reset automatically when refueling.
• Manual Reset:
The average fuel economy will not
reset automatically whenever refu-
eling.
For more details, refer to "Trip
Computer" in this chapter.
OYDEDI2062/OYDEDI2039
On this mode, you can activate the
service interval function with mileage
(mi. or km) and period (months).
4 65
A/V Mode (if equipped) Turn By Turn Mode (if equipped)

■ Type C ■ Type C
OYDDDI2057 OYDDDI2058
This mode displays the state of the This mode displays the state of the
A/V system. navigation.
4 66
Warning Messages
Shift to "P" position (for smart key Low Key Battery Press start button while turn
system and automatic transaxle) (for smart key system) steering (for smart key system)
■ Type B ■ Type C ■ Type B ■ Type C ■ Type B ■ Type C
OYDEDI2022/OYDEDI2040 OYDEDI2023/OYDEDI2041 OYDNDI2907/OYDNDI2908
• This warning message illuminates if • This warning message illuminates • This warning message illuminates
you try to turn off the engine without if the battery of the smart key is if the steering wheel does not
the shift lever in P (Park) position. discharged when the Engine unlock normally when the Engine
• At this time, the Engine Start/Stop Start/Stop Button changes to the Start/Stop Button is pressed.
Button turns to the ACC position (If OFF position. • It means that you should press the
you press the Engine Start/Stop Engine Start/Stop Button while
Button once more, it will turn to the turning the steering wheel right
ON position). and left.
4 67
Steering wheel unlocked Check steering wheel lock Press brake pedal to start engine
(for smart key system) system (for smart key system) (for smart key system and auto-
matic transaxle)
■ Type B ■ Type C ■ Type B ■ Type C
■ Type B ■ Type C
OYDEDI2070/OYDEDI2071 OYDEDI2072/OYDEDI2073
• This warning message illuminates • This warning message illuminates OYDEDI2065/OYDEDI2042

if the steering wheel does not lock if the steering wheel does not lock • This warning message illuminates
when the Engine Start/Stop Button normally when the Engine if the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the OFF position. Start/Stop Button changes to the changes to the ACC position twice
OFF position. by pressing the button repeatedly
without depressing the brake pedal.
• It means that you should depress
the brake pedal to start the engine.
4 68
Press clutch pedal to start engine Key not in vehicle Key not detected
(for smart key system and manual (for smart key system) (for smart key system)
transaxle)
OYDEDI2024/OYDEDI2043 • This warning message illuminates • This warning message illuminates
• This warning message illuminates if if the smart key is not in the vehicle if the smart key is not detected
the Engine Start/Stop Button when you press the Engine when you press the Engine
changes to the ACC position twice Start/Stop Button. Start/Stop Button.
by pressing the button repeatedly • It means that you should always
without depressing the clutch pedal. have the smart key with you.
• It means that you should depress
the clutch pedal to start the engine.
4 69
Press start button again Press start button with smart key Check fuse "BRAKE SWITCH"
(for smart key system) (for smart key system) (for smart key system and auto-
matic transaxle)
• This warning message illuminates • This warning message illuminates OYDEDI2067/OYDEDI2048

if you can not operate the Engine if you press the Engine Start/Stop • This warning message illuminates
Start/Stop Button when there is a Button while the warning message if the brake switch fuse is discon-
problem with the Engine Start/Stop "Key not detected" is illuminating. nected.
Button system. • At this time, the immobilizer indica- • It means that you should replace
• It means that you could start the tor light blinks. the fuse with a new one. If that is
engine by pressing the Engine not possible, you can start the
Start/ Stop Button once more. engine by pressing the Engine
• If the warning illuminates each Start/Stop Button for 10 seconds in
time you press the Engine the ACC position.
Start/Stop Button, have your vehi-
cle inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
4 70
Shift to "P" or "N" to start engine ✽ NOTICE Door Open

(for smart key system and auto- You can start the engine with the ■ Type B ■ Type C
matic transaxle) shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.
■ Type B ■ Type C But, for your safety, you should start
the engine with the shift lever in the P
(Park) position.
OYDNDI2028/OYDNDI2050
• It means that any door is open.
OYDEDI2064/OYDEDI2049
• This warning message illuminates

if you try to start the engine with
the shift lever not in the P (Park) or
N (Neutral) position.
4 71
Trunk Open Sunroof Open (if equipped) Low Washer Fluid (if equipped)
■ Type B ■ Type C ■ Type A ■ Type B ■ Type B ■ Type C
OYDDDI2016/OYDNDI2030
■ Type C
OYDNDI2029/OYDNDI2052 OYDEDI2031/OYDEDI2053
• It means that the trunk is open. • This warning message illuminates

on the service reminder mode if
the washer fluid level in the reser-
voir is nearly empty.
• It means that you should refill the
washer fluid.
OYDNDI2052
• The warning message illuminates

if you turn off the engine and then
open the driver's door when the
sunroof is open.
4 72
Turn on "FUSE SWITCH"

(if equipped)
■ Type A ■ Type B • It means that you should turn the
fuse switch on.
For more details, refer to "Fuses" in
chapter 7.
OYDDDI2015/OYDEDI2066
■ Type C
OYDEDI2054
• This warning message illuminates

if the fuse switch on the fuse box is
OFF.
4 73
TRIP COMPUTER
Overview
Description Trip Modes
The trip computer is a microcomput- FUEL ECONOMY • Type A Cluster
er-controlled driver information sys- To change the trip mode, press the
tem that displays information related • Range
"TRIP" button.
to driving. • Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy • Type B, C Cluster
✽ NOTICE
To change the trip mode, press the
Some driving information stored in
MOVE button ▼.
the trip computer (for example TRIP A
Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the
battery is disconnected. • Tripmeter [A]
• Average Vehicle Speed [A]
• Elapsed Time [A]
TRIP B
• Tripmeter [B]
• Average Vehicle Speed [B]
• Elapsed Time [B]
4 74
Fuel Economy
Range Average Fuel Economy (2)
■ Type A ■ Type B - Distance range : 50 ~ 9999 km or • The average fuel economy is cal-
30 ~ 9999 mi. culated by the total driving dis-
• If the estimated distance is below tance and fuel consumption since
50 km (30 mi.), the trip computer the last average fuel economy
will display "---" as distance to reset.
empty. - Fuel economy range: 0.0 ~ 99.9
L/100km or MPG
• The average fuel economy can be
✽ NOTICE reset both manually and automati-
• If the vehicle is not on level ground cally.
or the battery power has been
■ Type C
interrupted, the distance to empty
function may not operate correct- Manual reset
ly. To clear the average fuel economy
• The distance to empty may differ manually, press the RESET button
from the actual driving distance as (Type A : RESET, Type B, C : ) on
it is an estimate of the available the steering wheel for more than 1
driving distance. second when the average fuel econ-
• The trip computer may not regis- omy is displayed.
OYDNDI2056C ter additional fuel if less than 6
liters (1.6 gallons) of fuel are
• The range is the estimated dis- added to the vehicle.
tance the vehicle can be driven • The fuel economy and distance to
with the remaining fuel. empty may vary significantly
based on driving conditions, driv-
ing habits, and condition of the
vehicle.
4 75
Automatic reset Instant Fuel Economy (3) Trip A/B

To make the average fuel economy • This mode displays the instant fuel Tripmeter (1)
be reset automatically whenever refu- economy during the last few sec- ■ Type A ■ Type B
eling, select the "Auto Reset" mode in onds when the vehicle speed is
User Setting menu of the LCD display more than 10 km/h (6.2 MPH).
(Refer to "LCD Display"). - Fuel economy range: 0 ~ 30
Under "Auto Reset" mode, the aver- L/100km or 0 ~ 50 MPG
age fuel economy will be cleared to
zero (---) when the vehicle speed
exceeds 1 km/h after refueling more
than 6 liters (1.6 gallons).
✽ NOTICE ■ Type C
The average fuel economy is not dis-

played for more accurate calculation
if the vehicle does not drive more
than 10 seconds or 50 meters (0.03
miles) since the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button is turned
to ON.
OYDNDI2055C
• The tripmeter is the total driving dis-

tance since the last tripmeter reset.
- Distance range: 0.0 ~ 9999.9 km or
mi.
4 76
• To reset the tripmeter, press the ✽ NOTICE ✽ NOTICE

RESET button (Type A : RESET, • The average vehicle speed is not dis- Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
Type B, C : ) on the steering played if the driving distance is less the elapsed time keeps going while
wheel for more than 1 second than 50 meters (0.03 miles) or the the engine is running.
when the tripmeter is displayed. driving time is less than 10 seconds
since the ignition switch or Engine
Average Vehicle Speed (2) Start/Stop button is turned to ON.
• The average vehicle speed is cal- • Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
culated by the total driving dis- the average vehicle speed keeps
tance and driving time since the going while the engine is running.
last average vehicle speed reset.
Elapsed Time (3)
- Speed range: 0 ~ 999 km/h or MPH
• The elapsed time is the total driv-
• To reset the average vehicle speed, ing time since the last elapsed time
press the RESET button (Type A : reset.
RESET, Type B, C : ) on the
steering wheel for more than 1 sec- - Time range (hh:mm): 00:00 ~ 99:59
ond when the average vehicle • To reset the elapsed time, press
speed is displayed. the RESET button (Type A :
RESET, Type B, C : ) on the
steering wheel for more than 1
second when the elapsed time is
displayed.
4 77
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning lights Air bag Warning Light Seat Belt Warning Light
✽ NOTICE - Warning lights

Make sure that all warning lights This warning light illuminates: This warning light informs the driver
are OFF after starting the engine. If • Once you set the ignition switch or that the seat belt is not fastened.
any light is still ON, this indicates a Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON For more details, refer to the "Seat
situation that needs attention. position. Belts" in chapter 3.
- It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the SRS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
4 78
Parking Brake & Brake If the brake fluid level in the reservoir Dual-diagonal braking system
Fluid Warning Light is low: Your vehicle is equipped with dual-
1.Drive carefully to the nearest safe diagonal braking systems. This
This warning light illuminates: location and stop your vehicle. means you still have braking on two
2.With the engine stopped, check the wheels even if one of the dual sys-
• Once you set the ignition switch or tems should fail.
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON brake fluid level immediately and
position. add fluid as required (For more With only one of the dual systems
details, refer to "Brake Fluid" in working, more than normal pedal
- It illuminates for approximately 3 chapter 7). travel and greater pedal pressure are
seconds required to stop the vehicle.
Then check all brake components
- It remains on if the parking brake for fluid leaks. If any leak on the Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
is applied. brake system is still found, the short a distance with only a portion
• When the parking brake is applied. warning light remains on, or the of the brake system working.
• When the brake fluid level in the brakes do not operate properly, do If the brakes fail while you are driv-
reservoir is low. not drive the vehicle. ing, shift to a lower gear for addition-
- If the warning light illuminates In this case, have your vehicle al engine braking and stop the vehi-
with the parking brake released, it towed to an authorized Kia dealer cle as soon as it is safe to do so.
indicates the brake fluid level in and inspected.
reservoir is low.
4 79
Driving the vehicle with a warning Anti-lock Brake System Electronic

light ON is dangerous. If the Parking (ABS) Warning Light Brake force
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Light Distribution
illuminates with the parking brake (EBD) System
released, it indicates that the brake This warning light illuminates:
Warning Light
fluid level is low. • Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON These two warning lights illuminate at
In this case, have your vehicle the same time while driving:
inspected by an authorized Kia deal- position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3 • When the ABS and regular brake
er. system may not work normally.
• When there is a malfunction with In this case, have your vehicle
the ABS (The normal braking sys- inspected by an authorized Kia
tem will still be operational without dealer.
the assistance of the anti-lock
brake system).
dealer.
4 80
✽ NOTICE - Electronic Brake Electronic Power

WARNING - ABS/Brake force Distribution Steering (EPS) Warning
Light (EBD) System Light (if equipped)
When both ABS and Parking Warning Light
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning When the ABS Warning Light is on This warning light illuminates:
Lights are on, the brake system or both ABS and Parking Brake &
will not work normally and you • Once you set the ignition switch or
Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on, Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
may experience an unexpected the speedometer, odometer, or trip-
and dangerous situation during position.
meter may not work. Also, the EPS
sudden braking thereby increas- Warning Light may illuminate and - It remains on until the engine is
ing the risk of a crash or injury. the steering effort may increase or started.
In this case, avoid high speed decrease. • When there is a malfunction with
driving and abrupt braking. In this case, have your vehicle inspect- the EPS.
Have your vehicle inspected by ed by an authorized Kia dealer as In this case, have your vehicle
an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible. inspected by an authorized Kia
soon as possible. dealer.
4 81
Malfunction Indicator Charging System

Lamp (MIL) CAUTION - Gasoline Warning Light
Engine
This warning light illuminates: If the Malfunction Indicator This warning light illuminates:
Lamp (MIL) illuminates, poten-
• Once you set the ignition switch or tial catalytic converter damage • Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON is possible which could result in Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position. loss of engine power. position.
- It remains on until the engine is In this case, have your vehicle - It remains on until the engine is
started. inspected by an authorized Kia started.
• When there is a malfunction with dealer as soon as possible. • When there is a malfunction with
the emission control system. either the alternator or electrical
In this case, have your vehicle charging system.
dealer. CAUTION - Malfunction
Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
Driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may
cause damage to the emission
control systems which could
effect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
4 82
If there is a malfunction with either Engine Coolant Engine Oil Pressure

the alternator or electrical charging Temperature Warning Warning Light
system: Light (if equipped)
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe This warning light illuminates:
location and stop your vehicle. This warning light illuminates: • Once you set the ignition switch or
2. Turn the engine off and check the • When the engine coolant tempera- Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
alternator drive belt for looseness ture is above 120°C (248°F). This position.
or breakage. means that the engine is overheat- - It remains on until the engine is
If the belt is adjusted properly, ed and may be damaged. started.
there may be a problem in the If your vehicle is overheated, refer
electrical charging system. • When the engine oil pressure is low.
to "Overheating" in chapter 6.
inspected by an authorized Kia If the engine oil pressure is low:
dealer as soon as possible. CAUTION - Engine 1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
Overheating location and stop your vehicle.
Do not drive the vehicle when 2. Turn the engine off and check the
the Engine Coolant Temperature engine oil level (For more details,
Warning Light is illuminated or refer to "Engine Oil" in section 7).
the engine is overheated. If the level is low, add oil as
Continuing to drive the vehicle required.
while it is overheated may dam-
If the warning light remains on
age the engine.
after adding oil or if oil is not avail-
able, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
4 83
Low Fuel Level Warning

CAUTION - Engine Light CAUTION - Low Fuel
damage Level
If the engine is not stopped Driving with the Low Fuel Level
immediately after the engine oil warning light on or with the fuel
pressure warning light is illumi- This warning light illuminates: level below can cause the
nated and stays on while the When the fuel tank is nearly empty. engine to misfire and damage
engine is running, serious the catalytic converter (if
engine damage may result. equipped).
If the fuel tank is nearly empty:
Add fuel as soon as possible.
If the warning light stays on while the
engine is running, there may be seri-
ous engine damage. In this case,
1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it is
safe to do so.
2. Turn off the engine and check the
oil level. If the oil level is low, fill the
engine oil to the proper level.
3. Start the engine again. If the warn-
ing light stays on after the engine
is started, turn the engine off
immediately. In this case, have
your vehicle inspected by an
4 84
Door Ajar Warning Light Washer Fluid Warning Indicator Lights

Light (if equipped) Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) Indicator
This warning light illuminates: Light
This warning light illuminates:
When a door is not closed securely. This indicator light illuminates:
• When the washer fluid level in the
reservoir is nearly empty. • Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
Tailgate Open Warning In this case, you should refill the position.
Light washer fluid.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
This warning light illuminates: • When there is a malfunction with
When the tailgate is not closed the ESC system.
securely. In this case, have your vehicle
dealer.
This indicator light blinks:

While the ESC is operating.
For more details, refer to "Electronic

Stability Control (ESC)" in chapter 5.
4 85
Electronic Stability ECOMINDER® indicator Immobilizer Indicator

Control (ESC) OFF Active ECO system ECO Light (Without Smart Key)
Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates: This indicator light illuminates:
This indicator light illuminates: • When the vehicle detects the
When the Active ECO button is
• Once you set the ignition switch or pressed the ECOMINDER® indicator immobilizer in your key properly
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON (green) will illuminate to show that while the ignition switch is ON.
position. the Active ECO is operating. - At this time, you can start the
- It illuminates for approximately 3 For more detailed information, refer engine.
seconds and then goes off. to "Active ECO" in chapter 5. - The indicator light goes off after
• When you deactivate the ESC sys- starting the engine.
tem by pressing the ESC OFF but-
ton. WARNING
- Ecominder Indicator This indicator light blinks:
Do not keep watching the • When there is a malfunction with
For more details, refer to "Electronic the immobilizer system.
Stability Control (ESC)" in chapter 5. "ECO" ECONMINDER indicator
while driving as it may distract In this case, have your vehicle
you and cause an accident. inspected by an authorized Kia
dealer.
4 86
Immobilizer Indicator This indicator light illuminates for 2 Turn Signal Indicator
Light (With Smart Key) seconds and goes off: Light
• When the vehicle can not detect
This indicator light illuminates for up the smart key which is in the vehi-
to 30 seconds: cle while the Engine Start/Stop
Button is ON. This indicator light blinks:
• When the vehicle detects the
In this case, have your vehicle • When you turn the turn signal light
smart key in the vehicle properly
inspected by an authorized Kia on.
while the Engine Start/Stop Button
is ACC or ON. dealer.
- At this time, you can start the If any of the following occurs, there
engine. This indicator light blinks: may be a malfunction with the turn
signal system. In this case, have your
- The indicator light goes off after • When the battery of the smart key vehicle inspected by an authorized
starting the engine. is weak. Kia dealer.
- At this time, you can not start the - The indicator light does not blink
This indicator light blinks for a few engine. However, you can start but illuminates.
seconds: the engine if you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button with the smart - The indicator light blinks more
• When the smart key is not in the rapidly.
vehicle. key. (For more details, refer to
"Starting the Engine" in section - The indicator light does not illumi-
- At this time, you can not start the 5). nate at all.
engine.
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
dealer.
4 87
High Beam Indicator Cruise Indicator Light KEY OUT Indicator Light
Light (if equipped) CRUISE (if equipped)
KEY
OUT
This indicator light illuminates: When the ENGINE START/STOP
This indicator light illuminates: • When the cruise control system is button is in the ACC or ON position,
• When the headlights are on and in enabled. if any door is open, the system
the high beam position checks for the smart key.
• When the turn signal lever is pulled For more details, refer to "Cruise
into the Flash-to-Pass position. Control System" in chapter 5. This indicator light blinks:
When the smart key is not in the
Light ON Indicator Light Cruise SET Indicator vehicle and any door is open with the
Light (if equipped) SET ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop
button in the ACC or ON position.
- At this time, if you close all doors,
This indicator light illuminates: the chime will also sound for
• When the tail lights or headlights This indicator light illuminates: approximately 5 seconds.
are on. • When the cruise control speed is set. - The indicator will go off while the
vehicle is moving.
Front Fog Indicator For more details, refer to "Cruise
Light (if equipped) Control System" in chapter 5.
This indicator light illuminates:

• When the front fog lights are on.
4 88
PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

■ Front This system is a supplemental sys- Operation of the parking assist
tem and it is not intended to nor does system
it replace the need for extreme care
and attention of the driver. Operating condition
■ Type A
The sensing range and objects
detectable by the sensors are limit-
ed. Whenever moving pay as much
attention to what is in front of and
behind you as you would in a vehicle
Sensor without a parking assist system.
OYDECO2201CN
■ Rear The parking assist system should
only be considered as a supplemen-
tary function. The driver must check
the front and rear view. The opera- OYDDCO2202
tional function of the parking assist ■ Type B
system can be affected by many fac-
tors and conditions of the surround-
ings, so the responsibility rests
always with the driver.
Sensor
OYDDCO2200
The parking assist system assists
the driver during movement of the
vehicle by chiming if any object is
sensed within the distance of 60 cm OYDDCO2228
(23.62 in) in front or 120 cm (47 in) • This system will activate when the
behind the vehicle. parking assist button is pressed
with the engine running.
4 89
• Sensing distance in backing up is ✽ NOTICE

approximately 120 cm (47 in) when The parking assist system may not
you are driving less than 10 km/h operate if it’s distance from the object
(6.21 mph ). is already less than approximately 25
• Sensing distance in moving for- cm (9.84 in) when the system is ON.
ward is approximately 60 cm
(23.62 in) when you are driving
less than 10 km/h (6.21 mph).
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the clos-
est one will be recognized first.
• If you move the shift lever to the R
position with the engine start/stop
button in the ON position and the
parking assist system in OFF, the
parking assist system will operate
automatically. But it will turn off
automatically, when the vehicle
speed exceeds than 20km/h
(12.4 mph)
4 90
Type of warning indicator and sound This system can only sense objects
: with Warning sound within the range and location of the
sensors;
Warning indicator It can not detect objects in other
Distance from object Warning sound areas where sensors are not
When driving When driving
installed. Also, small or slim objects,
forward rearward
such as poles or objects located
between sensors may not be detect-
Front - - - ed by the sensors.
120cm~61cm
(47in ~ 24) Always visually check behind the
Buzzer beeps vehicle when backing up.
Rear -
intermittently Be sure to inform any drivers of the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with
Buzzer beeps the system regarding the systems
Front
frequently capabilities and limitations.
60cm~31cm
(23.6in ~ 12.2)
Buzzer beeps
Rear -
frequently
Buzzer sounds
Front
continuously
30cm
(11.8 in)
Buzzer sounds
Rear -
continuously
✽ NOTICE
• The actual warning sound and indicator may differ from the illustration
according to objects or sensor status.
• Do not wash the vehicle's sensor with high pressure water.
4 91
Non-operational conditions of There is a possibility that the park- Detection range may decrease
parking assist system ing assist system may not operate when:
Parking assist system may not when: 1. Outside air temperature is
operate when: 1. Driving on uneven road surfaces extremely hot or cold.
such as unpaved roads, gravel, 2. There are undetectable objects
1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It
bumps, or gradient. smaller than 1 m (39.37 in) and
will operate normally when mois-
ture melts.) 2. Objects generating excessive noise narrower than 14 cm (5.51 in) in
such as vehicle horns, loud motor- diameter.
2. Sensor is covered with foreign
cycle engines, or truck air brakes
matter, such as snow or water, or
interfere with the sensor.
the sensor cover is blocked. (It will The following objects may not be
operate normally when the materi- 3. Heavy rain or water spray. recognized by the sensor:
al is removed or the sensor is no 4. Wireless transmitters or mobile 1. Sharp or slim objects such as
longer blocked.) phones are present near the sen- ropes, chains or small poles.
3. Sensor is stained with foreign mat- sor.
2. Objects, which tend to absorb sen-
ter such as snow or water. 5. Sensor is covered with snow. sor frequency such as clothes,
(Sensing range will return to nor- spongy material or snow.
mal when removed.)
4 92
✽ NOTICE ✽ NOTICE
1. The warning may not sound This system can only sense objects WARNING - Parking
sequentially depending on the within the range and location of the Assist
speed and shapes of the objects sensors, it can not detect objects in System
detected. other areas where sensors are not Never rely solely on the parking
2. The parking assist system may installed. Also, small or slim objects, assist system when backing up.
malfunction if the vehicle bumper or objects located between sensors Always perform a visual inspec-
height or sensor installation has may not be detected. tion to make sure the vehicle is
been modified. Any non-factory Always visually check in front and clear of all obstructions before
installed equipment or accessories behind the vehicle when driving. moving the vehicle in any direc-
may also interfere with the sensor Be sure to inform any drivers in the tion. Pay close attention when the
performance. vehicle that may be unfamiliar with vehicle is driven close to objects
3. Sensor may not recognize objects the system regarding the system’s on the road, particularly pedestri-
less than 30 cm (11.81 in) from the capabilities and limitations. ans, and especially children. Be
sensor, or it may sense an incor- aware that some objects may not
rect distance. Use with caution. be detected by the sensors, due
4. When the sensor is frozen or to the objects distance, size or
stained with snow or water, the material, all of which can limit the
sensor may be inoperative until effectiveness of the sensor.
the stains are removed using a
soft cloth.
5. Do not push, scratch or strike the
sensor with any hard objects that
could damage the surface of the
sensor. Sensor damage could occur.
4 93
Self-diagnosis
When you shift the gear to the R
(Reverse) position and if one or more
of the below occurs you may have a
malfunction in the rear parking assist
system.
• You don't hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds inter-
mittently.
• is displayed. (if equipped)

(blinks)
have your vehicle checked byan

authorized Kia dealer as soon as
possible.
4 94
REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)

2 ~ 4 seconds may be required
before displaying during initial WARNING - Backing Up &
reverse selection. This occurs when Using Camera
starting and immediately shifting to Never rely solely on the rear view
reverse. camera when backing up. Prior
This system is a supplemental sys- to entering your vehicle always
tem that shows behind the vehicle do a visual check of the area
through the UVO audio or navigation behind your vehicle, and before
display backing-up. backing up be aware of your sur-
Always keep the camera lens clean. If roundings and supplement the
lens is covered with foreign matter, rear view camera by looking over
OYDDCO2203 the camera may not operate normally. your shoulders and checking
The rear view camera will activate your rear view mirrors. Due to the
The rearview camera is not a substi-
with the ignition switch on and the difficulty of ensuring that the
tute for proper and safe backing-up
shift lever in the R (Reverse) position. area behind you remains clear,
procedures. Always drive safely and
always back up slowly and stop
use caution when backing up. The
immediately if you even suspect
Note- during initial start up, system rearview camera may not display
that a person, and especially a
may not display instantly due to the every object behind the vehicle.
child, might be behind you.
audio system booting up.
4 95
LIGHTING
Battery saver function Headlight escort function If the driver gets out of the vehicle
• The purpose of this feature is to (if equipped) through other doors (except driver's
prevent the battery from being dis- door), the battery saver function
The headlights (and/or taillights) will
charged. The system automatically does not operate and the headlight
remain on for approximately 20 min-
turns off the parking lights when escort function does not turn off
utes after the ignition key is removed
the driver removes the ignition key automatically. Therefore, It causes
or turned to the ACC or LOCK posi-
and opens the driver-side door. the battery to be discharged. In this
tion. However, if the driver’s door is
case, make sure to turn off the lamp
• With this feature, the parking lights opened and closed, the headlights
before getting out of the vehicle.
will turn off automatically if the driv- are turned off after 30 seconds.
er parks on the side of the road at If the headlights are not working
The headlights can be turned off by
night. properly have your vehicle inspected
pressing the lock button on the trans-
by an authorized Kia dealer.
If necessary, to keep the lights on mitter (or smart key) twice or turning
when the ignition key is removed, off the light switch from the headlight Don't attempt to inspect or replace
perform the following: or Auto light position. the wiring yourself to prevent mal-
function.
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and
ON again using the light switch
on the steering column.
4 96
Daytime running light Lighting control Parking light position ( )

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can
make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, and it is especially
helpful after dawn and before sunset.
The DRL system turns OFF when:
1. The position lights or headlights
are ON.
2. The parking brake is applied.
3. Engine stops. OXM049110 OAM049041
The light switch has a Headlight and When the light switch is in the park-
a Parking light position. ing light position (1st position), the
To operate the lights, turn the knob at tail, position, license and instrument
the end of the control lever to one of panel lights will turn ON.
the following positions:
(1) OFF position
(2) Parking light position
(3) Headlight position
(4) Auto light position (if equipped)
4 97
Headlight position ( ) Auto light position (if equipped) If your vehicle has window tint or
other types of metallic coating on the
front windshield, the Auto light sys-
tem may not work properly.
OAM049042 OYDDCO2042
When the light switch is in the head- When the light switch is in the AUTO
light position (2nd position) the head, light position, the taillights and head-
tail, position, license and instrument lights will turn ON or OFF automati-
panel lights will turn ON. cally depending on the amount of
The ignition switch must be in the ON light outside the vehicle.
position to turn on the headlights. Never place anything over the sensor
(1) located on the instrument panel.
This will ensure better auto-light sys-
tem control.
Do not clean the sensor using a win-
dow cleaner, the cleaner may leave a
light film which could interfere with
sensor operation.
4 98
High beam operation

WARNING - High beams
Do not use high beam when
there are other vehicles. Using
high beam could obstruct the
other driver's vision.
OAM049043
OAM049044 To flash the headlights, pull the lever

towards you. It will return to the normal
To turn on the high beam headlights, (low-beam) position when released.
push the lever away from you. Pull it The headlight switch does not need to
back for low beams. be on to use this flashing feature.
The high-beam indicator will light
when the headlight high beams are
switched on.
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the lights
on for a prolonged time while the
engine is not running.
4 99
Turn signals and lane change If an indicator stays on and does not One-touch lane change function
signals flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of To activate an one-touch lane
the turn signal bulbs may be burned change function, move the turn sig-
out and will require replacement. nal lever slightly and then release it.
If an indicator flash is abnormally The lane change signals will blink 3,
quick or slow, a bulb may be burned 5 or 7 times.
out or have a poor electrical connec- You can choose one-touch lane
tion in the circuit. change blinking function in "One
touch turn lamp" of "User setting".
Refer to "User setting" in chapter 4.
✽ NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally
OAM049045
quick or slow, the bulb may be
The ignition switch must be on for the burned out or have a poor electrical
turn signals to function. To turn on connection in the circuit.
the turn signals, move the lever up or
down (A). The green arrow indicators
on the instrument panel indicate
which turn signal is operating. They
will self-cancel after a turn is com-
pleted. If the indicator continues to
flash after a turn, manually return the
lever to the OFF position.
To signal a lane change, move the
turn signal lever slightly and hold it in
position (B). The lever will return to
the OFF position when released.
4 100
WIPERS AND WASHERS

Front fog light (if equipped) Front B : Intermittent control wipe time
adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes (front)*
D : Rear wiper/washer control

· /ON – Continuous wipe
· ---/INT – Intermittent wipe
· O/OFF – Off
OAM049100L
Rear ( 5 Door, if equipped)
E : Wash with brief wipes (rear)
OAM049046N
Fog lights are used to provide * : if equipped

improved visibility when visibility is
poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc. The
fog lights will turn on when the fog light
switch (1) is turned to the on position
after the headlights are turned on.
To turn off the fog lights, turn the OAM049048N
switch (1) to the off position. A : Wiper speed control (front)
When in operation, the fog lights · HI – High wiper speed
consume large amounts of vehicle
electrical power. Only use the fog · LO – Low wiper speed
lights when visibility is poor. · INT – Intermittent wipe
· AUTO* – Automatic control wipe
· OFF – Off
· MIST – Single wipe
4 101
Windshield wipers Windshield washers (front) The reservoir filler neck is located in
Operates as follows when the igni- the front of the engine compartment
tion switch is turned ON. on the passenger side.
MIST : For a single wiping cycle,
push the lever upward and CAUTION - Washer pump
release it. The wipers will To prevent possible damage to
operate continuously if the the washer pump, do not oper-
lever is held in this position. ate the washer when the fluid
OFF : Wiper is not in operation reservoir is empty.
INT : Wiper operates intermittently at
the same wiping intervals. Use
this mode in a light rain or mist. WARNING - Obscured
OYF049101
To vary the speed setting, turn visibility
the speed control knob. In the OFF position, pull the lever Do not use the washer in freez-
LO : Normal wiper speed gently toward you to spray washer ing temperatures without first
HI : Fast wiper speed fluid on the windshield and to run the warming the windshield with
wipers 1-3 cycles. the defrosters; the washer solu-
Use this function when the wind- tion could freeze on the wind-
If there is a heavy accumulation of shield is dirty. shield and obscure your vision.
snow or ice on the windshield, defrost
the windshield for about 10 minutes, The spray and wiper operation will
or until the snow and/or ice is continue until you release the lever. If
removed before using the windshield the washer does not work, check the
wipers to ensure proper operation. washer fluid level.
If the fluid level is not sufficient, you
add appropriate non-abrasive wind-
shield washer fluid to the washer
reservoir.
4 102
Rear window wiper and wash-

CAUTION - Wiper position er switch (5 door) (if equipped)
When washing the vehicle, set
the wiper switch in the off posi-
tion to stop the auto wiper oper-
ation. The wiper may operate
and be damaged if the switch is
set in the AUTO mode while
washing the vehicle.
CAUTION - Wipers & OYD044500

windshields Push the lever away from you to
• To prevent possible damage OAM049103N
spray rear washer fluid and to run the
to the wipers or windshield, rear wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray
do not operate the wipers The rear window wiper and washer and wiper operation will continue
when the windshield is dry. switch is located at the end of the until you release the lever.
• To prevent damage to the wiper and washer switch lever. Turn
wiper blades, do not use gaso- the switch to desired position to
line, kerosene, paint thinner, operate the rear wiper and washer.
or other solvents on or near ON - Normal wiper operation
them. INT - Intermittent wipe
• To prevent damage to the OFF - Wiper is not in operation
wiper arms and other compo-
nents, do not attempt to move
the wipers manually.
4 103
INTERIOR LIGHT
Do not use the interior lights for Automatic turn off function Map lamp (if equipped)
extended periods when the engine is (if equipped) ■ Type A
not running.
The interior lights automatically turn
It may cause battery discharge. off approximately 20 minutes after
the ignition switch is turned off.
WARNING - Interior light If your vehicle is equipped with the
Do not use the interior lights theft alarm system, the interior lights
when driving in the dark. The automatically turn off approximately
glare from the interior lights 3 seconds after the system is in
may obstruct your view and armed stage.
cause an accident. OYDDCO2043
■ Type B
OYDDCO2044
Push the lens (1) to turn the map lamp

on or off. This light produces a spot
beam for convenient use as a map
lamp at night or as a personal lamp for
the driver and front passenger.
4 104
• DOOR (2) : • OFF (3) : The lights turn off even if Room lamp
In the DOOR position, the map a door is opened.
lamp and the room lamp come on When the lamp is
when any door is opened regard- turned ON by pressing
less of the ignition switch position. the lens (1), the lamp
When doors are unlocked by the does not turn off even
transmitter (or smart key), the map if the switch (2) is in the
lamp and the room lamp come on OFF position.
for approximately 30 seconds as • ON (4) : The map lamp and the
long as any door is not open. room lamp stay on at all
The map lamp and the room lamp times.
go out gradually after approximate-
ly 30 seconds if the door is closed. OMD040097
However, if the ignition switch is
ON or all doors are locked, the To turn the room lamp ON or OFF,
map lamp and the room lamp will push the switch.
turn off immediately. If a door is If your vehicle is not equipped with a
opened with the ignition switch in map lamp, the room lamp will also
the ACC or LOCK position, the turn on or off as follows.
map lamp and the room lamp stays - The room lamp comes on when a
on for about 20 minutes. However, door is opened. The lamps go out
if a door is opened with the ignition after approximately 30 seconds.
switch in the ON position, the map
lamp and the room lamp stays on - The room lamp comes on for
continuously. If the type B room approximately 30 seconds when
lamp switch is OFF, it doesn't work. doors are unlocked with a trans-
mitter or smart key as long as the
doors are not opened.
4 105
- The room lamp will stay on for Trunk room lamp Glove box lamp
approximately 20 minutes if a
door is opened with the ignition
switch in the ACC or LOCK/OFF
position.
- The room lamp will stay on con-
tinuously if the door is opened
with the ignition switch in the ON
position.
- The room lamp will go out imme-
diately if the ignition switch is
changed to the ON position or all
doors are locked. OYDDCO2045 OYDDCO2046
The trunk room lamp comes on The glove box lamp comes on when
when the trunk is opened. the glove box is opened.
The trunk room lamp comes on as The parking lights or headlights must
long as the trunk lid opens. To pre- be ON for the glove box lamp to func-
vent unnecessary charging system tion. To prevent unnecessary charg-
drain, close the trunk lid securely ing system drain, close the glove box
after using the trunk. securely after use.
4 106
Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)
OLM049105
Push the switch to turn the light on or

off.
• : The lamp will turn on if this
button is pressed.
• : The lamp will turn off if this
button is pressed.
Always have the switch in the off
position when the vanity mirror lamp
is not in use. If the sunvisor is closed
without turning the lamp off, it may
discharge the battery or damage the
sunvisor.
4 107
WELCOME SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Headlamp welcome At this time, if you press the door lock Puddle lamp and pocket lamp
button (on the transmitter or smart (if equipped)
key), the lights will turn off immediately.
When all doors are locked and
closed, the puddle lamp and pocket
Interior light welcome lamp will come on for 15 seconds if
When the interior light switch is in the any of the below is performed.
DOOR position and all doors (and • With the smart key system
trunk) are locked and closed, the - When the door unlock button is
room lamp will come on for 30 sec- pressed on the smart key.
onds if any of the below is performed. - When the button of the outside
• Without smart key system door handle is pressed.
OYDNCO3047
- When the door unlock button is - When the vehicle is approached
pressed on the transmitter. with the smart key in possession.
When the headlight(light switch in the • With the smart key system
headlight or AUTO position) is on and
all doors (and trunk) are locked and - When the door unlock button is At this time, if you press the door lock
closed, the headlight, position light pressed on the smart key. button, the lamps will turn off imme-
and tail light will come on for 15 sec- - When the button of the outside diately.
onds if any of the below is performed. door handle is pressed.
• Without smart key system
- When the door unlock button is At this time, if you press the door lock
pressed on the transmitter. button, the lamps will turn off imme-
• With the smart key system diately.
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
4 108
DEFROSTER
Rear window defroster The rear window defroster automati-
CAUTION - Conductors cally turns off after approximately 20
■ Type A ■ Type B
To prevent damage to the con- minutes or when the ignition switch is
ductors bonded to the inside turned off. To turn off the defroster
surface of the rear window, manually, press the rear window
never use sharp instruments or defroster button again.
window cleaners containing
abrasives to clean the window. Outside mirror defroster
(if equipped)
If you want to defrost and defog the If your vehicle is equipped with the
front windshield, refer to "Windshield outside rearview mirror defrosters,
Defrosting and Defogging" in this they will operate at the same time you
section. OYDDCL2001 turn on the rear window defroster.
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from Front wiper deicer (if equipped)
the interior and exterior of the rear If your vehicle is equipped with the
window, while the engine is running. front wiper deicer, it will be operating
To activate the rear window at the same time you operate the
defroster, press the rear window front windshield defroster.
defroster button located in the center
facia switch panel. The indicator on
the rear window defroster button illu-
minates when the defroster is on.
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow on the rear window, brush it off
before operating the rear defroster.
4 109
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
1. Fan speed control knob 4. Air conditioning button

2. Mode selection knob 5. Air intake control button
3. Temperature control knob 6. Rear window defroster button
OYDDCL2002
4 110
Heating and air conditioning

1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion.
To improve the effectiveness of
heating and cooling :
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air or recirculated
air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
(if equipped) (if equipped)
OYDECL2004CN
4 111
Mode selection
Face-Level (B, C, D, E, F) Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)
Air flow is directed toward the upper Most of the air flow is directed to the
body and face. Additionally, each floor and the windshield with a small
outlet can be controlled to direct the amount directed to the side window
air discharged from the outlet. defrosters.
Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F) Defrost-Level (A, D)
OYDDCL2003 Air flow is directed towards the face Most of the air flow is directed to the
The mode selection knob controls and the floor. windshield with a small amount of air
the direction of the air flow through directed to the side window defrosters.
the ventilation system.
Air can be directed to the floor, dash- Floor-Level (A, C, D, E)
board outlets, or windshield. Six
symbols are used to represent Face,
Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Most of the air flow is directed to the
Defrost air position. floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
4 112
MAX A/C-Level (B, D) (if equipped) Temperature control
OYDECL2006
OYDDCL2005
Instrument panel vents OYDDCL2007
The MAX A/C mode is used to cool The outlet vents can be opened or The temperature control knob allows
the inside of the vehicle faster. Air closed separately using the thumb- you to control the temperature of the
flow is directed toward the upper wheel. air flowing from the ventilation sys-
body and face. Also, you can adjust the direction of tem. To change the air temperature in
In this mode, the air conditioning and air delivered from these vents using the passenger compartment, turn
the recirculated air position will be the vent control lever as shown. the knob to the right for warm air or
selected automatically. left for cooler air.
4 113
Air intake control Recirculated air position Prolonged operation of the heater in
The indicator light on the the recirculated air position (without air
button illuminates when conditioning selected) may cause fog-
the recirculated air posi- ging of the windshield and side win-
tion is selected. dows and the air within the passenger
compartment may become stale.
With the recirculated air
position selected, air In addition, prolonged operation of
from the passenger the air conditioning with the recircu-
compartment will be lated air position selected will result
drawn through the heat- in excessively dry air in the passen-
ing system and heated ger compartment.
or cooled according to
OYDDCL2008
the function selected.
WARNING - Reduced
This is used to select outside (fresh) Visibility
air position or recirculated air position. Outside (fresh) air position
Continuous use of the climate
To change the air intake control posi- The indicator light on the control system in the recirculat-
tion, push the control button. button will not illuminate ed air position may allow
when the outside (fresh) humidity to increase inside the
air position is selected. vehicle which may fog the glass
With the outside (fresh) and obscure visibility.
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
4 114
Fan speed control To turn off the blowers

WARNING - Recirculated
Air
Continue using the climate con-
trol system in the recirculated
air position can cause drowsi-
ness or sleepiness, and loss of
vehicle control. Set the air
intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
OYDDCL2009 OYDDCL2032
WARNING - Sleeping with
AC on The ignition switch must be in the ON To turn off the blowers, turn the fan
position for fan operation. speed control knob to the "0" posi-
Do not sleep in a vehicle with tion.
the air conditioning or heating The fan speed control knob allows
on as this may cause serious you to control the fan speed of the air
harm or death due to a drop in flowing from the ventilation system.
the oxygen level and/or body To change the fan speed, turn the
temperature. knob to the right for higher speed or
left for lower speed.
4 115
Air conditioning (if equipped) System operation Operation Tips

Ventilation • To prevent dust or unpleasant
fumes from entering the vehicle
1. Set the mode to the position. through the ventilation system,
2. Set the air intake control to the temporarily set the air intake con-
outside (fresh) air position. trol to the recirculated air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the Be sure to return the control to the
desired position. fresh air position when the irritation
4. Set the fan speed control to the has passed to keep fresh air in the
desired speed. vehicle. This will help keep the driv-
er alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
Heating is drawn in through the grilles just
OYDDCL2010
1. Set the mode to the position. ahead of the windshield. Care
Press the A/C button to turn the air 2. Set the air intake control to the should be taken that these are not
conditioning system on (indicator light outside (fresh) air position. blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
will illuminate). Press the button again other obstructions.
to turn the air conditioning system off. 3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position. • To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
desired speed.
to the desired position, turn on the
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, air conditioning system, and adjust
turn the air conditioning system (if the temperature control to desired
equipped) on. temperature.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the , position.
4 116
Air conditioning (if equipped) Air conditioning system operation tips

Kia Air Conditioning Systems are CAUTION - Excessive AC • If the vehicle has been parked in
filled with R-134a refrigerant. While using the air conditioning direct sunlight during hot weather,
1. Start the engine. Push the air con- system, monitor the tempera- open the windows for a short time
ditioning button. ture gauge closely while driving to let the hot air inside the vehicle
up hills or in heavy traffic when escape.
2. Set the mode to the position. outside temperatures are high. • To help reduce moisture inside of
3. Set the air intake control to the Air conditioning system opera- the windows on rainy or humid
recirculated air position. However, tion may cause engine over- days, decrease the humidity inside
prolonged operation in the recircu- heating and potential engine the vehicle by operating the air
lated air position will excessively damage. Continue to use the conditioning system.
dry the air. In this case, change the blower fan but turn the air con-
air position. ditioning system off if the tem- • During air conditioning system
perature gauge indicates engine operation, you may occasionally
4. Adjust the fan speed control and notice a slight change in engine
temperature control to maintain overheating.
speed as the air conditioning com-
maximum comfort. pressor cycles. This is a normal
• When maximum cooling is desired, system operation characteristic.
set the temperature control to the • Use the air conditioning system
extreme left position, set the mode every month only for a few minutes
control to the MAX A/C position, to ensure maximum system per-
then set the fan speed control to formance.
the highest speed.
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This is a normal sys-
tem operation characteristic.
4 117
• Operating the air conditioning sys- Climate control air filter ✽ NOTICE
tem in the recirculated air position • Replace the filter according to the
provides maximum cooling, how- Maintenance Schedule.
ever, continual operation in this Outside air
If the vehicle is being driven in
mode may cause the air inside the severe conditions such as dusty,
vehicle to become stale. Recirculated
air rough roads, more frequent cli-
• During cooling operation, you may mate control air filter inspections
occasionally notice a misty air flow and changes are required.
because of rapid cooling and • When the air flow rate suddenly
humid air intake. This is a normal decreases, the system should be
system operation characteristic. Blower checked at an authorized Kia
Climate control Evaporator
Heater core dealer.
air filter core OMG075033
The climate control air filter installed

behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system. If
dust or other pollutants accumulate in
the filter over a period of time, the air
flow from the air vents may decrease,
resulting in moisture accumulation on
the inside of the windshield even
when the outside (fresh) air position is
selected. If this happens, have the cli-
mate control air filter replaced by an
4 118
Checking the amount of air

conditioner refrigerant and CAUTION
compressor lubricant It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and refrig-
When the amount of refrigerant is
erant is used, otherwise damage
low, the performance of the air con-
to the vehicle may occur.
ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a negative influence on the air To prevent damage, the air condi-
conditioning system. tioning system in your vehicle
should only be serviced by
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
trained and certified technicians.
found, have the system inspected by
an authorized Kia dealer.
The air conditioning system should
WARNING be serviced by an authorized Kia
dealer.
The oil and refrigerant in your
vehicle’s air conditioning sys-
tem is under very high pressure.
If proper service procedures are
not followed an explosion may
result. To reduce the risk of seri-
ous injury or death, the air con-
ditioning system in your vehicle
should only be serviced by
trained and certified technicians.
4 119
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Driver’s temperature control knob 7. Air intake control button

2. AUTO (automatic control) button 8. Rear window defroster button
3. OFF button 9. Passenger's temperature control knob
4. Front windshield defroster button 10. Dual temperature control selection button
5. Mode selection button 11. Air conditioning button
6. Fan speed control switch 12. Climate control display
CAUTION
Operating the blower when the ignition switch is in the ON position could cause the
battery to discharge. It is best to operate the blower when the engine is running.
OYDECL2011CN
4 120
Automatic heating and air con- ■ Driver’s side ■ Passenger’s side ✽ NOTICE
ditioning • To turn the automatic operation
off, select any button or switch of
the following:
- Mode selection button
- Air conditioning button
- Front windshield defroster button
(Press the button one more time
to deselect the front windshield
defroster function. The 'AUTO'
sign will illuminate on the infor-
OYDDCL2017 mation display once again.)
2. Turn the temperature control knob - Air intake control button
to set the desired temperature. - Fan speed control knob
OYDDCL2012 The selected function will be con-
1. Push the AUTO button. The modes, trolled manually while other func-
fan speeds, air intake and air-con- tions operate automatically.
ditioning will be controlled automat- • For your convenience and to
ically by temperature setting. improve the effectiveness of the
climate control, use the AUTO
button and set the temperature to
23°C (73°F).
4 121
Manual heating and air condi- Mode selection

tioning
The heating and cooling system can
be controlled manually by pushing
buttons other than the AUTO button.
In this case, the system works
sequentially according to the order of
buttons selected.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
OYDDCL2013 To improve the effectiveness of
✽ NOTICE heating and cooling :
OYDDCL2014
Never place anything over the sen- - Heating:
The mode selection button controls
sor located on the instrument panel - Cooling: the direction of the air flow through
to ensure better control of the heat- 3. Set the temperature control to the the ventilation system.
ing and cooling system. desired position. Every time you press the mode
4. Set the air intake control to the selection button, the mode will
outside (fresh) air or recirculated change as follows:
air position.
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on. Refer to the illustration in the
Press the AUTO button in order to "Manual climate control system".
convert to full automatic control of
the system.
4 122
Face-Level (B, C, D, E, F) Floor-Level (C, A, D, E)
Air flow is directed toward the upper Most of the air flow is directed to the
body and face. Additionally, each floor, with a small amount of the air
outlet can be controlled to direct the being directed to the windshield and
air discharged from the outlet. side window defroster.
Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F) Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, D, E)

OYDDCL2016
Defrost-level
Air flow is discharged towards the Most of the air flow is directed to the
face and floor. floor and the windshield with a small Most of the air flow is directed to the
amount directed to the side window windshield with a small amount of air
defrosters. directed to the side window
defrosters.
4 123
Temperature control
■ Driver’s side ■ Passenger’s side
Instrument panel vents OYDDCL2017
Adjusting the driver and passenger
The outlet vents can be opened or side temperature individually
The temperature control knob allows
closed separately using the thumb- you to control the temperature of the 1. Press the DUAL button to operate
wheel. air flowing from the ventilation sys- the driver and passenger side
Also, you can adjust the direction of tem. To change the air temperature in temperature individually. Pressing
air delivered from these vents using the passenger compartment, turn the right temperature control but-
the vent control lever as shown. the knob to the right for warm air or ton will automatically switch to the
left for cooler air. DUAL mode as well.
2. Operate the left temperature con-
trol to adjust the driver side tem-
perature. Operate the right tem-
perature control to adjust the pas-
senger side temperature.
4 124
When the driver side temperature is Adjusting the driver and passenger Air intake control
set to the highest (HIGH) or lowest side temperature equally
(LOW) temperature setting, the 1. Press the DUAL button again to
DUAL mode is deactivated for maxi- deactivate DUAL mode. The pas-
mum heating or cooling. senger side temperature will be
set to the same temperature as
the driver side temperature.
2. Operate the driver side tempera-
ture control switch. The driver and
passenger side temperature will
be adjusted equally.
OYDDCL2019
The air intake control is used to

select outside (fresh) air position or
recirculated air position.
To change the air intake control posi-
tion, push the control button.
4 125
Recirculated air position Prolonged operation of the heater in

With the recirculated air the recirculated air position (without air WARNING - Sleeping with
position selected, air conditioning selected) may cause fog- AC on
from the passenger ging of the windshield and side win- Do not sleep in a vehicle with
compartment will be dows and the air within the passenger the air conditioning or heating
drawn through the heat- compartment may become stale. system on as this may cause
ing system and heated In addition, prolonged operation of serious harm or death due to a
or cooled according to the air conditioning with the recircu- drop in the oxygen level and/or
the function selected. lated air position selected will result body temperature.
in excessively dry air in the passen-
ger compartment.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh) WARNING - Recirculated
air position selected, air WARNING - Reduced air
enters the vehicle from Visibility Continued use of the climate
outside and is heated or Continuous use of the climate control system in the recirculat-
cooled according to the control system in the recirculated air position can cause
function selected. ed air position may allow drowsiness or sleepiness, and
humidity to increase inside the loss of vehicle control. Set the
vehicle which may fog the glass air intake control to the outside
and obscure visibility. (fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
4 126
Fan speed control Air conditioning OFF mode
OYDDCL2020 OYDDCL2021 OYDDCL2022

The fan speed can be set to the Press the A/C button to turn the air Press the OFF button to turn off the
desired speed by pressing the fan conditioning system on (indicator air climate control system. However
speed control switch. light will illuminate). you can still operate the mode and
To change the fan speed press the Press the button again to turn the air air intake buttons as long as the igni-
part of the switch for higher conditioning system off. tion switch is in the ON position.
speed or press the part of the
switch for lower speed.
To turn the fan speed control off,
press the OFF button.
4 127
System operation Operation Tips Air conditioning

Ventilation • To keep dust or unpleasant fumes Kia Air Conditioning Systems are
from entering the vehicle through filled with R-134a refrigerant.
1. Set the mode to the position. the ventilation system, temporarily 1. Start the engine. Press the air con-
2. Set the air intake control to the set the air intake control to the ditioning button.
outside (fresh) air position. recirculated air position. Be sure to
return the control to the fresh air 2. Set the mode to the position.
desired position. position when the irritation has 3. Set the air intake control to the out-
passed to keep fresh air in the side air or recirculated air position.
desired speed. vehicle. This will help keep the driv- 4. Adjust the fan speed control and
er alert and comfortable. temperature control to maintain
• Air for the heating/cooling system maximum comfort.
Heating is drawn in through the grilles just • When maximum cooling is desired,
1. Set the mode to the position. ahead of the windshield. Care set the temperature control to the
2. Set the air intake control to the should be taken that these are not extreme left position, then set the
outside (fresh) air position. blocked by leaves, snow, ice or fan speed control to the highest
other obstructions. speed.
desired position. • To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
desired speed.
to the desired position, turn on the
5. If dehumidified heating is desired, air conditioning system, and adjust
turn the air conditioning system (if the temperature control to desired
equipped) on. temperature.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the or position.
4 128
Air conditioning system operation tips • Operating the air conditioning sys-
CAUTION • If the vehicle has been parked in tem in the recirculated air position
• When using the air condition- direct sunlight during hot weather, provides maximum cooling, how-
ing system, monitor the tem- open the windows for a short time ever, continual operation in this
perature gauge closely while to let the hot air inside the vehicle mode may cause the air inside the
driving up hills or in heavy traf- escape. vehicle to become stale.
fic when outside temperatures • To help reduce moisture inside of • During cooling operation, you may
are high. Air conditioning sys- the windows on rainy or humid occasionally notice a misty air flow
tem operation may cause days, decrease the humidity inside because of rapid cooling and
engine overheating. Continue the vehicle by operating the air humid air intake. This is a normal
to use the blower fan but turn conditioning system. system operation characteristic.
the air conditioning system off • If you operate air conditioner
if the temperature gauge indi- • During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally excessively, the difference between
cates engine overheating. the temperature of the outside air
notice a slight change in engine
• When opening the windows in speed as the air conditioning com- and that of the windshield could
humid weather air conditioning pressor cycles. This is a normal cause the outer surface of the
may create water droplets system operation characteristic. windshield to fog up, causing loss
inside the vehicle. Since exces- of visibility. In this case, set the
sive water droplets may cause • Use the air conditioning system
mode selection knob or button to
damage to electrical equip- every month only for a few minutes
the position and fan speed
ment, air conditioning should to ensure maximum system per-
control to the lower speed.
only be used with the windows formance.
closed. • When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This is a normal sys-
tem operation characteristic.
4 129
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING

• For maximum defrosting, set the Manual climate control system
WARNING - Windshield temperature control to the extreme
To defog inside windshield
heating right/hot position and the fan speed
Do not use the ( ) or ( ) control to the highest speed.
position during cooling opera- • If warm air to the floor is desired
tion in extremely humid weath- while defrosting or defogging, set the
er. The difference between the mode to the floor-defrost position.
temperature of the outside air • Before driving, clear all snow and
and the windshield could cause ice from the windshield, rear win-
the outer surface of the wind- dow, outside rear view mirrors, and
shield to fog up, causing loss of all side windows.
visibility.
• Clear all snow and ice from the
hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to
improve heater and defroster effi- OYDDCL2023
ciency and to reduce the probabili-
ty of fogging up the inside of the 1. Select any fan speed except "0"
windshield. position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the or position.
4. The outside (fresh) air will be
selected automatically.
If the outside (fresh) air position is
not selected automatically, press the
corresponding button manually.
4 130
To defrost outside windshield Automatic climate control To defrost outside windshield

system
To defog inside windshield
1. Set the fan speed to the highest 1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position. OYDDCL2025 position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme 1. Select desired fan speed. 2. Set the temperature to the
hot position. extreme hot (HI) position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the position. 3. Press the defroster button ( ).
3. Press the defroster button ( ).
4. The outside (fresh) air will be 4. The outside (fresh) air position will
selected automatically. 4. The outside (fresh) air position will be selected automatically.
be selected automatically.
If the position is selected, lower
If the outside (fresh) air position is fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan
not selected automatically, adjust the speed.
corresponding button manually.
If the position is selected, lower
fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan
speed.
4 131
Defogging Logic Manual climate control system Automatic climate control system
To reduce the probability of fogging
up inside of the windshield, the air
intake or air conditioning are con-
trolled automatically according to
certain conditions such as or
position. Logic can be disabled and
enabled by doing following :
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position. position.
2. Turn the mode selection knob to 2. Select the defroster position before
the defrost position ( ). pressing the defroster button ( ).
3. Push the air intake control button 3. While pressing the air conditioning
at least 5 times within 3 seconds. button (A/C), press the air intake
The indicator light in the air intake control button ( ) at least 5
control button will blink 3 times with times within 3 seconds.
0.5 second of interval. It indicates that The indicator on the air intake button
the defogging logic is canceled or blinks 3 times with 0.5 seconds of
returned to the programmed status. interval. It indicates that the defog-
ging logic is canceled or returned to
the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
4 132
If the battery has been discharged or Auto defogging system (Only for This indicator illuminates
disconnected, it resets to the defog automatic climate control system, when the auto defogging
logic status. if equipped) system senses the mois-
ture inside the windshield
and operates.
If more moisture is in the vehicle,

higher steps operate as follows. For
example, if auto defogging does not
defog inside the windshield at step 1
Outside air position, it tries to defog
again at step 2 Blowing air toward
the windshield.
OYDDCL2029 Step 1 : Outside air position

Auto defogging reduces the probabil- Step 2 : Blowing air toward the wind-
ity of fogging up the inside of the shield
windshield by automatically sensing Step 3 : Increasing air flow toward
the moisture inside the windshield. the windshield
The auto defogging system operates Step 4 : Operating the air conditioning
when the heater or air conditioning is
Step 5 : Maximizing the air condi-
on.
tioning
4 133
If your vehicle is equipped with the ✽ NOTICE

auto defogging system, it is automat- • When the air conditioning is
ically activated when the conditions turned on by Auto defogging sys-
are met. However, if you would like to tem, if you try to turn off the air
cancel the auto defogging system, conditioning, the indicator will
press the front defroster button 4 blink 3 times and the air condi-
times within 2 seconds while press- tioning will not be turned off.
ing the AUTO button. The indicator • For efficiency, do not select recir-
will blink 3 times to notify you that the culated air position while Auto
system is cancelled. To use the auto defogging system is operating.
defogging system again, follow the
procedures mentioned above.
If the battery has been disconnected CAUTION
or discharged, it resets to the auto Do not remove the sensor cover
defogging status. located on the upper end of the
driver side windshield glass.
Damage to the system parts
could occur and may not be cov-
ered by your vehicle warranty.
4 134
STORAGE COMPARTMENT
These compartments can be used to Center console storage Glove box
store small items. (if equipped)
To avoid possible theft, do not leave
valuables in the storage compartment.
Always keep the storage compart-
ment covers closed while driving.
WARNING - Flammable
materials
Do not store flammable/explo-
sive materials in the vehicle.
These items may catch fire OYDDCO2049
and/or explode if the vehicle is OYDDCO2048
exposed to hot temperatures for To open the glove box, push the but-
extended periods. To open the center console storage, ton (1) and the glove box will auto-
pull up the lever. matically open. Close the glove box
after use.
Always keep the glove box closed
while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING - Glove box

To reduce the risk of injury in an
accident or sudden stop, always
keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
4 135
Cool box (if equipped) ✽ NOTICE Sunglass holder

Do not put perishable food in the
cool box because it may not main-
tain the necessary consistent tem-
perature to keep the food fresh.
✽ NOTICE
If the temperature control knob is in
the warm or hot position, warm or
hot air will flow into the glove box.
You can keep beverage cans or other To open the sunglass holder, press
items cool in the glove box. the cover and the holder will slowly
1. Turn on the air conditioning. open. Place your sunglasses with the
2. Slide the open/close lever of the lenses facing out. To close the sun-
vent installed in the glove box to glass holder, push it up. Do not open
the open position. the sunglass holder while the vehicle
is moving. The rear view mirror of the
3. When the cool box is not used, slide vehicle can be blocked by an open
the lever to the closed position. sunglass holder.
If some items in the cool box block
the vent, the cooling effectiveness of
the coolbox is reduced.
4 136
WARNING - Sunglass
holder
Do not keep objects except sun-
glasses inside the sunglass
holder. Such objects can be
thrown from the holder in the
event of a sudden stop or an
accident, possibly injuring the
passengers in the vehicle.
4 137
INTERIOR FEATURES
Cigarette lighter (if equipped) • Do not hold the lighter in after it is Ashtray (if equipped)
already heated because it will
overheat.
• If the lighter does not pop out with-
in 30 seconds, remove it to prevent
overheating.
CAUTION - Cigarette
lighter
Do not insert accessories into
the cigarette lighter socket.
Doing so can damage the lighter
socket.
For the cigarette lighter to work, the To use the ashtray, open the cover.
ignition switch must be in the ACC or To clean or empty the ashtray, pull it
ON position. out.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it all
the way into its socket. When the ele-
ment is heated, the lighter will pop WARNING - Ashtray use
out to the "ready" position. Putting lit cigarettes or matches
If it is necessary to replace the ciga- in an ashtray with other com-
rette lighter, use only a genuine Kia bustible materials may cause a
replacement or its approved equiva- fire.
lent.
4 138
Cup holder ■ Front Sliding armrest (if equipped)
WARNING - Hot liquids

Do not place uncovered cups of
hot liquid in the cup holder
while the vehicle is in motion. If
the hot liquid spills, you may
burn yourself. Such a burn to
the driver could lead to loss of
control of the vehicle. OYDDCO2055
■ Rear (if equipped)
✽ NOTICE OYDECO2226CN
When cleaning spilled liquids, do To move forward

not dry the cup holder at high tem- Grab the front portion of the armrest
perature. This may damage the cup (1) then pull it forward
holder.
To move rearward
OYDDCO2056 Push the armrest rearward with your
Cups or small beverage cans may be palm.
placed in the cup holders.
4 139
Sunvisor Seat warmer (if equipped)

CAUTION - Vanity mirror
■ Front
lamp • Type A
Close the vanity mirror cover
securely and return the sunvi-
sor to its original position after
use. If the vanity mirror is not
closed securely, the lamp will
stay on and could result in bat-
tery discharge and possible
sunvisor damage. OYDDCO2057
■ Front
• Type B
OVG049174
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light

through the front or side windows.
To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use the sunvisor for the side win-
dow, pull it downward, unsnap it from
OYDDCO2058
the bracket (1) and swing it to the
■ Rear
side (2).
Adjust the sunvisor extension for-
ward or backward (3).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and slide the mirror cover (4).
The ticket holder (5) is provided for
holding a tollgate ticket (if equipped).
OYDDCO2059
4 140
The seat warmer is provided to warm • The seat warmer defaults to the
the front seats during cold weather. OFF position whenever the ignition WARNING - Seat warmer
With the ignition switch in the ON switch is turned on. burns
position, push either of the switches • With the seat warmer switch in the The seat warmer may cause
to warm the driver's seat or the front ON position, the heating system in burns even at low temperatures,
passenger's seat. the seat turns off or on automatically especially if used for long peri-
During mild weather or under condi- depending on the seat temperature. ods of time. The occupants
tions where the operation of the seat must be able to feel if the seat is
warmer is not needed, keep the becoming too warm and to turn
switches in the OFF position.
CAUTION - Seat damage the seat warmer off.
• When cleaning the seats, do In particular, the driver must
• Each time you push the button, the not use an organic solvent
temperature setting of the seat is exercise extreme care for the
such as thinner, benzene, following types of passengers:
changed as follows : alcohol and gasoline. Doing
- Front seat so may damage the surface of 1. Infants, children, elderly or
the heater or seats. disabled persons, or hospital
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( ) outpatients
• To prevent overheating the
→
seat warmer, do not place any- 2. Persons with sensitive skin

thing on the seats that insu- or those that burn easily
- Rear seat lates against heat, such as 3. Fatigued individuals
OFF → HIGH ( ) → LOW ( )
blankets, cushions or seat 4. Intoxicated individuals
covers while the seat warmer 5. Individuals taking medication
→
is in operation. that can cause drowsiness or

• Do not place heavy or sharp sleepiness (sleeping pills,
objects on seats equipped cold tablets, etc.)
with seat warmers. Damage to
the seat warming components
could occur.
4 141
Climate control seat The climate control seat defaults to

(Continued)
(if equipped) the OFF position whenever the igni-
tion switch is turned on. • When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
• Each time you push the button, the
such as paint thinner, ben-
airflow is changed as follows:
zene, alcohol and gasoline.
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( ) Doing so may damage the sur-
face of the seats.
→
• Do not spill liquid such as
water or beverages on the sur-
face of the front seats and
CAUTION seatbacks, or the air vent
• The climate control seat is a holes may be blocked and pre-
supplementary cooling/heat- vented from working properly.
OYDDCO2060 ing system. Use the climate
• Do not place materials such
control seat when the climate
The climate control seat is provided as plastic bags or newspapers
control system is on. Using the
to cool or warm the seat during hot or under the seats. The air vent
climate control seat for pro-
cold weather by blowing air through may not work properly as the
longed periods of time with the
small vent holes on the surface of the air intake can be blocked.
climate control system off
seat and seatback. While the engine could cause the climate con-
is running, push the rear portion of trol seat performance to impair.
the switch (blue color) to cool the When the air vent does not operate,
seat, and push the front portion of the (Continued) restart the vehicle. If there is no
switch (red color) to warm the seat. change, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized Kia dealer.
When the operation of the climate
control seat is not needed, keep the
switch in the OFF position.
4 142
Power outlet (if equipped) Use the power outlet only when the Close the cover when not in use.
engine is running and remove the Some electronic devices can cause
■ Type A
accessory plug after use. Using the electronic interference when plugged
accessory plug for prolonged periods into a vehicle’s power outlet. These
of time with the engine off could devices may cause excessive audio
cause the battery to discharge. static and malfunctions in other elec-
Only use 12V electric accessories tronic systems or devices used in
which are less than 15A in electric your vehicle.
capacity.
Adjust the air-conditioner or heater to
the lowest operating level when
WARNING - Electric shock
OYDECO2061CN using the power outlet. Do not put a finger or a foreign
■ Type B element (pin, etc.) into a power
outlet and do not touch with a
wet hand.You may get an electric
shock.
OYDECO2061CN-1
The power outlet is designed to pro-

vide power for mobile telephones or
other devices designed to operate
with vehicle electrical systems. The
devices should draw less than 12V,
10A with the engine running.
4 143
LCD monitor Whenever the battery terminals or • Display conversion:

(clock and outside temperature) related fuses are disconnected, you - Clock
must reset the time.
To change the 12 hour format to
When the ignition switch is in the the 24 hour format, press the "H"
ACC or ON position, the clock but- and "M" button at the same time for
tons operate as follows: more than 4 seconds.
For example, if the time is 10:15
• HOUR (1) : p.m., the display will change to
Pressing the 'H" button will advance 22:15.
the time display by one hour. - Outside thermometer
To change the temperature unit F
• MINUTE (2) : to C (or C to F) press the "H" and
"M" button at the same time for 1 to
OYDECO2062 Pressing the "M" button will advance 3 seconds.
the time display by one minute.
WARNING - Clock setting
distraction
Do not adjust the clock while
driving.You may lose your steer-
ing control and cause severe
personal injury or an accident.
4 144
Clothes hanger (if equipped) Floor mat anchor(s) The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat in the
vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehicle's
floor mat anchor(s) before driving
the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that can-
not be firmly attached to the vehi-
cle's floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top of
one another (e.g. ,all-weather rub-
OUN026348 ODMECO2034 ber mat on top of a carpeted floor
mat). Only a single floor mat should
To use the hanger, pull down the When using a floor mat on the floor be installed in each position.
upper portion of the hanger. carpet, make sure it attaches to the
floor mat anchor(s) in the front and IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was
rear floor carpet of your vehicle. This manufactured with driver's side floor
CAUTION - Hanging keeps the floor mat from sliding format anchors that are designed to
clothing ward. securely hold the floor mat in place.
Do not hang heavy clothes, To avoid any interference with pedal
since those may damage the operation, Kia recommends that only
WARNING - After market the Kia floor mat designed for use in
hook. floor mat your vehicle be installed.
Do not install aftermarket floor
mats that are not capable of
being securely attached to the
vehicle's floor mat anchors.
Unsecured floor mats can inter-
fere with pedal operation.
4 145
Navigation system (if equipped)

The navigation system identifies the
present position of our vehicle by
using GPS information and can help
guide you to a selected destination.
Detailed information for the naviga-
tion system is described in a sepa-
rately supplied manual.
4 146
AUDIO SYSTEM
✽ NOTICE Glass antenna (if equipped)
CAUTION
If you install an after market HID
head lamp, your vehicle’s audio and • Do not clean the inside of the
electronic device may malfunction. rear window glass with a
cleaner or use a scraper to
remove foreign deposits as
this may cause damage to the
antenna elements.
• Avoid adding metallic coat-
ings such as Ni, Cd, and so
on. These can disturb receiv-
ing AM and FM broadcast sig-
nals.
OYDEMM2001
When the radio power switch is

turned on while the ignition switch is
in either the “ON” or “ACC” position,
your car will receive both AM and FM
broadcast signals through the anten-
na in the rear window glass.
4 147
Steering wheel audio controls SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)

(if equipped) WARNING
The SEEK/PRESET button has dif-
■ Type A Driving while distracted can ferent functions based on the system
result in a loss of vehicle control mode. For the following functions the
that may lead to an accident, button should be pressed for 1 sec-
severe personal injury, and ond or more.
death. The driver's primary
responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and RADIO mode
use of any handheld devices, It will function as the AUTO SEEK
other equipment, or vehicle sys- select button.
tems which take the driver's
OYDDMM2002 eyes, attention and focus away CD/USB/iPod® mode
■ Type B from the safe operation of a vehi-
cle or which are not permissible It will function as the FF/REW button.
by law should never be used
during operation of the vehicle. If the SEEK/PRESET button is
pressed for less than 1 second, it will
work as follows in each mode.
Do not operate audio remote control
buttons simultaneously.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STA-
VOLUME ( / ) (1) TION buttons.
OYDDMM2003
• Press the lever upward ( ) to
The steering wheel may incorporate increase the volume.
audio control buttons. CD/USB/iPod® mode
• Press the lever downward ( ) to It will function as TRACK UP/DOWN
decrease the volume. button.
4 148
MODE (3) Aux, USB and iPod® * port ✽ NOTICE

Press the button to change audio When using a portable audio device
source. connected to the power outlet, noise
FM(1~2)➟ AM➟ SAT(1~3)➟ CD➟ USB may occur during playback. If this
AUX(iPod®)➟FM... happens, use the power source of the
In addition to mode change, Power portable audio device.
on/off can be made by pressing this * iPod® is a Registered trademark of Apple Inc.
button when the ignition switch is on
ACC or ON.
- Power ON: Press the button when
the audio is off
- Power OFF: Press the button for
OYDDMM2004
more than 1 second when the
audio is on. If your vehicle has an aux and/or
USB(universal serial bus) port or
MUTE (4, if equipped) iPod® port, you can use an aux port
to connect audio devices and an
• Press the button to mute the USB port to plug in an USB and also
sound. an iPod® port to plug in an iPod®.
• Press the button to turn off the
microphone during a telephone
call.
Detailed information for audio control

buttons are described in the following
pages in this chapter.
4 149
How vehicle audio works This can be due to factors, such as AM reception
the distance from the radio station,
FM reception closeness of other strong radio sta-
tions or the presence of buildings,
bridges or other large obstructions in
the area.
¢ ¢ ¢
¢ ¢¢ ¢ ¢¢
JBM002
JBM001
AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broad-
AM and FM radio signals are broadcasts. This is because AM radio
cast from transmitter towers located waves are transmitted at low fre-
around your city. They are intercept- quencies. These long distance,low
ed by the radio antenna on your vehi- frequency radio waves can follow the
cle. This signal is then processed by curvature of the earth rather than
the radio and sent to your vehicle travelling straight. In addition, they
speakers. curve around obstructions resulting
When a strong radio signal has in better signal coverage.
reached your vehicle, the precise
engineering of your audio system
ensures the best possible quality
reproduction. However, in some
cases the signal coming to your vehi-
cle may not be strong and clear.
4 150
FM radio station
¢ ¢¢
JBM003 JBM004 JBM005

FM broadcasts are transmitted at • Fading - As your vehicle moves • Station Swapping - As an FM sig-
high frequencies and do not bend to away from the radio station, the nal weakens, another more power-
follow the earth's surface. Because signal will weaken and sound will ful signal near the same frequency
of this, FM broadcasts generally begin to fade. When this occurs, may begin to play. This is because
begin to fade within short distances we suggest that you select another your radio is designed to lock onto
from the station. short distances from stronger station. the clearest signal. If this occurs,
the station. Also, FM signals are eas- • Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or select another station with a
ily affected by buildings, mountains, large obstructions between the stronger signal.
and obstructions. This can lead to transmitter and your radio can dis- • Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio
undesirable or unpleasant listening turb the signal causing static or signals being received from sever-
conditions which might lead you to fluttering noises to occur. Reducing al directions can cause distortion
believe a problem exists with your the treble level may lessen this or fluttering. This can be caused by
radio. The following conditions are effect until the disturbance clears. a direct and reflected signal from
normal and do not indicate radio the same station, or by signals
trouble: from two stations with close fre-
quencies. If this occurs, select
another station until the condition
has passed.
4 151
Using a cellular phone or a two- Caring for disc

way radio WARNING - Cell Phone
Use • If the temperature inside the car is
When a cellular phone is used inside too high, open the car windows to
the vehicle, noise may be produced Do not use a cellular phone ventilate before using the system.
from the audio system. This does not while driving. Stop at a safe
location to use a cellular phone. • It is illegal to copy and use
mean that something is wrong with MP3/WMA files without permis-
the audio equipment. In such a case, sion. Use CDs that are created
try to operate mobile devices as far only by lawful means.
from the audio equipment as possible.
• Do not apply volatile agents, such
When using a communication sys- as benzene and thinner, normal
tem such as a cellular phone or a cleaners and magnetic sprays
radio set inside the vehicle, a sepa- made for analogue disc onto CDs.
rate external antenna must be fitted.
When a cellular phone or a radio set • To prevent the disc surface from
is used with an internal antenna getting damaged, hold CDs by the
alone, it may interfere with the vehi- edges or the center hole only.
cle's electrical system and adversely • Clean the disc surface with a piece
affect safe operation of the vehicle. of soft cloth before playback (wipe
it from the center to the outside
edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or
paper.
• Make certain only CDs are insert-
ed into the CD player (Do not insert
more than one CD at a time).
• Keep CDs in their cases after use
to protect them from scratches or
dirt.
4 152
• Depending on the type of CD- NOTE:

R/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs may Order of playing files (folders) :
not operate normally according to
the manufacturing companies. In 1. Song playing order : to
such circumstances, continued sequentially.
use may cause malfunctions to 2. Folder playing order :
your audio system. ❋ If no song file is contained in the
folder, that folder is not displayed.
✽ NOTICE
- Playing an Incompatible
Copy Protected Audio
CD
Some copy protected CDs, which do
not comply with international audio
CD standards (Red Book), may not
play on your car audio. Please note
that inabilities to properly play a
copy protected CD may indicate
that the CD is defective, not the CD
player.
4 153
WARNING - Driver WARNING - Audio WARNING - Antenna

Distraction System Do not touch the antenna dur-
• Do not stare at the screen • Do not disassemble, assem- ing thunder or lightening as
while driving. Staring at the ble, or modify the audio sys- such acts may lead to lightning
screen for prolonged periods tem. Such acts could result in induced electric shock.
of time could lead to traffic accidents, fire, or electric
accidents. shock.
• Using the phone while driving • Heed caution not to spill water CAUTION
may lead to a lack of attention or introduce foreign objects Refrain from use if the screen is
of traffic conditions and into the device. Such acts blank or no sound can be heard
increase the likelihood of could lead to smoke, fire, or as these signs may indicate a
accidents. Use the phone fea- product malfunction. product malfunction.
ture after parking the vehicle.
4 154
• Adjust the volume to levels that

CAUTION - LCD Monitor (Continued)
allow the driver to hear sounds
from outside of the vehicle. Driving Do not subject the device to • Prevent caustic solutions such
in a state where external sounds severe shock or impact. Direct as perfume and cosmetic oil
cannot be heard may lead to acci- pressure onto the front side of from contacting the dashboard
dents. the monitor may cause damage because they may cause dam-
to the LCD or touch screen. age or discoloration.
• Pay attention to the volume setting
when turning the device on. A sud- • Placing the audio system
den output of extreme volume within an electromagnetic
upon turning the device on could CAUTION - Device environment may result in
lead to hearing impairment. (Adjust cleaning noise interference.
the volume to a suitable levels • When cleaning the device,
before turning off the device.) make sure to turn off the
• If you want to change the position device and use a dry and
✽ NOTICE
of device installation, please smooth cloth. In case of product malfunction,
inquire with your place of purchase • Never use tough materials, please contact your place of pur-
or service maintenance center. chemical cloths, or solvents chase or After Service center.
Technical expertise is required to (alcohol, benzene, thinners,
install or disassemble the device. etc.) as such materials may
• Turn on the car ignition before damage the device panel or
using this device. Do not operate cause color/quality deteriora-
the audio system for long periods tion.
of time with the ignition turned off (Continued)
as such operations may lead to
battery discharge.
4 155
USING THE USB DEVICE (Continued) (Continued)

• To use an external USB device, • An encrypted MP3 PLAYER is • You may hear a strange noise
make sure the device is not con- not recognizable. when connecting or disconnect-
nected when starting up the • Depending on the condition of ing a USB device.
vehicle. Connect the device after the external USB device, the • If you disconnect the external
starting up. connected external USB device USB device during playback in
• If you start the engine when the can be unrecognizable. USB mode, the external USB
USB device is connected, it may • When the formatted byte/sector device can be damaged or may
damage the USB device. (USB setting of External USB device is malfunction. Therefore, discon-
flashdrives are very sensitive to not either 512BYTE or nect the external USB device
electric shock.) 2048BYTE, then the device will when the audio is turned off or in
not be recognized. another mode. (e.g, Radio, CD)
• If the engine is started up or
turned off while the external USB • Use only a USB device format- • Depending on the type and
device is connected, the external ted to FAT 12/16/32. capacity of the external USB
USB device may not work. device or the type of the files
• USB devices without USB I/F stored in the device, there is a
• The System may not play unau- authentication may not be recog- difference in the time taken for
thenticated MP3 or WMA files. nizable. recognition of the device.
1) It can only play MP3 files with • Make sure the USB connection • Do not use the USB device for
the compression rate between terminal does not come in con- purposes other than playing
8Kbps ~ 320Kbps. tact with the human body or music files.
2) It can only play WMA music other objects.
• Playing videos through the USB
files with the compression rate • If you repeatedly connect or dis- is not supported.
between 8Kbps ~ 320Kbps. connect the USB device in a
short period of time, it may break • Use of USB accessories such as
• Take precautions for static elec-
the device. rechargers or heaters using USB
tricity when connecting or discon-
I/F may lower performance or
necting the external USB device. (Continued) cause trouble.
(Continued)
(Continued)
4 156
(Continued) (Continued) USING THE iPod® DEVICE

• If you use devices such as a USB • Some USB flash memory read-
hub purchased separately, the • Some iPod® models may not
ers (such as CF, SD, micro SD, support communication protocol
vehicle’s audio system may not etc.) or external-HDD type
recognize the USB device. In that and files may not properly play.
devices can be unrecognizable. Supported iPod® models:
case, connect the USB device
directly to the multimedia terminal • Music files protected by DRM - iPhone® 3GS/4
of the vehicle. (DIGITAL RIGHTS MANAGE-
MENT) are not recognizable. - iPod® touch 1st~4th generation
• If the USB device is divided by log- - iPod® nano 1st~6th generation
ical drives, only the music files on • The data in the USB memory
the highest-priority drive are rec- may be lost while using this - iPod® classic
ognized by car audio. audio. Always back up important • The order of search or playback
data on a personal storage of songs in the iPod® can be dif-
• Devices such as MP3 Player/ device.
Cellular phone/Digital camera can ferent from the order searched in
be unrecognizable by standard • Please avoid using the audio system.
USB I/F can be unrecognizable. USB memory prod- • If the iPod® is disabled due to its
ucts which can be own malfunction, reset the
• Charging through the USB may used as key chains or
not be supported in some mobile iPod®. (Reset: Refer to iPod®
cellular phone acces- manual)
devices. sories as they could cause dam-
• USB HDD or USB types liable to age to the USB jack. Please • An iPod® may not operate nor-
connection failures due to vehicle make certain only to use plug mally on low battery.
vibrations are not supported. type connector products. (Continued)
(i-stick type)
• Some non-standard USB devices
(METAL COVER TYPE USB) can
be unrecognizable.
(Continued)
4 157
(Continued) (Continued) Bluetooth® Wireless

Technology
• Some iPod® devices, such as the • When connecting iPod® with the
iPhone, can be connected iPod® Power Cable, insert the
through the Bluetooth® Wireless connector to the multimedia Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Technology interface. The device socket completely. If not inserted The Bluetooth® word mark and logos
must have audio Bluetooth® completely, communications are registered trademarks owned by
Wireless Technology capability between iPod® and audio may Bluetooth SIG, lnc. and any use of
(such as for stereo headphone be interrupted. such marks by Kia is under license.
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology). • When adjusting the sound A Bluetooth® enabled call phone is
The device can play, but it will not effects of the iPod® and the required to use Bluetooth® wireless
be controlled by the audio system. audio system, the sound effects technology.
• To use iPod® features within the of both devices will overlap and
audio, use the cable provided might reduce or distort the qual-
upon purchasing an iPod® ity of the sound. WARNING
device. • Deactivate (turn off) the equaliz- Driving while distracted can
• Skipping or improper operation er function of an iPod® when result in a loss of vehicle control
may occur depending on the char- adjusting the audio system’s vol- that may lead to an accident,
acteristics of your iPod®/Phone ume, and turn off the equalizer severe personal injury, and
device. of the audio system when using death. The driver’s primary
the equalizer of an iPod®. responsibility is in the safe and
• If your iPhone is connected to legal operation of a vehicle, and
both the Bluetooth® Wireless • When not using iPod® with car
audio, detach the iPod® cable use of any handheld devices,
Technology and USB, the sound other equipment, or vehicle sys-
may not be properly played. In from iPod®. Otherwise, iPod®
may remain in accessory mode, tems which take the driver’s
your iPhone, select the Dock con- eyes, attention and focus away
nector or Bluetooth® Wireless and may not work properly.
from the safe operation of a vehi-
Technology to change the sound cle or which are not permissible
output (source). by law should never be used dur-
(Continued) ing operation of the vehicle.
4 158
Before Using the Bluetooth® Precautions for Safe Driving When connecting a Bluetooth®
Handsfree Phone
• Bluetooth® Handsfree is a feature
What is Bluetooth® ? that enables drivers to practice • Before connecting the head unit
safe driving. Connecting the head with the mobile phone, check to
• Bluetooth® refers to a short-dis- see that the mobile phone sup-
tance wireless networking technol- unit with a Bluetooth® phone allows
the user to conveniently make and ports Bluetooth® features.
ogy which uses a 2.4GHz
~2.48GHz frequency to connect receive calls and use contacts. • Even if the phone supports
various devices within a certain Before using Bluetooth®, carefully Bluetooth®, the phone will not be
distance. read the contents of this user’s found during device searches if
manual. the phone has been set to hidden
• Supported within PCs, external state or the Bluetooth® power is
devices, Bluetooth® phones, PDAs, • Excessive use or operations while
driving may lead to negligent driv- turned off. Disable the hidden
various electronic devices, and state or turn on the Bluetooth®
automotive environments, ing practices and result in acci-
dents. Refrain from excessive power prior to searching/con-
Bluetooth® allows data to be trans- necting with the Head unit.
mitted at high speeds without hav- operations while driving.
ing to use a connector cable. • Viewing the screen for prolonged • Bluetooth phone is automatically
periods of time is dangerous and connected when the ignition on.
• Bluetooth® Handsfree refers to a
device which allows the user to may lead to accidents. When driv- • If you do not want automatic con-
conveniently make phone calls with ing, view the screen only for short nection with your Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® mobile phones through periods of time. device, turn off the Bluetooth®
the AV/Navigation system. feature within your mobile phone.
• Bluetooth® Handsfree may not be • The Handsfree call volume and
supported in some mobile phones. quality may differ depending on
To learn more about mobile device the mobile phone.
compatibility, visit (Continued)
http://www.kia.com/us/en/con-
tent/owners/bluetooth.
4 159
(Continued) Voice Recognition (Continued)

• Park the vehicle when connect- - When driving on rugged and
ing the head unit with the mobile • When using the voice recognition uneven roads
phone. feature, only commands listed - During severe rain (heavy rains,
• Bluetooth® connection may within the user's manual are sup- windstorms)
become intermittently discon- ported. • Phone related voice commands
nected in some mobile phones. • Be aware that during the operation can be used only when a
Follow these steps to try again. of the voice recognition system, Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
1. Within the mobile phone, turn pressing any key other than the device is connected.
the Bluetooth® function off/on key terminate voice recogni- • When making calls by stating a
and try again. tion mode. name, the corresponding contact
2. Turn the mobile phone power • For superior voice recognition per- must be downloaded and stored
Off/On and try again. formance, position the microphone within the audio system.
3. Completely remove the mobile used for voice recognition above • After downloading the Bluetooth®
phone battery, reboot, and then the head of the driver’s seat and Wireless Technology phone book,
again. maintain a proper position when it takes some times to convert the
4. Reboot the Audio Video saying commands. phone book data into voice infor-
Navigation System and try • Within the following situations, mation. During this time, voice
again. voice recognition may not function recognition may not properly oper-
properly due to external sound. ate.
5. Delete all paired devices, pair
and try again. - When the windows and sunroof • Pronounce the voice commands
are open naturally and clearly as if in a nor-
• Handsfree call quality and volume mal conversation.
may differ depending on the model - When the wind of the cooling /
of your mobile phone. heating device is strong
- When entering and passing
through tunnels
(Continued)
4 160
The Bluetooth and Voice Recognition Manual is provided in two versions due to software version differences.
Before reading the manual, check the following.
Press the key in FM Radio screen.

1. If you can find “FM <89.1>”on the screen,
(Go to 4-162 page)
2. If you can find “FM <87.5~107.9>”on the screen,

(Go to 4-207 page)
4 161
■ CD Player
❋ No logo will be shown if the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology feature is not supported.
4 162
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS (2) RADIO (4) PHONE

AND FUNCTIONS Changes to FM/AM/SiriusXM mode. Operates Phone Screen
Each time the key is pressed, the ❈ When a phone is not connected,
❈ Display and settings may differ mode is changed in order of FM1 ➟ the connection screen is dis-
depending on the selected audio. FM2 ➟ AM ➟ SAT1 ➟ SAT2 ➟ SAT3. played.
❈ In Setup>Display, the radio pop up
screen will be displayed when SEEK
(5) TRACK
Audio Head Unit [Mode Pop up] is turned On .
Radio Mode : Automatically search-
When the pop up screen is dis- es for broadcast frequencies.
played, use the TUNE knob or
keys 1 ~ 6 to select the CD, USB, iPod®, My Music modes
desired mode. - Shortly press the key (less than 1
second): Moves to next or previous
song (file)
(3) MEDIA
- Press and hold the key (more than
Changes to CD, USB(iPod®), AUX, 1 second): Rewinds or fast-for-
My Music, BT Audio mode. wards the current song.
Each time the key is pressed, the BT Audio mode : Moves to next or
mode is changed in order of CD, previous song(file)
USB(iPod®), AUX, My Music, BT
Audio. ❈ The Play/Pause feature may oper-
ate differently depending on the
❈ In Setup>Display, the media pop mobile phone.
up screen will be displayed when
(1) (EJECT) [Mode Pop up] is turned On .
Ejects the disc. When the pop up screen is dis- (6) PWR/VOL knob
played, use the TUNE knob or Power : Turns power On/Off by
keys 1 ~ 5 to select the pressing the knob
desired mode. Volume : Sets volume by turning
the knob left/right
4 163
(8) SCAN (10) MENU

Radio Mode Displays menus for the current mode.
- Shortly press the key : Previews ❈ iPod® List : Move to parent category
each broadcast for 5 seconds
each. CAT
(11) FOLDER
1 second): Previews the broad- Radio Mode
casts saved in Preset 1 ~ 6 - SiriusXM RADIO : Category Search
for 5 seconds each. MP3 CD, USB mode : Folder Search
❈Press the SCAN key again to
continue listening to the current (12) TUNE knob
frequency.
Radio mode : Changes frequency by
❈SAT Radio does not support the turning the knob left/right.
(7) DISP Preset scan feature.
CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode:
Each time the button is shortly CD, USB, My Music mode Searches songs (files) by turning the
pressed (less than 1 second), it sets - Shortly press the key (less than 1 knob left/right.
the screen Off ➟ Screen On ➟ second): Previews each song (file) ❈When the desired song is dis-
Screen Off for 10 seconds each. played, press the knob to play the
❈ Audio operation is maintained and ❈Press the SCAN key again to song.
only the screen will be turned Off. continue listening to the current Moves focus in all selection menus
In the screen Off state, press any song (file). and selects menus.
key to turn the screen On again.
(9) SETUP
Moves to the Display, Sound, Phone,
System setting modes.
4 164
(13) 1 ~ 6 (Preset)
Radio Mode: Saves frequencies
(channels) or receives saved fre-
quencies (channels)
CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode
- 1 : Repeat
- 2 : Random
In the Radio, Media, Setup, and
Menu pop up screen, the number
menu is selected.
(14) FM/AM
Changes to FM/AM mode.
Each time the key is pressed, the
mode is changed in order of FM1 ➟
FM2 ➟ AM.
(15) SAT
Changes to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
mode.
mode is changed in order of SAT1 ➟
SAT2 ➟ SAT3.
4 165
SETUP Mode Pop up

[Mode Pop up] Changes On / Off
selection mode
Display Settings • During On state, press the RADIO
or MEDIA key to display the mode
Press the SETUP key Select [Display] change pop up screen.
through TUNE knob or 1 key
Select menu through TUNE knob Media Display
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’
or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.
4 166
SOUND SETTINGS
Press the SETUP key Select [Sound]

Select menu through TUNE knob
Speed Dependent Volume Control

This feature is used to automatically
control the volume level according to
the speed of the vehicle.
Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set
[Off/On] of TUNE knob
Tone Position
This menu allows you to set the This menu allows you to set the
Bass, Middle, Treble. Voice Recognition Volume
Fader, Balance.
Adjusts voice recognition volume.
Select [Tone] Select menu through Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Set
Select [Position] Select menu volume of TUNE knob
TUNE knob Turn TUNE knob through TUNE knob Turn
left/right to set TUNE knob left/right to set
• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the • Fader, Balance : Selects the sound
sound tone. fader and balance.
• Default : Restores default settings. • Default : Restores default settings.
❈Return : While adjusting values, ❈Return : While adjusting values,
pressing the TUNE knob will pressing the TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu. restore the parent menu.
4 167
SYSTEM SETTINGS Memory Information • Off : This mode is for expert users
Displays currently used memory and and omits some information during
total system memory. voice command operation. (When
Press the SETUP key Select using Expert mode, guidance
[System] Select menu through Select [Memory Information] OK instructions can be heard through
TUNE knob The currently used memory is dis- the [Help] or [Menu] commands.
played on the left side while the total
system memory is displayed on the
right side. Language
This menu is used to set the display
and voice recognition language.
Select [Language] Set through
TUNE knob
Prompt Feedback
This feature is used to change voice
command feedback between Normal ❈The system will reboot after the
and Expert modes. language is changed.
Select [Prompt Feedback] Set ❈Language support by region
through TUNE knob - English, Francais, Espanol
• On : This mode is for beginner
users and provides detailed
instructions during voice command
operation.
4 168
RADIO : FM, AM or SiriusXM Preset SEEK Selecting through manual

Press the 1 ~ 6 key search
• Shortly pressing the key (less than Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
1 second): Plays the frequency adjust the frequency.
saved in the corresponding key.
• Pressing and holding the key (more
than 1 second): Pressing and hold-
ing the desired key from 1 ~
6 will save the currently playing
broadcast to the selected key and
SEEK sound a BEEP.
SEEK
Press the TRACK key
• Shortly pressing the key (less than SCAN
1 second): Automatically searches
Press the SCAN key
for the next station.
• Shortly pressing the key (less than
1 second): The broadcast frequen-
than 1 second): While holding the
cy increases and previews each
key, frequency changes without
broadcast for 5 seconds each. After
stopping. When the key is released,
scanning all frequencies, returns
automatically searches for the next
and plays the current broadcast fre-
frequency from that point.
quency.
than 1 second): Previews the
broadcasts saved in Preset 1 ~
6 for 5 seconds each.
4 169
MENU
Within MENU key are the A.Store
(Auto Store) and Info functions.
A.Store
Press the MENU key Set [A.Store]
through TUNE knob or 1 key.
Saves broadcasts with superior
reception to 1 ~ 6 keys. If no
frequencies are received, then the
most recently received frequency will
be broadcast.
4 170
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio up and keep luggage and other For information on extended sub-
material as far away from the anten- scription terms, contact SiriusXM at
information na as possible. 1-888-539-7474.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall build-
ings, bridges, tunnels, freeway over- NOTE:
Satellite Radio channels: passes, parking garages, dense tree
Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a foliage and thunderstorms can inter- SiriusXM services require a sub-
3-month trial subscription to the Sirius fere with your reception. scription sold separately, or as a
Select package. You'll get over 140 package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If
channels, including commercial-free you decide to continue service after
music, plus all your favorite sports, SiriusXM Satellite Radio serv- your trial, the subscription plan you
exclusive talk, entertainment, and a ice: choose will automatically renew
selection of premium programming. SiriusXM is a subscription-based thereafter and you will be charged
For more information and a complete satellite radio service that broadcasts according to your chosen payment
list of SiriusXM channels, visit sir- music, sports, news and entertain-
iusxm.com in the United States, sir- ment programming to radio receivers, method at then-current rates. Fees
iusxm.cain Canada, or call SiriusXM which are available for installation in and taxes apply. To cancel you must
at 1-888-539-7474. motor vehicles or factory installed, as call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349. See
well as for the home, portable and SiriusXM Customer Agreement for
wireless devices, and through an complete terms at www.siriusxm
Satellite Radio reception factors: Internet connection on personal com- .com SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data
To receive the satellite signal, your vehi- puter. Vehicles that are equipped with services are available only in the 48
cle has been equipped with a satellite a factory installed SiriusXM Satellite
Radio system include: contiguous USA, DC and PR \ satel-
radio antenna located on the roof of lite service is also available in
your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides • Hardware and an introductory trial
subscription term, which begins on Canada; see www.sir-iusxm.ca. All
the best location for an unobstructed, fees and programming subject to
open view of the sky, a requirement of the date of sale or lease of the vehi-
a satellite radio system. Like AM/FM, cle. change. Sirius, XM and all related
there are several factors that can affect • For a small upgrade fee, access to marks and logos are trademarks of
satellite radio reception performance: SiriusXM music channels, and other Sirius XM Radio Inc.
select channels over the Internet
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal using any computer connected to
reception performance, keep the the Internet (U.S. customers only).
antenna clear of snow and ice build-
4 171
SiriusXM RADIO Please note that the vehicle will need SCAN
to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and
Press the RADIO key SCAN
have an unobstructed view of the sky
Using SiriusXM Satellite Radio in order for the radio to receive the • Shortly pressing the key (less than
activation signal. 1 second): Previews each broad-
Your Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3- cast for 5 seconds each.
month trial subscription to SiriusXM
so you have access to over 140 ❈ Press the SCAN key again to
SEEK continue listening to the current
channels of music, information, and SEEK
Press the RADIO key TRACK frequency.
entertainment programming.
• Shortly pressing the key (less than ❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,
1 second): select previous or next channels are changed within the
channel. current category.
• Pressing and holding the key
(more than 1 second): continuous- Category
ly move to previous or next chan- CAT
nel. Press the FOLDER key Set through
the TUNE knob
Activation ❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the • The display will indicate the catego-
In order to extend or reactivate your current category. ry menus, highlight the category
Sirius Select subscription, you will that the current channel belongs to.
need to contact SiriusXM Customer • In the Category List Mode, press
Care at 1-800-643-2112. Have your CAT
the FOLDER key to navigate cate-
12-digit RID (Radio Identification gory list.
Number) / ESN (Electronic Serial
Number) ready. To retrieve the RID / • Press the tune knob to select the
ESN, turn on the radio, press the lowest channel in the highlighted
RADIO button, and tune to channel
category.
zero. ❈ If channel is selected by selecting
category, then the “CATEGORY”
icon is displayed at the top of the
screen.
4 172
Preset Tune
Press the RADIO key 1 ~ 6 • Rotate TUNE knob : Changes
• Shortly pressing the key (less than the channel number or scrolls cat-
1 second): Plays the frequency egory list.
saved in the corresponding key. • Press TUNE knob : Selects the
• Pressing and holding the key menu.
(more than 1 second): Pressing
and holding the desired key from Menu
1 ~ 6 will save the current
broadcast to the selected key and Select category menu through the
sound a BEEP. TUNE knob Press the MENU
key Select [ Info] through the
✽ Troubleshooting TUNE knob or 1 key
1. Antenna Error
If this message is displayed, the Info (Information)
antenna or antenna cable is bro-
ken or unplugged. Please consult Displays the Artist/Song info of the
with your Kia dealership. current song.
2. No Signal
If this message is displayed, it
means that the antenna is covered
and that the SiriusXM Satellite
Radio signal is not available.
Ensure the antenna is uncovered
and has a clear view of the sky.
4 173
BASIC METHOD OF USE : Repeat

Audio CD / MP3 CD / USB / While song (file) is playing 1 RPT
(RPT) key
iPod® / My Music
Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod®, My
Music mode: RPT on screen
Press the MEDIA key to change the • To repeat one song (press the key)
<USB>
mode in order of CD ➟ USB(iPod®) ➟ : Repeats the current song.
AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio. MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT on
The folder/file name is displayed on screen
the screen. • To repeat folder (pressing twice):
repeats all files within the current
folder.
<My Music> ❈ Press the 1 RPT key again to turn
off repeat.
❈The CD is automatically played
when a CD is inserted. Random
<Audio CD>
❈The USB music is automatically While song (file) is playing 2 RDM
played when a USB is connected. (RDM) key
Audio CD, My Music mode: RDM on
screen
• Random (press the key) : Plays all
songs in random order.
<MP3 CD>
4 174
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on While song (file) is playing SEEK Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB
TRACK
screen key Mode
• Folder Random (press the key) : CAT
• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the While file is playing FOLDER
Plays all files within the current fold- next song. (Folder Up) key
er in random order. • Pressing and holding the key (more • Searches the next folder.
iPod® mode: ALL RDM on screen than 1 second): Fast forwards the CAT
song. While file is playing FOLDER
• All Random (press the key) : Plays (Folder Down) key
all files in random order.
• Searches the parent folder.
MP3 CD, USB : ALL RDM on screen Scan
❈ If a folder is selected by pressing
• All Random (pressing twice): Plays While song (file) is playing SCAN the TUNE knob, the first file
all files in random order. key within the selected folder will be
❈ Press the 2 RDM key again to turn • Shortly pressing the key : Scans all played.
off repeat. songs from the next song for 10 ❈In iPod® mode, moves to the Parent
seconds each. Folder.
Changing Song/File ❈ Press the SCAN key again to turn
off.
While song (file) is playing Searching Songs (File)
SEEK key ❈ The SCAN function is not support-
TRACK ed in iPod® mode. • Turning TUNE knob : Searches
• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the for songs (files).
current song from the beginning. • Pressing TUNE knob : Plays
SEEK
❈If the TRACK key is pressed selected song (file).
again within 2 second, the previous
song is played.
than 1 second): Rewinds the song.
4 175
MENU : Audio CD Information MENU : MP3 CD / USB

Press the Audio CD mode MENU Press the MENU key Set [ Info] Press the MP3 CD/USB mode
key to set the Repeat, Random, through the TUNE knob or 3 MENU key to set the Repeat, Folder
Information features. key to display information of the cur- Random, Folder Repeat, All
rent song. Random, Information, and Copy fea-
❈ Press the MENU key to turn off tures.
info display.
Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
through the TUNE knob or 1 RPT
Repeat
key to repeat the current song. Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
❈ Press RPT again to turn off. through the TUNE knob or 1 RPT
key to repeat the current song.
❈ Press RPT again to turn off.
Random
Press the MENU key Set [ RDM]
through the TUNE knob or 2 RDM
key to randomly play songs within
the current CD.
❈ Press RDM again to turn off.
4 176
Folder Random Information Copy

Press the MENU key Set [ F.RDM] Press the MENU key Set [ Info] Press the MENU key Set [ Copy]
through the TUNE knob or 2 RDM through the TUNE knob or 5 through the TUNE knob or 6
key to randomly play songs within the key to display information of the cur- key.
rent song. This is used to copy the current song
current folder.
❈ Press the MENU key to turn off into My Music. You can play the
❈ Press F.RDM again to turn off. info display. copied Music in My Music mode.
❈If another key is pressed while
Folder Repeat copying is in progress, a pop up
Press the MENU key Set [ F.RPT] asking you whether to cancel copy-
through the TUNE knob or 3 ing is displayed.
key to repeat songs within the cur- ❈If another media is connected or
rent folder. inserted (USB, CD, iPod®, AUX)
❈ Press F.RPT again to turn off. while copying is in progress, copy-
ing is canceled.
All Random ❈Music will not be played while
copying is in progress.
Press the MENU key Set [ A.RDM]
through the TUNE knob or 4 key
to randomly play all songs within the
CD/USB.
❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off.
4 177
MENU : iPod® Information

In iPod mode, press the
® MENU key Press the MENU key Set [ Info]
to set the Repeat, Random, through the TUNE knob or 3
Information and Search features. key.
Displays information of the current
song.
❈ Press the MENU key to turn off
info display.
Search
Press the MENU key Set [ Search]
Repeat through the TUNE knob or 4
key.
through the TUNE knob or 1 RPT Displays iPod® category list.
key to repeat the current song. ❈Searching iPod® category is
MENU key pressed, move to par-
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
ent category.
Random
through the TUNE knob or 2
key.
Plays all songs within the currently
playing category in random order.
4 178
MENU : My Music Mode Information ➀ Select the file you wish to delete
Press the MENU key Set [ Info] by using the TUNE knob.
through the TUNE knob or 3 ➁ Press the MENU key and select
In My Music mode, press the MENU the delete menu to delete the
key to set the Repeat, Random, key.
Displays information of the current selected file.
Information, Delete, Delete All, and
Delete Selection features. song.
❈ Press the MENU key to turn off Delete All
info display. Press the MENU key Set [ Del.All]
through the TUNE knob or 5 key.
Delete Deletes all songs of My Music.
Press the MENU key Set [ Delete]
through the TUNE knob or 4 Delete Selection
key.
Repeat Press the MENU key Set [ Del.Sel]
Deletes currently playing file
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT] through the TUNE knob or 6
through the TUNE knob or 1 RPT In the play screen, pressing delete key.
key. will delete the currently playing song.
Songs within My Music are selected
Repeats the currently playing song. Deletes file from list and deleted.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off. ➀Select the songs you wish to delete
from the list.
Random
key.
Plays all songs in random order.
❈ Press RDM again to turn random off.
4 179
➁ After selecting, press MENU key AUX

and select the delete menu. AUX is used to play external MEDIA
currently connected with the AUX
terminal.
AUX mode will automatically start
when an external device is connect-
ed with the AUX terminal.
If an external device is connected,
you can also press the MEDIA key to
change to AUX mode.
My Music
• Even if memory is available, a
maximum of 6,000 songs can be
stored.
• The same song can be copied up
to 1,000 times.
• Memory info can be checked in the
System menu of Setup. ❈AUX mode cannot be started
unless there is an external device
connected to the AUX terminal.
AUX
Fully insert the AUX cable into the
AUX terminal for use.
4 180
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology • The Bluetooth® word mark and • Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
AUDIO logos are registered trademarks audio can be used only when the
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and [Audio Streaming] of Phone is
any use of such marks by Kia is turned On .
What is Bluetooth® Wireless under license. Other trademarks
Technology? and trade names are those of their
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology respective owners. A Bluetooth®
allows devices to be connected in a enabled cell phone is required to
short distance, including hands-free use Bluetooth® Wireless
devices, stereo headsets, wireless Technology.
remote controllers, etc. For more
information, visit the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology website at WARNING
www.Bluetooth.com. Driving while distracted can
result in a loss of vehicle control
that may lead to an accident,
Before using Bluetooth® Wireless severe personal injury, and
Technology audio features death. The driver’s primary
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology responsibility is in the safe and
audio may not be supported legal operation of a vehicle, and
depending on the compatibility of use of any handheld devices,
your Bluetooth® Wireless other equipment, or vehicle sys-
Technology mobile phone. tems which take the driver’s
• In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless eyes, attention and focus away
Technology audio, you must first from the safe operation of a vehi-
pair and connect the Bluetooth® cle or which are not permissible
Wireless Technology mobile by law should never be used dur-
phone. ing operation of the vehicle.
4 181
Starting Bluetooth® Wireless Using the Bluetooth® Wireless

Technology Audio Technology audio features
• Press the MEDIA key to change the • Play / Stop
mode in order of CD ➟ USB ➟ AUX Press the TUNE knob to play and
➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio. pause the current song.
• If BT Audio is selected, Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology audio will start
playing.
❈ Audio may not automatically start
playing in some mobile phones.
❈ The title / artist info may not be

supported in some mobile phone.
When it is not supported, no
title/no artist will be displayed.
• Previous / Next song
SEEK SEEK
Press TRACK or TRACK to play
previous or next song.
❈ The previous song / next song /
play / pause functions may not be
supported in some mobile
phones.
4 182
PHONE Making a call using the • Check call history and making call
Steering-wheel mount controls - Shortly press (less than 1 second)
Before using the Bluetooth® Wireless the key on the steering
Technology phone features remote controller.
• In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless - The call history list will be dis-
Technology phone, you must first played on the screen.
pair and connect the Bluetooth® - Press the key again to con-
Wireless Technology mobile phone. nect a call to the selected number.
• If the mobile phone is not paired or
connected, it is not possible to • Redialing the most recently called
enter Phone mode. Once a phone number
is paired or connected, the guid-
ance screen will be displayed. - Press and hold (more than 1 sec-
ond) the key on the steering
• If Priority is set upon vehicle igni- remote controller.
tion (IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth® (1) MUTE key : Mutes the micro-
Wireless Technology phone will be - The most recently called number is
phone during a call.
automatically connected. Even if redialed.
(2) VOLUME key : Raises or lowers
you are outside, the Bluetooth® speaker volume.
Wireless Technology phone will be ❈ If call history does not exist, a
automatically connected once you (3) key : Activates voice recogni- screen asking whether to down-
are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If tion. load call history is displayed. (The
you do not want automatic (4) key : Places and transfers download feature may not be sup-
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology calls. ported in some mobile phones)
phone connection, set the
(5) key : Ends calls or cancels
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
power to OFF. functions.
4 183

WARNING
Pairing a Bluetooth® Wireless Driving while distracted can
Technology Device result in a loss of vehicle control
severe personal injury, and
What is Bluetooth® Wireless death. The driver’s primary
Technology Pairing? responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
Pairing refers to the process of syn- use of any handheld devices,
chronizing your Bluetooth® Wireless other equipment, or vehicle sys-
Technology phone or device with the tems which take the driver’s
car audio system for connection. eyes, attention and focus away
Pairing is necessary to connect and from the safe operation of a vehi-
use the Bluetooth® Wireless cle or which are not permissible
Technology feature. by law should never be used dur-
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos ing operation of the vehicle.
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Kia is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
A Bluetooth® enabled cell phone is
required to use Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology.
4 184
Pairing PHONE key / key on 2. Select [OK] button to enter the [Non SSP supported device]
the Steering Remote Controller Pair Phone screen. (SSP: Secure Simple Pairing)
4. After a few moments, a screen is
displayed where the passkey is
When No Devices have been Paired entered. Hear, enter the passkey
1. Press the PHONE key or the “0000” to pair your Bluetooth®
key on the steering remote controller. Wireless Technology device with
The following screen is displayed. the car audio system.
1) Vehicle Name : Name of device as
shown when searching from your [SSP supported device]
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology 4. After a few moments, a screen is
device. displayed 6 digits passkey. Hear,
2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair the check the passkey on your
device. Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device and confirm.
3. From your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your
car audio system.
5. Once pairing is complete, the fol-

lowing screen is displayed.
4 185
Some phones (i.e., iPhone®, Android

and Blackberry phones) may offer an
option to allow acceptance of all
future Bluetooth connection requests
by default." and "Visit
http://www.kia.com/us/en/content/ow
ners/bluetooth for additional informa-
tion on pairing your Bluetooth-
enabled mobile phone, and to view a
phone compatibility list.
• If Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

devices are paired but none are
currently connected, pressing the
PHONE key or the key on the
steering wheel displays the follow-
ing screen. Select [Pair] button to
pair a new device or select
[Connect] to connect a previously
paired device.
4 186
Pairing through [PHONE] • Bluetooth® Wireless Technology • Only Bluetooth® Wireless

Setup features supported within the vehi- Technology Handsfree and
cle are as follows. Some features Bluetooth audio related features
may not be supported depending are supported.
Press the SETUP key Select on your Bluetooth® Wireless • Bluetooth related operations are
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone] Technology device. possible only within devices that
Select TUNE knob - Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree support Handsfree or audio fea-
calls tures, such as a Bluetooth®
- Operations during a call (Switch Wireless Technology mobile phone
to Private, Switch to call waiting, or a Bluetooth audio device.
MIC on/off) • If a connected Bluetooth® Wireless
- Downloading Call History Technology device becomes dis-
connected due to being out of
- Downloading Mobile Contacts communication range, turning the
1. The following steps are the same - Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device OFF, or a Bluetooth®
as those described in the section device auto connection Wireless Technology communica-
"When No Devices have been - Bluetooth Audio Streaming tion error, corresponding
Paired" on the previous page. • Up to five Bluetooth® Wireless Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Technology devices can be paired devices are automatically
to the Car Handsfree system. searched and reconnected.
• Only one Bluetooth® Wireless • If the system becomes unstable due
Technology device can be con- to communication errors between
nected at a time. the car Handsfree and the
• Other devices cannot be paired device, reset the device by turning
while a Bluetooth® Wireless off and back on again. Upon reset-
Technology device is connected. ting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device, the system will be restored.
4 187
• After pairing is complete, a con- Connecting a Device From the paired phone list, select the
tacts download request is sent device you want to connect and
once to the mobile phone. Some select [Connect].
mobile phones may require confir- Press the SETUP key Select
mation upon receiving a download [Phone] Select [Phone List]
request, ensure your mobile phone
accepts the connection. Refer to
your phones user’s manual for
additional information regarding
phone pairing and connections.
1) Connected Phone : Device that is

currently connected.
2) Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected.
4 188
Changing Priority From the paired phone list, select • Priority icon will be displayed when
the phone you want to switch to the the selected phone is set as a pri-
highest priority, then select [Change ority phone.
What is Priority? Priority] button from the Menu. The
It is possible to pair up to five selected device will be changed to
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology the highest priority.
devices with the car audio system.
The "Change Priority" feature is used
to set the connection priority of
paired phones.
Press the SETUP key Select

[Phone] Select [Phone List]
4 189
Disconnecting a Device Deleting a Device • When deleting the currently con-

nected device, the device will auto-
matically be disconnected to pro-
Press the SETUP key Select Press the SETUP key Select ceed with the deleting process.
[Phone] Select [Phone List] [Phone] Select [Phone List] • If a paired Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you
must pair the device again.
From the paired phone list, select the From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and device you want to delete and select
select [Disconnect] button. [Delete] button.
4 190
• If you select the [Call History] but- Answering Calls

USING Bluetooth® Wireless ton but there is no call history data,
Technology a prompt is displayed which asks to
download call history data. Answering a Call
Phone Menu Screen • If you select the [Contacts] button Answering a call with a Bluetooth®
but there is no contacts data Wireless Technology device connect-
stored, a prompt is displayed which ed will display the following screen.
Phone Menus asks to download contacts data. To accept the call, press key on
With a Bluetooth® Wireless • This feature may not be supported the steering wheel while the call is
Technology device connected, press in some mobile phones. For more incoming.
the PHONE key to display the Phone information on download support,
menu screen. refer to your mobile phone user’s
manual.
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s

name when the incoming caller is
1) Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used saved within your contacts.
contacts saved for easy access. 2) Incoming Number : Displays the
2) Call History : Displays the call his- incoming number.
tory list screen.
3) Contacts : Displays the Contacts
list screen.
4) Setup : Displays Phone related
settings.
4 191
✽ NOTICE Favorites Call History

• When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and SETUP
Press the PHONE key Select Press the PHONE key Select [Call
mode features are disabled. Only
[Favorites] History]
the call volume will operate.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
1) Saved favorite contact : Connects A list of incoming, outgoing and

call upon selection. missed calls is displayed.
2) To add favorite : Downloaded con- • Call history may not be saved in the call
tacts be saved as favorite. history list in some mobile phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID will
• To save Favorite, contacts should not be saved in the call history list.
be downloaded.
• Calling through the call history is not pos-
• Contact saved in Favorites will not sible when there is no call history stored
be automatically updated if the or a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
contact has been updated in the phone is not connected.
phone. To update Favorites, delete
the Favorite and create a new • Up to 50 received, dialed and missed
Favorite. calls are stored in Call History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and call
time information are not stored in Call
History.
4 192
Contacts • Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your • It is not possible to begin down-

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology loading a contact list when the con-
phone can be downloaded into the tact download feature has been
Press the PHONE key Select car contacts. Contacts that have turned off within the Bluetooth®
[Contacts] been downloaded to the car cannot Wireless Technology device. In
be edited or deleted on the phone. addition, some devices may require
• Mobile phone contacts are man- device authorization upon attempt-
aged separately for each paired ing to download contacts. If down-
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology loading does not normally occur,
device (max 5 devices x 1,000 con- check the Bluetooth® Wireless
tacts each). Previously downloaded Technology device settings or the
data is maintained even if the screen state.
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology • The contacts download feature may
The list of saved phone book entries device has been disconnected. not be supported in some mobile
is displayed. (However, the contacts and call his- phones. For more information of
tory saved to the phone will be supported Bluetooth® devices and
deleted if a paired phone is delet- function support, refer to your
NOTE: ed.) phone’s user manual.
Find a contact in an alphabetical • It is possible to download contacts
order, press the MENU key. during Bluetooth streaming audio.
• When downloading contacts, the
icon will be displayed within the sta-
tus bar.
4 193
Bluetooth® Wireless Pairing a New Device Viewing Paired Phone List

Technology Setting Press the SETUP key Select Press the SETUP key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone] [Phone] Select [Phone List]
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos
Technology. Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
WARNING system.
Driving while distracted can For more information, refer to the
result in a loss of vehicle control “Pairing through Phone Setup” sec-
that may lead to an accident, tion within Bluetooth® Wireless
severe personal injury, and Technology. This feature is used to view mobile
death. The driver’s primary phones that have been paired with
responsibility is in the safe and the audio system. Upon selecting a
legal operation of a vehicle, and paired phone, the setup menu is dis-
use of any handheld devices, played.
other equipment, or vehicle sys- For more information, refer to the
tems which take the driver’s “Setting Bluetooth® Wireless
eyes, attention and focus away Technology Connection” section
from the safe operation of a vehi- within Bluetooth® Wireless
cle or which are not permissible Technology.
by law should never be used dur-
ing operation of the vehicle.
4 194
1) Connect/Disconnect Phone : Downloading Contacts Outgoing Volume

Connect/ disconnects currently Press the SETUP key Select Press the SETUP key Select
selected phone. [Phone] Select [Contacts Download] [Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]
2) Change Priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest connec-
tion priority.
3) Delete : Deletes the currently
selected phone.
4) Return : Moves to the previous
screen.
As the contacts are downloaded Use TUNE knob to adjust the out-
• To learn more about whether your from the mobile phone, a download going volume level.
mobile phone supports contacts progress bar is displayed.
downloads, refer to your mobile • While on a call, the volume can be
phone user’s manual. • Upon downloading phone contacts, SEEK
the previous corresponding data is changed by using the TRACK
• The contacts for only the connected key.
phone can be downloaded. deleted.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not operate
while contacts are being down-
loaded.
4 195
Turning Bluetooth System Off

[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System
Off]
Once Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology is turned off, Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology related features
will not be supported within the audio
system.
• To turn Bluetooth® Wireless

Technology back on, go to SETUP
[Phone] and select “Yes”.
4 196
VOICE RECOGNITION If prompt feedback is in [ON], then Contact List Best Practices
the system will say “Please say a 1) Use full names vs. short or single
Using Voice Recognition command after the beep (BEEP)”. syllable names (“John Smith” vs.
• If prompt feedback is in [OFF] “Dad”, “Smith Residence” vs.
mode, then the system will only “Home”)
Starting Voice Recognition say “(BEEP)”. 2) Avoid using special characters or
Shortly press the key on the • To change Prompt Feedback hyphens (@, &, #, /, -, *, +, etc.)
steering wheel. Say a command. [On]/[Off], go to SETUP [System] 3) Avoid using acronyms (“In Case
[Prompt Feedback]. Emergency” vs. “ICE”)
• For proper recognition, say the 4) Spell words completely, no abbre-
command after the voice instruc- viations (“Doctor Goodman” vs.
tion and beep tone. “Dr. Goodman”)
4 197
Skipping Prompt Messages ENDING VOICE Voice Recognition and Phone

While prompt message is being stat- RECOGNITION Contact Tips:
ed Shortly press the key on the The Kia Voice Recognition System
steering remote controller. While Voice Recognition is operating may have difficulty understanding
The prompt message is immediately Press and hold the key on the some accents or uncommon names.
ended and the beep tone will sound. steering remote controller When using Voice Recognition to
After the “beep”, say the voice com- place a call, speak in a moderate
mand. tone, with clear pronunciation.
• While using voice command, press-
ing any steering wheel control or a To maximize the use of Voice
Re-starting Voice Recognition different key will end voice com- Recognition, consider these guide-
mand. lines when storing contacts:
While system waits for a command
Shortly press the key on the • When the system is waiting for a • Do not store single-name entries
steering remote controller. voice command, say “cancel” or (e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, etc.). Instead,
“end” to end voice command. always use full names (including
The command wait state is immedi- first and last names) for these con-
ately ended and the beep ton will • When the system is waiting for a tacts.
sound. After the “beep”, say the voice voice command, press and hold the
command. key on the steering wheel to • Do not use special characters
end voice command. (e.g., '@', '-', '*', '&', etc.).
• Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
"Lieutenant" instead of "Lt.") or
acronyms (i.e., use "County
Finance Department" instead of
"C. F. D."; Be sure to say the name
exactly as it is entered in the con-
tacts list.
4 198
Illustration on using voice commands More Help

Here are some examples of mode commands.
• Starting voice command. You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
Shortly pressing the key (less than 1 second): You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod®'.
Please say a command after Additionally, there are phone commands like
the beep (BEEP) Beep~ "Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
More Help manual.
Please say a command after the beep.
More Help
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'. • Ending voice command.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My Shortly pressing the key (less than 1 second):
Additionally, there are phone commands like Please say a command after
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number". the beep (BEEP)
You can find more detailed commands in the user's Contacts
manual.
Please say the contact name you want to call.
• Skipping Voice Recognition

Cancel
Shortly pressing the key (less than 1 second):
Please say a... while guidance message is being stated

(BEEP)
More Help
4 199
Voice Command List

• Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However, a few commands may not be
available during certain operations).
Command Function Command Function
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying
used anywhere in the system. this command, say the name of a contact
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be saved in the Contacts to automatically con-
used within the current mode. nect the call.
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in Contacts. Dial Number Displays the Dial number screen. After saying
Ex) Call “John Smith”. this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
on Mobile "Mobile" in Contacts. Redial Connects the last dialed call number.
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile. Tutorial Provides guidance on how to use voice
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as recognition and Bluetooth® connections.
in Office "Office" in Contacts. • When listening to the radio, displays the next
Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office. radio screen. (FM1➟FM2➟AM➟SAT1➟
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as SAT2➟SAT3➟FM1)
at Home "Home" in Contacts. Radio • When listening to a different mode, displays
Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home. the most recently played radio screen.
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as • When currently listening to the FM radio,
on Other "Other" in Contacts. maintains the current state.
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other. • When listening to a different mode, displays
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com- the most recently played FM screen.
mands. After saying this command, say FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
“Favorites”,“Call History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial
Number” execute corresponding functions. FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
Favorites Displays the Favorite screen. AM Displays the AM screen.
Call History Displays the Call History screen.
4 200

FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
saved in FM Preset 1~6. AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6. Bluetooth® Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth®
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding device.
frequency. Mute Mutes the sound.
AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
frequency.
SIRIUS (Satellite) • When currently listening to the SiriusXM®,
maintains the current state.
• When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played SiriusXM® screen.
SIRIUS (Satellite) Displays the selected SiriusXM® screen.
1~3
SIRIUS Channel Plays the selected SiriusXM® channel.
0~223
Media Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
USB Plays USB music.
iPod® Plays iPod® music.
4 201
• FM/AM radio Commands: Commands available dur- • Satellite radio Commands: Commands that can be
ing FM, AM radio operation. used while listening to Satellite Radio.

Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6. Channel 0~223 Plays the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current Scan Scans receivable channels from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each. broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
present and plays for 10 seconds each. Information Displays the information of the current broad-
Information Displays the information of the current broadcast.
cast.(This feature can be used when receiving
RBDS broadcasts.)
4 202
• Audio CD Commands: Commands available during • MP3 CD / USB Commands: Commands available
Audio CD operation. during USB and MP3 CD operation.

Random Randomly plays the tracks within the CD. Random Randomly plays the files within the current
Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen- folder.
tial order. Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
Repeat Repeats the current track. order.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen- Repeat Repeats the current file.
tial order. Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number. order.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Next Folder Play the first file in the next folder.
Previous Folder Play the first file in the previous folder.
4 203
• iPod® Commands: Commands available during iPod® • My Music Commands: Commands available during
operation. My Music operation.

Random Randomly plays the songs within the current Random Randomly plays all saved files.
category. Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen- order.
tial order. Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Repeats the current song. Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen- order.
tial order. Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.
4 204
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Commands: iPod® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. iPod®
Commands available during Bluetooth® Wireless mobile digital device sold separately. The
Technology audio streaming from mobile phone oper- Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
ation Command Operation. trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Kia is under license.
Command Function SiriusXM services require a subscription sold sep-
arately, or as a package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If
Play Plays the currently paused song.
you decide to continue service after your trial, the
Pause Pauses the current song. subscription plan you choose will automatically
renew thereafter and you will be charged according
to your chosen payment method at then-current
rates. Fees and taxes apply. To cancel you must call
SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM
Customer Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data
services are available only in the 48 contiguous
USA, DC and PR (with coverage limitations).
SiriusXM satellite service is also available in
Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. All fees and pro-
gramming subject to change. Sirius, XM and all
related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius
XM Radio Inc. Android™ is a trademark of Google,
Inc. BlackBerry is a registered trademark of
Research In Motion Limited (RIM). All other marks,
channel names and logos are the property of their
respective owners. All rights reserved.
4 205
IC
This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference; and
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
4 206
■ CD Player
❋ No logo will be shown if the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology feature is not supported.
4 207
SYSTEM CONTROLLERS (2) RADIO (4) PHONE

AND FUNCTIONS Changes to FM/AM/SIRIUS® mode. Operates Phone Screen
Each time the key is pressed, the ❈ When a phone is not connected,
❈ Display and settings may differ mode is changed in order of FM1 ➟ the connection screen is displayed.
depending on the selected audio. FM2 ➟ AM ➟ SAT1 ➟ SAT2 ➟ SAT3.
❈ In Setup>Display, the radio pop up SEEK
(5) TRACK
screen will be displayed when
Audio Head Unit [Mode Pop up] is turned On . Radio Mode : Automatically search-
es for broadcast frequencies.
When the pop up screen is dis-
played, use the TUNE knob or CD, USB, iPod®, My Music modes
keys 1 ~ 6 to select the - Shortly press the key (less than 1 sec-
desired mode. ond): Moves to next or previous song
(file).
(3) MEDIA - Press and hold the key (more than 1
second): Rewinds or fast-forwards
Changes to CD, USB(iPod®), AUX, the current song.
My Music, BT Audio mode.
BT Audio mode : Moves to next or
Each time the key is pressed, the previous song(file)
mode is changed in order of CD,
USB(iPod®), AUX, My Music, BT ❈ The Play/Pause feature may oper-
Audio. ate differently depending on the
mobile phone.
❈ In Setup>Display, the media pop
up screen will be displayed when
(1) (EJECT) [Mode Pop up] is turned On . (6) PWR/VOL knob
Ejects the disc. When the pop up screen is dis- Power : Turns power On/Off by
played, use the TUNE knob or pressing the knob.
keys 1 ~ 5 to select the Volume : Sets volume by turning
desired mode. the knob left/right.
4 208
(8) SCAN (10) MENU

Radio Mode Displays menus for the current mode.
- Shortly press the key : Previews ❈ iPod® List : Move to parent category.
each broadcast for 5 seconds
each. CAT
(11) FOLDER
1 second): Previews the broad- Radio Mode
casts saved in Preset 1 ~ 6 - SIRIUS® RADIO : Category Search
for 5 seconds each. MP3, CD, USB mode : Folder Search
❈Press the SCAN key again to
continue listening to the current (12) TUNE knob
frequency.
Radio mode : Changes frequency by
❈SAT Radio does not support the turning the knob left/right.
Preset scan feature.
CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode:
(7) DISP CD, USB, My Music mode Searches songs (files) by turning the
Each time the button is shortly - Shortly press the key (less than 1 knob left/right.
pressed (less than 1 second), it sets second): Previews each song (file) ❈When the desired song is dis-
the screen Off ➟ Screen On ➟ for 10 seconds each. played, press the knob to play the
Screen Off ❈Press the SCAN key again to song.
❈ Audio operation is maintained and continue listening to the current Moves focus in all selection menus
only the screen will be turned Off. song (file). and selects menus.
In the screen Off state, press any
key to turn the screen On again.
(9) SETUP
Moves to the Display, Sound, Phone,
System setting modes.
4 209
(13) 1 ~ 6 (Preset)
Radio Mode: Saves frequencies
(channels) or receives saved fre-
quencies (channels)
CD, USB, iPod®, My Music mode
- 1 : Repeat
- 2 : Random
In the Radio, Media, Setup, and
Menu pop up screen, the number
menu is selected.
(14) FM/AM
Changes to FM/AM mode.
mode is changed in order of FM1 ➟
FM2 ➟ AM.
(15) SAT
Changes to SIRIUS® Satellite Radio
mode.
mode is changed in order of SAT1 ➟
SAT2 ➟ SAT3.
4 210
SETUP Mode Pop up

[Mode Pop up] Changes On / Off
selection mode
Display Settings • During On state, press the RADIO
or MEDIA key to display the mode
Press the SETUP key Select [Display] change pop up screen.
Select menu through TUNE knob Media Display
When playing an MP3 file, select the
desired display info from ‘Folder/File’
or ‘Album/Artist/Song’.
4 211
SOUND SETTINGS Sound Settings Speed Dependent Volume Control

This menu allows you to set the This feature is used to automatically
‘Bass, Middle, Treble’ and the Sound control the volume level according to
Press the SETUP key Select [Sound] Fader and Balance. the speed of the vehicle.
through TUNE knob or 2 key Select [Speed Dependent Vol.] Set
Select menu through TUNE knob Select [Sound Settings] Select
menu through TUNE knob Turn [Off/On] of TUNE knob
TUNE knob left/right to set
• Bass, Middle, Treble : Selects the Voice Recognition Volume
sound tone. Adjusts voice recognition volume.
• Fader, Balance : Moves the sound Select [Voice Recognition Vol.] Set
fader and balance. volume of TUNE knob
• Default : Restores default settings.
❈Back : While adjusting values,
pressing the TUNE knob will
restore the parent menu.
4 212
SYSTEM SETTINGS Memory Information • Off : This mode is for expert users
Displays currently used memory and and omits some information during
total system memory. voice command operation. (When
Press the SETUP key Select using Expert mode, guidance
[System] Select menu through Select [Memory Information] OK instructions can be heard through
TUNE knob The currently used memory is dis- the [Help] or [Menu] commands.
played on the left side while the total
system memory is displayed on the
right side. Language
This menu is used to set the display
and voice recognition language.
Select [Language] Set through
TUNE knob
Prompt Feedback
This feature is used to change voice
command feedback between Normal ❈The system will reboot after the
and Expert modes. language is changed.
Select [Prompt Feedback] Set ❈Language support by region
through TUNE knob - English, Francais, Espanol
• On : This mode is for beginner
users and provides detailed
instructions during voice command
operation.
4 213
RADIO : FM, AM OR SIRIUS® Preset SEEK Selecting through manual

Press the 1 ~ 6 key search
• Shortly pressing the key (less than Turn the TUNE knob left/right to
1 second): Plays the frequency adjust the frequency.
saved in the corresponding key. • FM : Changes by 200KHz
• Pressing and holding the key (more • AM : Changes by 10KHz
than 1 second): Pressing and hold-
ing the desired key from 1 ~
6 will save the currently playing
broadcast to the selected key and
SEEK sound a BEEP.
SEEK
Press the TRACK key
• Shortly pressing the key (less than SCAN
1 second): Automatically searches
Press the SCAN key
for the next station.
• Shortly pressing the key (less than
1 second): The broadcast frequen-
than 1 second): While holding the
cy increases and previews each
key, frequency changes without
broadcast for 5 seconds each. After
stopping. When the key is released,
scanning all frequencies, returns
automatically searches for the next
and plays the current broadcast fre-
frequency from that point.
quency.
than 1 second): Previews the
broadcasts saved in Preset 1 ~
6 for 5 seconds each.
4 214
MENU
Within MENU key are the A.Store
(Auto Store) and Info functions.
A.Store
Press the MENU key Set [A.Store]
through TUNE knob or 1 key.
Saves broadcasts with superior
reception to 1 ~ 6 keys. If no
frequencies are received, then the
most recently received frequency will
be broadcast.
4 215
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio information

Satellite Radio channels: • Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall build- For information on extended sub-
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio has over ings, bridges, tunnels, freeway scription terms, contact SIRIUS® at
130 channels, including 69 channels overpasses, parking garages, 1-888-539-7474.
of 100% commercial-free music, plus dense tree foliage and thunder-
sports, news, talk and entertainment storms can interfere with your
reception. NOTE:
available nationwide in your vehicle.
For more information and a complete SiriusXM service requires a sub-
list of SIRIUS® Satellite Radio chan- scription, sold separately, after 3-
SIRIUS® Satellite Radio service: month trial included with vehicle
nels, visit sirius.com in the United SIRIUS® Satellite Radio is a subscrip-
States, sirius-canada.ca in Canada, purchase. If you decide to contin-
tion-based satellite radio service that ue your SiriusXM service at the
or call SIRIUS® at 1-888-539-7474. broadcasts music, sports, news and end of your trial subscription, the
entertainment programming to radio plan you choose will automatical-
Satellite Radio reception factors: receivers, which are available for installa- ly renew and bill at then-current
To receive the satellite signal, your tion in motor vehicles or factory installed, rates until you call Sirius XM at 1-
vehicle has been equipped with a as well as for the home, portable and
wireless devices, and through an Internet
866-635-2349 to cancel. See our
satellite radio antenna located on the connection on personal computer. Customer Agreement for com-
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof plete terms at www.siriusxm.com.
Vehicles that are equipped with a factory
provides the best location for an installed SIRIUS® Satellite Radio system Programming subject to change.
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a include: Sirius satellite service is available
requirement of a satellite radio sys- only to those at least 18 and older
tem. Like AM/FM, there are several • Hardware and an introductory trial
subscription term, which begins on in the 48 contiguous USA, D.C.,
factors that can affect satellite radio and PR (with coverage limita-
reception performance: the date of sale or lease of the
vehicle. tions). Traffic information not
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal available in all markets. See sir-
reception performance, keep the • For a small upgrade fee, access to iusxm.com/traffic for details.
antenna clear of snow and ice SIRIUS® music channels, and Sirius®, XM and all related marks
build-up and keep luggage and other select channels over the and logos are trademarks of Sirius
other material as far away from the Internet using any computer con- XM Radio Inc.
antenna as possible. nected to the Internet (U.S. cus-
tomers only).
4 216
SIRIUS® RADIO Please note that the vehicle will need SCAN
to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and
Press the RADIO key SCAN
have an unobstructed view of the sky
Using SIRIUS® Satellite Radio in order for the radio to receive the • Shortly pressing the key (less than
activation signal. 1 second): Previews each broad-
Your Kia vehicle is equipped with a 3 cast for 5 seconds each.
month complimentary period of SIR-
❈ Press the SCAN key again to
IUS® Satellite Radio so you have SEEK continue listening to the current
access to over 130 channels of Press the RADIO key frequency.
music, information, and entertain-
ment programming. • Shortly pressing the key (less than ❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,
1 second): select previous or next channels are changed within the
channel. current category.
• Pressing and holding the key (more Category
than 1 second): continuously move
CAT
to previous or next channel. Press the FOLDER key Set through
❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed, the TUNE knob
channels are changed within the • The display will indicate the catego-
current category. ry menus, highlight the category
Activation
that the current channel belongs to.
In order to extend or reactivate your
subscription to SIRIUS® Satellite • In the Category List Mode, press
CAT
Radio, you will need to contact SIR- the FOLDER key to navigate cate-
IUS® Customer Care at 800-643- gory list.
2112. Have your 12 digit SID (Sirius • Press the tune knob to select the
Identification Number) / ESN lowest channel in the highlighted
(Electronic Serial Number) ready. To category.
retrieve the SID / ESN, turn on the ❈ If channel is selected by selecting
radio, press the [RADIO] button, and category, then the “CATEGORY”
tune to channel zero. icon is displayed at the top of the
screen.
4 217
Preset Tune
Press the RADIO key 1 ~ 6 • Rotate TUNE knob : Changes
• Shortly pressing the key (less than the channel number or scrolls cat-
1 second): Plays the frequency egory list.
saved in the corresponding key. • Press TUNE knob : Selects the
• Pressing and holding the key menu.
(more than 1 second): Pressing
and holding the desired key from Menu
1 ~ 6 will save the current
broadcast to the selected key and Select category menu through the
sound a BEEP. TUNE knob Press the MENU
key Select [ Info] through the
✽ Troubleshooting TUNE knob or 1 key
1.Antenna Error
If this message is displayed, the Info (Information)
antenna or antenna cable is bro-
ken or unplugged. Please consult Displays the Artist/Song info of the
with your Kia dealership. current song.
2.Acquiring Signal
If this message is displayed, it
means that the antenna is covered
and that the SIRIUS® Satellite
Radio signal is not available.
Ensure the antenna is uncovered
and has a clear view of the sky.
4 218
BASIC METHOD OF USE : Repeat

Audio CD / MP3 CD / USB / While song (file) is playing 1 RPT
(RPT) key
iPod® / My Music
Audio CD, MP3 CD, USB, iPod®, My
Music mode: RPT on screen
Press the MEDIA key to change the • To repeat one song (press the key)
<USB>
mod mode in order of CD ➟ : Repeats the current song.
USB(iPod®) ➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RPT on
Audio. screen
The folder/file name is displayed on • To repeat folder (pressing twice):
the screen. repeats all files within the current
folder.
<My Music> ❈ Press the 1 RPT key again to turn
off repeat.
❈The CD is automatically played
when a CD is inserted. Random
<Audio CD> ❈The USB music is automatically While song (file) is playing 2 RDM
played when a USB is connected. (RDM) key
Audio CD, My Music mode: RDM on
screen
• Random (press the key) : Plays all
songs in random order.
<CD MP3>
4 219
MP3 CD, USB mode: FLD.RDM on While song (file) is playing SEEK Folder Search : MP3 CD, USB
TRACK
screen key Mode
• Folder Random (press the key) : CAT
• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the While file is playing FOLDER
Plays all files within the current fold- next song. (Folder Up) key
er in random order. • Pressing and holding the key (more • Searches the next folder.
iPod® mode: ALL RDM on screen than 1 second): Fast forwards the CAT
song. While file is playing FOLDER
• All Random (press the key) : Plays (Folder Down) key
all files in random order.
• Searches the parent folder.
MP3 CD, USB : ALL RDM on screen Scan
❈ If a folder is selected by pressing
• All Random (pressing twice): Plays While song (file) is playing SCAN the TUNE knob, the first file
all files in random order. key within the selected folder will be
❈ Press the 2 RDM key again to turn • Shortly pressing the key : Scans all played.
off repeat. songs from the next song for 10 ❈In iPod® mode, moves to the Parent
seconds each. Folder.
Changing Song/File ❈ Press the SCAN key again to turn
off.
While song (file) is playing Searching Songs (File)
SEEK key ❈ The SCAN function is not support-
TRACK ed in iPod® mode. • Turning TUNE knob : Searches
• Shortly pressing the key : Plays the for songs (files).
current song from the beginning. • Pressing TUNE knob : Plays
SEEK
❈If the TRACK key is pressed selected song (file).
again within 2 second, the previous
song is played.
than 1 second): Rewinds the song.
4 220
MENU : Audio CD Information MENU : MP3 CD / USB

Press the CD MP3 mode MENU key Press the MENU key Set [ Info] Press the CD MP3 mode MENU key
to set the Repeat, Random, through the TUNE knob or 3 to set the Repeat, Folder Random,
Information features. key to display information of the cur- Folder Repeat, All Random,
rent song. Information, and Copy features.
info display.
Repeat
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT] Repeat
key to repeat the current song. Press the MENU key Set [ RPT]
key to repeat the current song.
Random
key to randomly play songs within
the current folder.
4 221
Folder Random Information Copy

Press the MENU key Set [ F.RDM] Press the MENU key Set [ Info] Press the MENU key Set [ Copy]
through the TUNE knob or 2 RDM through the TUNE knob or 5 through the TUNE knob or 6
key to randomly play songs within the key to display information of the cur- key.
rent song. This is used to copy the current
current folder.
❈ Press the MENU key to turn off song into My Music. You can play
❈ Press F.RDM again to turn off. info display. the copied Music in My Music
mode.
Folder Repeat ❈If another key is pressed while
Press the MENU key Set [ F.RPT] copying is in progress, a pop up
through the TUNE knob or 3 asking you whether to cancel copy-
key to repeat songs within the cur- ing is displayed.
rent folder. ❈If another media is connected or
❈ Press F.RPT again to turn off. inserted (USB, CD, iPod®, AUX)
while copying is in progress, copy-
ing is canceled.
All Random
❈Music will not be played while
Press the MENU key Set [ A.RDM] copying is in progress.
through the TUNE knob or 4 key
to randomly play all songs within the
CD.
❈ Press A.RDM again to turn off.
4 222
MENU : iPod® Information

In iPod mode, press the
® MENU key Press the MENU key Set [ Info]
to set the Repeat, Random, through the TUNE knob or 3
Information and Search features. key.
Displays information of the current
song.
info display.
Search
Press the MENU key Set [ Search]
Repeat through the TUNE knob or 4
key.
through the TUNE knob or 1 RPT Displays iPod® category list.
key to repeat the current song. ❈Searching iPod® category is
MENU key pressed, move to par-
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off.
ent category.
Random
through the TUNE knob or 2
key.
Plays all songs within the currently
playing category in random order.
4 223
MENU : My Music Mode Information ➀ Select the file you wish to delete
Press the MENU key Set [ Info] by using the TUNE knob.
through the TUNE knob or 3 ➁ Press the MENU key and select
In My Music mode, press the MENU the delete menu to delete the
key to set the Repeat, Random, key.
Displays information of the current selected file.
Information, Delete, Delete All, and
Delete Selection features. song.
❈ Press the MENU key to turn off Delete All
info display. Press the MENU key Set [ Del.All]
through the TUNE knob or 5 key.
Delete Deletes all songs of My Music.
Press the MENU key Set [ Delete]
through the TUNE knob or 4 Delete Selection
key.
Repeat Press the MENU key Set [ Del.Sel]
Deletes currently playing file
Press the MENU key Set [ RPT] through the TUNE knob or 6
through the TUNE knob or 1 RPT In the play screen, pressing delete key.
key. will delete the currently playing song.
Songs within My Music are selected
Repeats the currently playing song. Deletes file from list and deleted.
❈ Press RPT again to turn repeat off. ➀Select the songs you wish to delete
from the list.
Random
key.
Plays all songs in random order.
❈ Press RDM again to turn random off.
4 224
➁ After selecting, press MENU key AUX

and select the delete menu. AUX is used to play external MEDIA
currently connected with the AUX
terminal.
AUX mode will automatically start
when an external device is connect-
ed with the AUX terminal.
If an external device is connected,
you can also press the MEDIA key to
change to AUX mode.
My Music
• Even if memory is available, a
maximum of 6,000 songs can be
stored.
• The same song can be copied up
to 1,000 times.
• Memory info can be checked in the ❈AUX mode cannot be started
System menu of Setup. unless there is an external device
connected to the AUX terminal.
AUX
Fully insert the AUX cable into the
AUX terminal for use.
4 225
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology • The Bluetooth® word mark and • Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
AUDIO logos are registered trademarks audio can be used only when the
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and [Audio Streaming] of Phone is
any use of such marks by Kia is turned On .
What is Bluetooth® Wireless under license. Other trademarks ❈ Setting Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology? and trade names are those of their Technology Audio Streaming :
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology respective owners. A Bluetooth® Press the SETUP key Select
allows devices to be connected in a enabled cell phone is required to [Phone] Select [Audio
short distance, including hands-free use Bluetooth® Wireless Streaming] through the TUNE
devices, stereo headsets, wireless Technology. knob Set On / Off .
remote controllers, etc. For more
information, visit the Bluetooth® WARNING
Wireless Technology website at Driving while distracted can
www.Bluetooth.com. result in a loss of vehicle control
Before using Bluetooth® Wireless severe personal injury, and
Technology audio features death. The driver’s primary
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology responsibility is in the safe and
audio may not be supported legal operation of a vehicle, and
depending on the compatibility of use of any handheld devices,
your Bluetooth® Wireless other equipment, or vehicle sys-
Technology mobile phone. tems which take the driver’s
eyes, attention and focus away
• In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless from the safe operation of a vehi-
Technology audio, you must first cle or which are not permissible
pair and connect the Bluetooth® by law should never be used dur-
Wireless Technology mobile ing operation of the vehicle.
phone.
4 226
Starting Bluetooth® Wireless Using the Bluetooth® Wireless

Technology Audio Technology audio features
• Press the MEDIA key to change the • Play / Stop
mode in order of CD ➟ USB ➟ AUX Press the TUNE knob to play and
➟ My Music ➟ BT Audio. pause the current song.
• If BT Audio is selected, Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology audio will start
playing.
❈ Audio may not automatically start
playing in some mobile phones.
• Previous / Next song

SEEK SEEK
Press TRACK or TRACK to play
previous or next song.
❈The previous song / next song /
play / pause functions may not be
supported in some mobile phones.
4 227
PHONE Making a call using the • Check call history and making call
Steering-wheel mount controls ➀ Shortly press (less than 1 second)
Before using the Bluetooth® Wireless the key on the steering
Technology phone features remote controller.
• In order to use Bluetooth® Wireless ➁ The call history list will be dis-
Technology phone, you must first played on the screen.
pair and connect the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology mobile phone. ➂ Press the key again to con-
nect a call to the selected number.
• If the mobile phone is not paired or
connected, it is not possible to
enter Phone mode. Once a phone • Redialing the most recently called
is paired or connected, the guid- number
ance screen will be displayed. ➀ Press and hold (more than 1 sec-
• If Priority is set upon vehicle igni- ond) the key on the steering
tion (IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth® (1)MUTE button : Mute the micro- remote controller.
Wireless Technology phone will be phone during a call. ➁ The most recently called number
automatically connected. Even if is redialed.
you are outside, the Bluetooth® (2)VOLUME button : Raises or low-
Wireless Technology phone will be ers speaker volume.
automatically connected once you (3) button : Activates voice recog-
are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If nition.
you do not want automatic (4) button : Places and transfers
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology calls.
phone connection, set the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology (5) button : Ends calls or cancels
power to OFF. functions.
4 228

WARNING
Pairing a Bluetooth® Wireless Driving while distracted can
Technology Device result in a loss of vehicle control
severe personal injury, and
What is Bluetooth® Wireless death. The driver’s primary
Technology Pairing? responsibility is in the safe and
legal operation of a vehicle, and
Pairing refers to the process of syn- use of any handheld devices,
chronizing your Bluetooth® Wireless other equipment, or vehicle sys-
Technology phone or device with the tems which take the driver’s
car audio system for connection. eyes, attention and focus away
Pairing is necessary to connect and from the safe operation of a vehi-
use the Bluetooth® Wireless cle or which are not permissible
Technology feature. by law should never be used dur-
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos ing operation of the vehicle.
Technology.
4 229
Pairing PHONE Key / Key on 2. Select [OK] button to enter the [Non SSP supported device]
the Steering Remote Controller Pair Phone screen. (SSP: Secure Simple Pairing)
displayed where the passkey is
When No Devices have been Paired entered. Hear, enter the passkey
1. Press the PHONE key or the key “0000” to pair your Bluetooth®
on the steering remote controller.The Wireless Technology device with
following screen is displayed. the car audio system.
1) Car Name : Name of device as
shown when searching from your [SSP supported device]
device.
displayed 6 digits passkey.
2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair the Hear, check the passkey on your
device. Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device and confirm.
3. From your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your
car audio system.
5. Once pairing is complete, the fol-

lowing screen is displayed.
4 230
Some phones (i.e., iPhone®, Android

and Blackberry phones) may offer an
option to allow acceptance of all
future Bluetooth connection requests
by default." and "Visit
http://www.kia.com/us/en/content/ow
ners/bluetooth for additional informa-
tion on pairing your Bluetooth-
enabled mobile phone, and to view a
phone compatibility list.
• If Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

devices are paired but none are
currently connected, pressing the
PHONE key or the key on the
steering wheel displays the follow-
ing screen. Select [Pair] button to
pair a new device or select
[Connect] to connect a previously
paired device.
4 231
Pairing through [PHONE] • Bluetooth® Wireless Technology • Only Bluetooth® Wireless

Setup features supported within the vehi- Technology Handsfree and
cle are as follows. Some features Bluetooth audio related features
may not be supported depending are supported.
Press the SETUP key Select on your Bluetooth® Wireless • Bluetooth related operations are
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone] Technology device. possible only within devices that
Select TUNE knob - Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree support Handsfree or audio fea-
calls tures, such as a Bluetooth®
- Operations during a call (Switch Wireless Technology mobile phone
to Private, Switch to call waiting, or a Bluetooth audio device.
MIC on/off) • If a connected Bluetooth® Wireless
- Downloading Call History Technology device becomes dis-
connected due to being out of
- Downloading Mobile Contacts communication range, turning the
- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device OFF, or a Bluetooth®
1. The following steps are the same device auto connection Wireless Technology communica-
as those described in the section - Bluetooth Audio Streaming tion error, corresponding
"When No Devices have been • Up to five Bluetooth® Wireless Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Paired" on the previous page. Technology devices can be paired devices are automatically
to the Car Handsfree system. searched and reconnected.
• Only one Bluetooth® Wireless • If the system becomes unstable
Technology device can be con- due to communication errors
nected at a time. between the car Handsfree and the
• Other devices cannot be paired device, reset the device by turning
while a Bluetooth® Wireless off and back on again. Upon reset-
Technology device is connected. ting Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device, the system will
be restored.
4 232
• After pairing is complete, a con- Connecting a Device From the paired phone list, select the
tacts download request is sent device you want to connect and
once to the mobile phone. Some select [Connect].
mobile phones may require confir- Press the SETUP key Select
mation upon receiving a download [Phone] Select [Phone List]
request, ensure your mobile phone
accepts the connection. Refer to
your phones user’s manual for
additional information regarding
phone pairing and connections.
1) Connected Phone : Device that is

currently connected.
2) Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected.
4 233
Changing Priority From the paired phone list, select • Priority icon will be displayed when
the phone you want to switch to the the selected phone is set as a pri-
highest priority, then select [Change ority phone.
What is Priority? Priority] button from the Menu. The
It is possible to pair up to five selected device will be changed to
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology the highest priority.
devices with the car audio system.
The "Change Priority" feature is used
to set the connection priority of
paired phones.

[Phone] Select [Phone List]
4 234
Disconnecting a Device Deleting a Device • When deleting the currently con-

nected device, the device will auto-
matically be disconnected to pro-
Press the SETUP key Select Press the SETUP key Select ceed with the deleting process.
[Phone] Select [Phone List] [Phone] Select [Phone List] • If a paired Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you
must pair the device again.
From the paired phone list, select the From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and device you want to delete and select
select [Disconnect] button. [Delete] button.
4 235
• If you select the [Call History] but- Answering Calls

USING Bluetooth® Wireless ton but there is no call history data,
Technology a prompt is displayed which asks to
download call history data. Answering a Call
Phone Menu Screen • If you select the [Contacts] button Answering a call with a Bluetooth®
but there is no contacts data Wireless Technology device connect-
stored, a prompt is displayed which ed will display the following screen.
Phone Menus asks to download contacts data. To accept the call, press key on
With a Bluetooth® Wireless • This feature may not be supported the steering wheel while the call is
Technology device connected, press in some mobile phones. For more incoming.
the PHONE key to display the Phone information on download support,
menu screen. refer to your mobile phone user’s
manual.
1) Caller : Displays the other party’s

name when the incoming caller is
1) Favorite : Up to 20 frequently used saved within your contacts.
contacts saved for easy access. 2) Incoming Number : Displays the
2) Call History : Displays the call his- incoming number.
tory list screen.
3) Contacts : Displays the Contacts
list screen.
4) Setup : Displays Phone related
settings.
4 236
• When an incoming call pop-up is Favorites Call History

displayed, most Audio and SETUP
mode features are disabled. Only
the call volume will operate. Press the PHONE key Select Press the PHONE key Select [Call
• The telephone number may not be [Favorites] History]
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
• When a call is answered with the
mobile phone, the call mode will
automatically revert to Private
mode.
1) Saved favorite contact : Connects A list of incoming, outgoing and

call upon selection. missed calls is displayed.
2) To add favorite : Downloaded con- • Call history may not be saved in the call
tacts be saved as favorite. history list in some mobile phones.
• Calls received with hidden caller ID will
• To save Favorite, contacts should not be saved in the call history list.
be downloaded.
• Calling through the call history is not pos-
• Contact saved in Favorites will not sible when there is no call history stored
be automatically updated if the or a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
contact has been updated in the phone is not connected.
phone. To update Favorites, delete
the Favorite and create a new • Up to 50 received, dialed and missed
Favorite. calls are stored in Call History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and call
time information are not stored in Call
History.
4 237
Contacts • Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your • It is not possible to begin down-

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology loading a contact list when the con-
phone can be downloaded into the tact download feature has been
Press the PHONE key Select car contacts. Contacts that have turned off within the Bluetooth®
[Contacts] been downloaded to the car cannot Wireless Technology device. In
be edited or deleted on the phone. addition, some devices may require
• Mobile phone contacts are man- device authorization upon attempt-
aged separately for each paired ing to download contacts. If down-
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology loading does not normally occur,
device (max 5 devices x 1,000 con- check the Bluetooth® Wireless
tacts each). Previously downloaded Technology device settings or the
data is maintained even if the screen state.
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology • The contacts download feature may
The list of saved phone book entries device has been disconnected. not be supported in some mobile
is displayed. (However, the contacts and call his- phones. For more information of
tory saved to the phone will be supported Bluetooth® devices and
deleted if a paired phone is delet- function support, refer to your
NOTE: ed.) phone’s user manual.
Find a contact in an alphabetical • It is possible to download contacts
order, press the MENU key. during Bluetooth streaming audio.
• When downloading contacts, the
icon will be displayed within the sta-
tus bar.
4 238
Bluetooth® Wireless Pairing a New Device Viewing Paired Phone List

Technology Setting Press the SETUP key Select Press the SETUP key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone] [Phone] Select [Phone List]
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos
Technology. Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
WARNING system.
Driving while distracted can For more information, refer to the
result in a loss of vehicle control “Pairing through Phone Setup” sec-
that may lead to an accident, tion within Bluetooth® Wireless
severe personal injury, and Technology. This feature is used to view mobile
death. The driver’s primary phones that have been paired with
responsibility is in the safe and the audio system. Upon selecting a
legal operation of a vehicle, and paired phone, the setup menu is dis-
use of any handheld devices, played.
other equipment, or vehicle sys- For more information, refer to the
tems which take the driver’s “Setting Bluetooth® Wireless
eyes, attention and focus away Technology Connection” section
from the safe operation of a vehi- within Bluetooth® Wireless
cle or which are not permissible Technology.
by law should never be used dur-
ing operation of the vehicle.
4 239
1) Connect/Disconnect Phone : Downloading Contacts Outgoing Volume

Connect/ disconnects currently Press the SETUP key Select Press the SETUP key Select
selected phone. [Phone] Select [Contacts Download] [Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]
2) Change Priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest connec-
tion priority.
3) Delete : Deletes the currently
selected phone.
4) Return : Moves to the previous
screen.
As the contacts are downloaded Use TUNE knob to adjust the out-
• To learn more about whether your from the mobile phone, a download going volume level.
mobile phone supports contacts progress bar is displayed.
downloads, refer to your mobile • While on a call, the volume can be
phone user’s manual. • Upon downloading phone contacts, SEEK
the previous corresponding data is changed by using the TRACK
• The contacts for only the connected key.
phone can be downloaded. deleted.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not operate
while contacts are being down-
loaded.
4 240
Turning Bluetooth System Off

[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System
Off]
Once Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology is turned off, Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology related features
will not be supported within the audio
system.
• To turn Bluetooth® Wireless

Technology back on, go to SETUP
[Phone] and select “Yes”.
4 241
VOICE RECOGNITION If prompt feedback is in [ON], then Contact List Best Practices
the system will say “Please say a 1) Use full names vs. short or single
Using Voice Recognition command after the beep (BEEP)”. syllable names (“John Smith” vs.
• If prompt feedback is in [OFF] “Dad”, “Smith Residence” vs.
mode, then the system will only “Home”)
Starting Voice Recognition say “(BEEP)”. 2) Avoid using special characters or
Shortly press the key on the • To change Prompt Feedback hyphens (@, &, #, /, -, *, +, etc.)
steering wheel. Say a command. [On]/[Off], go to SETUP [System] 3) Avoid using acronyms (“In Case
[Prompt Feedback]. Emergency” vs. “ICE”)
• For proper recognition, say the 4) Spell words completely, no abbre-
command after the voice instruc- viations (“Doctor Goodman” vs.
tion and beep tone. “Dr. Goodman”)
4 242
Skipping Prompt Messages ENDING VOICE Voice Recognition and Phone

While prompt message is being stat- RECOGNITION Contact Tips:
ed Shortly press the key on the The Kia Voice Recognition System
steering remote controller. While Voice Recognition is operating may have difficulty understanding
The prompt message is immediately Press and hold the key on the some accents or uncommon names.
ended and the beep tone will sound. steering remote controller When using Voice Recognition to
After the “beep”, say the voice com- place a call, speak in a moderate
mand. tone, with clear pronunciation.
• While using voice command, press-
ing any steering wheel control or a To maximize the use of Voice
Re-starting Voice Recognition different key will end voice com- Recognition, consider these guide-
mand. lines when storing contacts:
While system waits for a command
Shortly press the key on the • When the system is waiting for a • Do not store single-name entries
steering remote controller. voice command, say “cancel” or (e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, etc.). Instead,
“end” to end voice command. always use full names (including
The command wait state is immedi- first and last names) for these con-
ately ended and the beep ton will • When the system is waiting for a tacts.
sound. After the “beep”, say the voice voice command, press and hold the
command. key on the steering wheel to • Do not use special characters
end voice command. (e.g., '@', '-', '*', '&', etc.).
• Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
"Lieutenant" instead of "Lt.") or
acronyms (i.e., use "County
Finance Department" instead of
"C. F. D."; Be sure to say the name
exactly as it is entered in the con-
tacts list.
4 243
Illustration on using voice commands More Help

• Starting voice command. You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
Shortly pressing the key (less than 1 second): You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Please say a command after Additionally, there are phone commands like
the beep (BEEP) Beep~ "Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
More Help manual.
More Help
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'. • End voice command.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My Shortly pressing the key (less than 1 second):
Additionally, there are phone commands like Please say a command after
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number". the beep (BEEP) Contacts
manual.
Please say a command after the beep. Contacts.
Please say the name of the contact you want
to call.
• Skipping Voice Recognition
Cancel
Please say a... while guidance message is being stated
Shortly pressing the (BEEP) Beep Beep.. (end beep)
key (less than 1 second)
More Help
4 244
Voice Command List

• Common Commands: These commands can be used in most operations. (However, a few commands may not be
available during certain operations).
More Help Provides guidance on commands that can be Contacts Displays the Contacts screen. After saying
used anywhere in the system. this command, say the name of a contact
Help Provides guidance on commands that can be saved in the Contacts to automatically con-
used within the current mode. nect the call.
Call<Name> Calls <Name> saved in Contacts. Dial Number Display the Dial number screen. After saying
Ex) Call “John Smith”. this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as
on Mobile "Mobile" in Contacts. Redial Connects the most recently called number.
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile. Tutorial Provide guidance on how to use voice
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as recognition and Bluetooth® connections.
in Office "Office" in Contacts. • When listening to the radio, displays the next
Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office. radio screen. (FM1➟FM2➟AM➟SAT1➟
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as SAT2➟SAT3➟FM1)
at Home "Home" in Contacts. Radio • When listening to a different mode, displays
Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home. the most recently played radio screen.
Call <Name> Calls <Name> to the number that is saved as • When currently listening to the FM radio,
on Other "Other" in Contacts. maintains the current state.
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other. • When listening to a different mode, displays
Phone Provides guidance on Phone related com- the most recently played FM screen.
mands. After saying this command, say FM1(FM One) Displays the FM1 screen.
“Favorites”,“Call History”, “Contacts” or ”Dial
Number” execute corresponding functions. FM2(FM Two) Displays the FM2 screen.
Favorites Display the Favorite screen. AM Displays the AM screen.
Call History Displays the Call History screen.
4 245

FM Preset 1~6 Plays the most recently played broadcast My Music Plays the music saved in My Music.
saved in FM Preset 1~6. AUX (Auxiliary) Plays the connected external device.
AM Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6. Bluetooth® Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth®
FM 87.5~107.9 Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding device.
frequency. Please repeat Repeats the most recent comment.
AM 530~1710 Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding Mute Mutes the sound.
frequency.
Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command.
SIRIUS® (Satellite) • When currently listening to the SIRIUS®,
maintains the current state.
• When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played SIRIUS® screen.
SIRIUS® (Satellite) Displays the selected SIRIUS® screen.
1~3
SIRIUS® Channel Plays the selected SIRIUS® channel.
0~223
Media Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
CD Plays the music saved in the CD.
USB Plays USB music.
iPod® Plays iPod® music.
4 246
• FM/AM radio commands: Commands available during • Satellite radio commands: Commands that can be
FM, AM radio operation. used while listening to Satellite Radio.

Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast station saved in Preset 1~6. Channel 0~223 Plays the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scan Scans receivable frequencies from the current Scan Scans receivable channels from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each. broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Preset Scan Moves to the next preset from the current Preset 1~6 Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
present and plays for 10 seconds each. Information Displays the information of the current broad-
Information Displays the information of the current broadcast.
cast.(This feature can be used when receiving
RBDS broadcasts.)
4 247
• Audio CD commands: Commands available during • MP3 CD / USB commands: Commands available dur-
Audio CD operation. ing USB and MP3 CD operation.

Random Randomly plays the tracks within the CD. Random Randomly plays the files within the current
Random Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequen- folder.
tial order. Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
Repeat Repeats the current track. order.
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequen- Repeat Repeats the current file.
tial order. Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
Track 1~30 Plays the desired track number. order.
Information Displays the information screen of the current
file.
Next Folder Play the first file in the next folder.
Previous Folder Play the first file in the previous folder.
4 248
• iPod® Commands: Commands available during iPod® • My Music Commands: Commands available during
operation. My Music operation.

Random Randomly plays the songs within the current Random Randomly plays all saved files.
category. Random Off Cancels random play to play files in sequential
Random Off Cancels random play to play songs in sequen- order.
tial order. Repeat Repeats the current file.
Repeat Repeats the current song. Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
Repeat Off Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequen- order.
tial order. Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.
4 249
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Commands: iPod® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. iPod®
Commands available during Bluetooth® Wireless mobile digital device sold separately. The
Technology audio streaming from mobile phone oper- Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
ation Command Operation. trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Kia is under license. A
Command Function Bluetooth® enabled cell phone is required to use
Bluetooth® wireless technology. SiriusXM® service
Play Plays the currently paused song.
requires a subscription, sold separately, after 3-
Pause Pauses the current song. month trial included with vehicle purchase. If you
decide to continue your SiriusXM® service at the
end of the trial subscription, the plan you choose
will automatically renew and bill at the current rates
until you call SiriusXM™ at 1-866-635-2349 to can-
cel. See our Customer Agreement for complete
terms at www.siriusxm.com. Sirius satellite service
is available only to those at least 18 and older in the
48 contiguous United States, D.C., and P.R. (with
coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Traffic available in
select markets. See siriusxm.com/traffic for more
information. Sirius®, XM and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
4 250
IC
This device complies with Industry Canada’s licence-exempt RSSs.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference; and
(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible
d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
4 251
Driving your vehicle
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

Key positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 • Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 • Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
• Illuminated ENGINE START/STOP button . . . . . . . 5-7 • Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
• ENGINE START/STOP button position. . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 • Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 • Driving in the rain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
• Driving in flooded areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Manual transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
• Driving off-road. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
• Manual transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
• Highway driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
• Automatic transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
• Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
• Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 • Tire and loading information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
• Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 • Certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53 5
• Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
• Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 • Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
• Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 • Vehicle curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Cruise control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 • Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
• GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Active eco system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
• GAWR (Gross axle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 • GVW (Gross vehicle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
• GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Be sure the exhaust system

does not leak. WARNING - Open trunk
The exhaust system should be Do not drive with the trunk
checked whenever the vehicle is open.
raised to change the oil or for any Poisonous exhaust gases can
other purpose. If you enter the passenger compart-
hear a change in the sound of the ment. If you must drive with the
exhaust or if you drive over some- trunk open proceed as follows:
thing that strikes the underneath side 1.Close all windows.
of the vehicle, have the exhaust sys- 2.Open side vents.
tem checked as soon as possible by
an authorized Kia dealer. 3.Set the air intake control at
"Fresh", the air flow control at
"Floor" or "Face" and the fan
at the highest speed.
WARNING - Engine
exhaust
Do not inhale exhaust fumes or
leave your engine running in an
enclosed area for a prolonged
time.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless, odorless
gas that can cause uncon-
sciousness and death by
asphyxiation.
5 2
BEFORE DRIVING
Before entering vehicle Before starting
• Be sure that all windows, outside
WARNING - Distracted • Close and lock all doors.
mirror(s), and outside lights are driving
• Position the seat so that all con-
clean. Focus on the road while driving. trols are easily reached.
• Check the condition of the tires. The driver's primary responsi- • Buckle your seat belt.
• Check under the vehicle for any bility is in the safe and legal
operation of the vehicle. Use of • Adjust the inside and outside
sign of leaks. rearview mirrors.
any hand held devices, other
• Be sure there are no obstacles equipment or vehicle systems • Be sure that all lights work.
behind you if you intend to back up. that distract the driver should • Check all gauges.
not be used during vehicle
Necessary inspections operation. • Check the operation of warning
lights when the ignition switch is
Fluid levels, such as engine oil, turned to the ON position.
engine coolant, brake fluid, and
• Release the parking brake and
washer fluid should be checked on a
make sure the brake warning light
regular basis, with the exact interval
goes off.
depending on the fluid. Further
details are provided in Chapter 7, For safe operation, be sure you are
“Maintenance”. familiar with your vehicle and its
equipment.
WARNING
- Check surrounding
Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for peo-
ple, especially children, before
putting a vehicle into D (Drive)
or R (Reverse).
5 3
WARNING - Driving while WARNING - Loose object WARNING - Fire risk

intoxicated Securely store items in your When you intend to park or stop
Do not drive while intoxicated. vehicle. When you make a sud- the vehicle with the engine on,
Drinking and driving is danger- den stop or turn the steering be careful not to depress the
ous. Even a small amount of wheel rapidly, loose objects accelerator pedal for a long
alcohol will affect your reflexes, may drop on the floor and it period of time. It may overheat
perceptions and judgment. could interfere with the opera- the engine or exhaust system
Driving while under the influ- tion of the foot pedals, possibly and cause a fire.
ence of drugs is as dangerous causing an accident.
as or more dangerous than driv-
ing drunk.
5 4
KEY POSITIONS
Illuminated ignition switch Ignition switch position The anti-theft steering column lock is
(if equipped) not a substitute for the parking brake.
LOCK Before leaving the driver’s seat,
always make sure the shift lever is
engaged in 1st gear for the manual
transaxle or P (Park) for the auto-
matic transaxle, set the parking
brake fully and shut the engine off.
OYDDDR3001 OYDDDR3002
Whenever a front door is opened, the The steering wheel locks to protect
ignition switch will illuminate for your against theft. The ignition key can be
convenience, provided the ignition removed only in the LOCK position.
switch is not in the ON position. The When turning the ignition switch to
light will go off immediately when the the LOCK position, push the key
ignition switch is turned on. It will inward at the ACC position and turn
also go off after about 30 seconds the key toward the LOCK position.
after the door is closed.
5 5
ACC (Accessory) START

The steering wheel is unlocked and Turn the ignition switch to the START WARNING - Ignition
electrical accessories are operative. position to start the engine. The switch
If difficulty is experienced turning the engine will crank until you release Never turn the ignition switch to
ignition switch to the ACC position, the key; then it returns to the ON LOCK or ACC while the vehicle
turn the key while turning the steer- position. The brake warning light can is moving. This would result in
ing wheel right and left to release the be checked in this position. loss of directional control and
tension. braking function, which could
cause an accident.
ON
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. This is WARNING - Steering
the normal running position after the wheel
engine is started.
Never reach for any controls
Do not leave the ignition switch ON if through the steering wheel
the engine is not running to prevent while the vehicle is in motion.
battery discharge. The presence of your hand or
arm in this area could cause a
loss of vehicle control.
5 6
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON (IF EQUIPPED)

Illuminated ENGINE ENGINE START/STOP button In an emergency situation while the
START/STOP button position vehicle is in motion, you are able to
turn the engine off and to the ACC
OFF position by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button for more than 2
seconds or 3 times successively
within 3 seconds. If the vehicle is still
moving, you can restart the engine
White without depressing the brake pedal
by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button with the shift
To turn off the engine (START/STOP
lever in the N (Neutral) position
position) or vehicle power (ON posi-
(if smart key equipped).
tion), press the ENGINE
OYDDDR3005
lever in the P (Park) position. When
Whenever the front door is opened, you press the ENGINE
the ENGINE START/STOP button START/STOP button without the shift
will illuminate for your convenience. lever in the P (Park) position, the
The light will go off after about 30 ENGINE START/STOP button will
seconds after the door is closed. not change to the OFF position but to
the ACC position.
5 7
ACC(Accessory) ON START/RUN
Yellow Green Not illuminated
Press the ENGINE START/STOP Press the ENGINE START/STOP To start the engine, depress the
button while it is in the OFF position button while it is in the ACC position brake pedal and press the ENGINE
without depressing the brake pedal. without depressing the brake pedal. START/STOP button with the shift
The steering wheel unlocks and The warning lights can be checked lever in the P (Park) or the N
electrical accessories are opera- before the engine is started. Do not (Nuetral) position. For your safety,
tional. leave the ENGINE START/STOP start the engine with the shift lever in
button in the ON position for a long the P (Park) position.
If the ENGINE START/STOP button
is in the ACC position for more than time. The battery may discharge, If you press the ENGINE
1 hour, the button is turned off auto- because the engine is not running. START/STOP button without
matically to prevent battery dis- depressing the brake pedal, the
charge. engine will not start and the button
will change as follows:
OFF ➔ ACC ➔ ON ➔ OFF
5 8
If you leave the ENGINE START/

STOP button in the ACC or ON posi-
tion for a long time, the battery will
discharge.
WARNING - Starting
vehicle
Never press the ENGINE
START/STOP button while the
vehicle is in motion except in an
emergency. This would result in
loss of directional control and
braking function, which could
cause an accident.
5 9
STARTING THE ENGINE

3.Turn the ignition switch to START
WARNING - Proper and hold it there until the engine CAUTION - Starter
footwear starts (a maximum of 10 seconds), Do not engage the starter for
Always wear appropriate shoes then release the key. more than 10 seconds. If the
when operating your vehicle. It should be started without engine stalls or fails to start,
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, depressing the accelerator. wait 5 to 10 seconds before re-
ski boots, sandals, etc.) may 4.Do not wait for the engine to warm engaging the starter. Improper
interfere with your ability to use up while the vehicle remains sta- use of the starter may damage
the brake and accelerator ped- tionary. it.
als.
Start driving at moderate engine
speeds. (Steep accelerating and
decelerating should be avoided.)
Starting the engine with an
ignition key (if equipped)
If the engine stalls while the vehicle
1.Make sure the parking brake is
is in motion, do not attempt to move
applied.
the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-
2.Manual Transaxle - Depress the tion. If traffic and road conditions per-
clutch pedal fully and shift the mit, you may put the shift lever in the
transaxle into Neutral. Keep the N (Neutral) position while the vehicle
clutch pedal and brake pedal is still moving and turn the ignition
depressed while turning the igni- switch to the START position in an
tion switch to the start position. attempt to restart the engine.
Automatic Transaxle - Place the
transaxle shift lever in P (Park).
Depress the brake pedal fully.
You can also start the engine when
the shift lever is in the N (Neutral)
position.
5 10
Starting the engine with a Whether the engine is cold or warm,

smart key (if equipped) it should be started without depress- WARNING - Unintended
ing the accelerator. vehicle movement
1.Carry the smart key or leave it
inside the vehicle. • Even if the smart key is in the vehi- Never leave the smart key in the
cle, but is far away from you, the vehicle with children or vehicle
2.Make sure the parking brake is
engine may not start. occupants who are unfamiliar
firmly applied
• When the ENGINE START/STOP with the vehicle operation.
3.Place the transaxle shift lever in P Pushing the ENGINE START/
button is in the ACC position or
(Park). STOP button while the smart
above, if any door is opened, the
4.Press the ENGINE START/STOP system checks for the smart key. If key is in the vehicle may result
button while depressing the brake the smart key is not in the vehi- in unintended engine activation
pedal. KEY
cle,the “ OUT ” or “ ” indicator will and/or unintended vehicle
5.Do not wait for the engine to warm blink or the warning "Key not in movement.
up while the vehicle remains sta- vehicle" will illuminate on the LCD
tionary. display. And if all doors are closed,
Start driving at moderate engine the chime will sound for 5 seconds.
speeds. (Steep accelerating and The indicator or warning will turn
decelerating should be avoided.) off while the vehicle is moving.
Always have the smart key with
you.
The engine will start only when the
smart key is in the vehicle.
5 11
Do not press the ENGINE START/

STOP button for more than 10 sec-
onds except when the stop lamp fuse
is blown.
OYDDDR3006
• If the battery is weak or the smart
key does not work correctly, you
can start the engine by pressing
the engine start/stop button with
the smart key.
• When the stop lamp fuse is blown,
you can not start the engine nor-
mally. Replace the fuse with a new
one. If it is not possible, you can
start the engine by pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button for
10 seconds while it is in the ACC
position. The engine can start with-
out depressing the brake pedal.
But for your safety always depress
the brake pedal before starting the
engine.
5 12
MANUAL TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

Manual transaxle operation
CAUTION - Downshifting
The manual transaxle has 6 forward
gears. Do not downshift more than 2
gears or downshift the gear
This shift pattern is imprinted on the when the engine is running at
shift knob. The transaxle is fully syn- high speed (5,000 RPM or high-
chronized in all forward gears so er). Such a downshifting may
shifting to either a higher or a lower damage the engine, clutch and
gear is easily accomplished. the transaxle.
Depress the clutch pedal down fully
while shifting, then release it slowly.
If your vehicle is equipped with an
ignition lock switch, the engine will
The shift lever can be moved without- not start when starting the engine
pressing the button. without depressing the clutch pedal.
The button (1) should be pressed when
The shift lever must be returned to
moving the shift lever into reverse. the neutral position before shifting
into R (Reverse). The button (1)
OYDDDR2101
located below the shift knob must be
pulled upward while moving the shift
lever to the R (Reverse) position.
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before shifting into R
(Reverse).
Never operate the engine with the
tachometer (rpm) in the red zone.
5 13
• During cold weather, shifting may Using the clutch

be difficult until the transaxle lubri- WARNING - Automatic The clutch should be depressed all
cant is warmed up. This is normal transaxle the way to the floor before shifting,
and not harmful to the transaxle. Before leaving the driver's seat, then released slowly. The clutch
• If you've come to a complete stop always make sure the shift lever pedal should always be fully
and it's hard to shift into 1st or R is in the P (Park) position; then released while driving. Do not rest
(Reverse), leave the shift lever at set the parking brake fully and your foot on the clutch pedal while
neutral position and release the shut the engine off. Do not use driving. This can cause unnecessary
clutch. Depress the clutch pedal the P position in place of the wear. Do not partially engage the
and then shift into 1st or R parking brake. clutch to hold the vehicle on an
(Reverse) gear position. Always make sure the shift incline. This causes unnecessary
lever is latched in the P position wear. Use the foot brake or parking
and set the parking brake fully. brake to hold the vehicle on an
CAUTION - Premature incline. Do not operate the clutch
wear Unexpected and sudden vehicle
movement can occur if these pedal rapidly and repeatedly.
Do not use the shift lever as a precautions are not followed.
handrest during driving, as this
can result in premature wear of Downshifting
the transaxle shift forks. When you must slow down in heavy
traffic or while driving up steep hills,
downshift before the engine starts to
labor. Downshifting reduces the
chance of stalling and gives better
acceleration when you need to
increase your speed again. When the
vehicle is traveling down steep hills,
downshifting helps maintain safe
speed and prolongs brake life.
5 14
Good driving practices • Exercise extreme caution when

• Never take the vehicle out of gear driving on a slippery surface. Be
and coast down a hill. This is especially careful when braking,
extremely hazardous. Always leave accelerating or shifting gears. On a
the vehicle in gear. slippery surface, an abrupt change
in vehicle speed can cause the
• Don't "ride" the brakes. This can drive wheels to lose traction and
cause them to overheat and mal- the vehicle to go out of control.
function. Instead, when you are
driving down a long hill, shift to a • Always buckle-up! In a collision,
lower gear. When you do this, an unbelted occupant is signifi-
engine braking will help slow down cantly more likely to be seriously
the vehicle. injured or killed than a properly
belted occupant.
• Slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. This will help avoid • Never exceed posted speed limits.
over-revving the engine, which can
cause damage. WARNING - Vehicle
• Slow down when you encounter handling
cross winds. This gives you much Avoid high speeds when cor-
better control of your vehicle. nering or turning. High speed
• Be sure the vehicle is completely cornering and turning increas-
stopped before you attempt to shift es the risk of vehicle rollover
into R (Reverse). The transaxle can due to loss of vehicle control.
be damaged if you do not. Rollover accidents are extreme-
ly violent and unpredictable.
5 15
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE (IF EQUIPPED)

Automatic transaxle operation
The automatic transaxle has 6 for-
ward speeds and one reverse speed.
Shift lever The individual speeds are selected
automatically, depending on the
Button position of the shift lever.
+ (UP) ✽ NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle,
if the battery has been disconnected,
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and the shifting
sequence will adjust after shifts are
cycled a few times by the TCM
(Transaxle Control Module) or
PCM (Powertrain Control Module).
- (DOWN)
To shift, depress the brake pedal and press the button.

Press the button when shifting.
The shift lever can be shifted freely.
OYDDDR4102N
5 16
For smooth operation, depress the Transaxle ranges

brake pedal when shifting from N CAUTION - Transaxle The indicator light in the instrument
(Neutral) to a forward or reverse To avoid damage to your cluster displays the shift lever posi-
gear. transaxle, do not accelerate the tion when the ignition switch is in the
engine in R (Reverse) or any for- ON position.
ward gear position with the
WARNING - Automatic brakes on. The transaxle may be
Transaxle damaged if you shift into P P (Park)
Before leaving the driver's seat, (Park) while the vehicle is in Always come to a complete stop
always make sure the shift lever motion. before shifting into P (Park). This
is engaged in P (Park), set the position locks the transaxle and pre-
parking brake fully and shut the vents the front wheels from rotating.
engine off. Unexpected and When stopped on an upgrade, do not
sudden vehicle movement may hold the vehicle with engine power.
Use the service brake or the parking Shifting into P (Park) while the vehi-
occur if these precautions are
brake. cle is in motion will cause the drive
not followed.
wheels to lock which will cause you
to lose control of the vehicle.
5 17
R (Reverse) D (Drive)
Use this position to drive the vehicle This is the normal forward driving
backward. position. The transaxle will automati- Sports mode
+ (UP)
cally shift through a 6-gear
sequence, providing the best fuel
CAUTION - Shifting economy and power.
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R + ( D OW N )
For extra power when passing anoth-
(Reverse); you may damage the er vehicle or climbing grades,
transaxle if you shift into R depress the accelerator fully, at
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in which time the transaxle will auto-
motion, except when “Rocking matically downshift to the next lower OYDDDR4103N
the Vehicle” explained in this gear. Sports mode
section. Whether the vehicle is stopped or in
motion, sports mode is selected by
pushing the shift lever from the D
N (Neutral) (Drive) position into the manual gate.
The wheels and transaxle are not To return to D (Drive) range opera-
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely tion, push the shift lever back into the
even on the slightest incline unless main gate.
the parking brake or service brakes
are applied. In sports mode, moving the shift
lever backwards and forwards will
allow you to make gearshifts rapidly.
In contrast to a manual transaxle, the
sports mode allows gearshifts with
the accelerator pedal depressed.
5 18
Up (+) : Push the lever forward • To maintain the required levels of Paddle shifter (if equipped)
once to shift up one gear. vehicle performance and safety,
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards the system may not execute cer-
once to shift down one tain gearshifts when the shift lever
gear. is operated.
• When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into the
• In sports mode, the driver must +(up) position. This causes the
execute upshifts in accordance transaxle to shift into the 2nd gear
with road conditions, taking care to which is better for smooth driving
keep the engine speed below the on a slippery road. Push the shift
red zone. lever to the -(down) side to shift
• In sports mode, only the 6 forward back to the 1st gear.
gears can be selected. To reverse OYDDDR2111
or park the vehicle, move the shift The paddle shifter is available when
lever to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) the shift lever is in the D position or
position as required. the sport mode.
• In sports mode, downshifts are
made automatically when the vehi-
cle slows down. When the vehicle
stops, 1st gear is automatically
selected.
• In sports mode, when the engine
rpm approaches the red zone shift
points are varied to upshift auto-
matically.
5 19
With the shift lever in the D position Shift lock system (if equipped)
The paddle shifter can operate when For your safety, the automatic
the vehicle speed is more than 6.2 transaxle has a shift lock system
mph. which prevents shifting the transaxle
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once out of P (Park) unless the brake
to shift up or down one gear and the pedal is depressed.
system changes from automatic To shift the transaxle from P (Park)
mode to manual mode. into R (Reverse):
If the vehicle speed is lower than 6.2 1.Depress and hold the brake pedal.
mph, if you depress the accelerator 2.Start the engine or turn the ignition
pedal for more than 7 seconds or if switch to the ON position. OYDDDR4104
you shift the shift lever from D to
sports mode and shift it from sports 3.Move the shift lever. Shift-lock override
mode to D again, the system change If the brake pedal is repeatedly (with smart key system)
from manual mode to automatic depressed and released with the If the shift lever cannot be moved
mode. shift lever in the P (Park) position, a from the P (Park) position into the R
chattering noise near the shift lever (Reverse) position with the brake
may be heard. This is a normal con- pedal depressed, continue depress-
With the shift lever in the sports mode dition. ing the brake, then do the following:
Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once
to shift up or down one gear. 1.Press the shift-lock release button.
WARNING - Shifting from 2.Move the shift lever.
park 3.Have your vehicle inspected by an
If you pull the [+] and [-] paddle
shifters at the same time, you can't Always fully depress the brake authorized Kia dealer immediately.
shift the gear. pedal before and while shifting
out of the P (Park) position into
another position to avoid inad-
vertent motion of the vehicle.
5 20
Ignition key interlock system Moving up a steep grade from a

(if equipped) standing start
The ignition key cannot be removed To move up a steep grade from a
unless the shift lever is in the P standing start, depress the brake
(Park) position. pedal, shift the shift lever to D
(Drive). Select the appropriate gear
depending on load weight and steep-
Good driving practices ness of the grade, and release the
• Never move the shift lever from P parking brake. Depress the accelera-
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other tor gradually while releasing the
position with the accelerator pedal service brakes.
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in
motion.
• Slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. Otherwise, the lower
gear may not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do
not depend on placing the
transaxle in P (Park) to keep the
vehicle from moving.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator pedal.
5 21
BRAKE SYSTEM
Power brakes To dry the brakes, apply them lightly
CAUTION - Brake pedal while maintaining a safe forward
Your vehicle has power-assisted
brakes that adjust automatically Do not drive with your foot rest- speed until brake performance
through normal usage. ing on the brake pedal. This will returns to normal.
create abnormally high brake
In the event that the power-assisted temperatures which can cause
brakes lose power because of a In the event of brake failure
excessive brake lining and pad
stalled engine or some other reason, wear. If service brakes fail to operate while
you can still stop your vehicle by the vehicle is in motion, you can
applying greater force to the brake make an emergency stop with the
pedal than you normally would. The parking brake. The stopping dis-
stopping distance, however, will be WARNING - Steep hill tance, however, will be much greater
longer. braking than normal.
When the engine is not running, the Avoid continuous application of
reserve brake power is partially the brakes when descending a
depleted each time the brake pedal long or steep hill by shifting to a WARNING - Parking brake
is applied. Do not pump the brake lower gear. Continuous brake Avoid applying the parking
pedal when the power assist has application will cause the brake to stop the vehicle while it
been interrupted. brakes to overheat and could is moving except in an emer-
Pump the brake pedal only when result in a temporary loss of gency situation. Applying the
necessary to maintain steering con- braking performance. parking brake while the vehicle
trol on slippery surfaces. is moving at normal speeds can
cause a sudden loss of control
Wet brakes may impair the vehicle’s of the vehicle. If you must use
ability to safely slow down; the vehi- the parking brake to stop the
cle may also pull to one side when vehicle, use great caution in
the brakes are applied. Applying the applying the brake.
brakes lightly will indicate whether
they have been affected in this way.
5 22
Disc brakes wear indicator Parking brake

When your brake pads are worn and WARNING - Brake wear Applying the parking brake
new pads are required, you will hear Do not ignore high pitched wear
a high-pitched warning sound from sounds from your brakes. If you
your front brakes or rear brakes (if ignore this audible warning, you
equipped). You may hear this sound will eventually lose braking per-
come and go or it may occur when- formance, which could lead to a
ever you depress the brake pedal. serious accident.
Please remember that some driving
conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when you first apply (or
lightly apply) the brakes. This is nor-
mal and does not indicate a problem
with your brakes.
OYDDDR2105
CAUTION - Replace brake To engage the parking brake, first

pads apply the foot brake and then without
Do not continue to drive with pressing the release button in, pull
worn brake pads. Continuing to the parking brake lever up as far as
drive with worn brake pads can possible. In addition it is recommend-
damage the braking system and ed that when parking the vehicle on
result in costly brake repairs. a gradient, the shift lever should be
positioned in the appropriate low
gear for manual transaxle vehicles or
Always replace the front or rear in the P (Park) position for automatic
brake pads as pairs. transaxle vehicles.
5 23
Releasing the parking brake

CAUTION - Parking brake WARNING - Parking brake
Driving with the parking brake use
applied will cause excessive • Never allow a passenger to
brake pad (or lining) and brake touch the parking brake. If the
rotor wear. parking brake is released
unintentionally, serious injury
may occur.
• All vehicles should always
have the parking brake fully
engaged when parking to
avoid inadvertent movement
OYDDDR2106
of the vehicle which can injure
occupants or pedestrians.
To release the parking brake, first
apply the foot brake and pull up the
parking brake lever slightly.
Secondly, press the release button
(1) and lower the parking brake lever
(2) while holding the button.
5 24
If at all possible, stop driving the Anti-lock brake system (ABS)

vehicle immediately. If that is not pos- ABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci-
sible, use extreme caution while dents due to improper or dangerous
operating the vehicle and only con- driving maneuvers. Even though
tinue to drive the vehicle until you vehicle control is improved during
can reach a safe location or repair emergency braking, always maintain
shop. a safe distance between you and
objects ahead. Vehicle speeds
should always be reduced during
extreme road conditions.
W-75
The vehicle should be driven at
reduced speeds in the following cir-
Check the brake warning light by cumstances:
turning the ignition switch ON (do not • When driving on rough, gravel or
start the engine). This light will illumi- snow-covered roads
nate when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the • When driving on roads where the
START or ON position. road surface is pitted or has differ-
ent surface heights.
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is fully released and the brake Driving in these conditions increases
warning light is off. the stopping distance for your vehi-
cle.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released
while the engine is running, there
may be a malfunction in the brake
system. Immediate attention is nec-
essary.
5 25
The ABS continuously senses the ✽ NOTICE

speed of the wheels. If the wheels A click sound may be heard in the
are going to lock, the ABS system engine compartment when the vehi-
repeatedly modulates the hydraulic cle begins to move after the engine is
brake pressure to the wheels. started. These conditions are normal
When you apply your brakes under and indicate that the anti-lock brake
conditions which may lock the system is functioning properly.
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’
sound from the brakes, or feel a cor- • Even with the anti-lock brake sys-
responding sensation in the brake tem, your vehicle still requires suf-
pedal. This is normal and it means ficient stopping distance. Always
your ABS is active. maintain a safe distance from the W-78
In order to obtain the maximum ben- vehicle in front of you. The ABS warning light will stay on for
efit from your ABS in an emergency • Always slow down when cornering. approximately 3 seconds after the
situation, do not attempt to modulate The anti-lock brake system cannot ignition switch is ON. During that
your brake pressure and do not try to prevent accidents resulting from time, the ABS will go through self-
pump your brakes. Press your brake excessive speeds. diagnosis and the light will go off if
pedal as hard as possible or as hard • On loose or uneven road surfaces, everything is normal. If the light stays
as the situation allows the ABS to operation of the anti-lock brake on, you may have a problem with
control the force being delivered to system may result in a longer stop- your ABS but your regular brakes will
the brakes. ping distance than for vehicles work normally. Contact an authorized
equipped with a conventional Kia dealer as soon as possible.
brake system.
5 26
• When you drive on a road with Electronic stability control Electronic stability control (ESC) will
poor traction, such as an icy road, (ESC) not prevent accidents. Excessive
and operated your brakes continu- speed in turns, abrupt maneuvers
ously, the ABS will be active con- and hydroplaning on wet surfaces
tinuously and the ABS warning can still result in serious accidents.
light may illuminate. Pull your vehi- Only a safe and attentive driver can
cle over to a safe place and stop prevent accidents by avoiding
the engine. maneuvers that cause the vehicle to
• Restart the engine. If the ABS lose traction. Even with ESC
warning light is off, then your ABS installed, always follow all the normal
is normal. Otherwise, you may precautions for driving - including
have a problem with the ABS. driving at safe speeds for the condi-
Contact an authorized Kia dealer tions.
as soon as possible. The Electronic Stability Control
OYDDDR2107 (ESC) system is an electronic sys-
tem designed to help the driver main-
✽ NOTICE The Electronic Stability control
tain vehicle control under adverse
(ESC) system is designed to stabi-
When you jump start your vehicle lize the vehicle during cornering conditions. It is not a substitute for
because of a drained battery, the maneuvers. ESC checks where you safe driving practices. Factors includ-
engine may not run as smoothly and are steering and where the vehicle is ing speed, road conditions and driv-
the ABS warning light may turn on actually going. ESC applies the er steering input can all affect
at the same time. This happens brakes on individual wheels and whether ESC will be effective in pre-
because of the low battery voltage. It intervenes with the engine manage- venting a loss of control. It is still your
does not mean your ABS has mal- ment system to stabilize the vehicle. responsibility to drive and corner at
functioned. reasonable speeds and to leave a
• Do not pump your brakes! sufficient margin of safety.
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
5 27
When you apply your brakes under ESC operation When operating
conditions which may lock the ESC ON condition When the ESC is in opera-
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’ tion, ESC indicator light
sound from the brakes, or feel a cor- • When the ignition is turned
ON, ESC and ESC OFF blinks.
responding sensation in the brake -
indicator lights illuminate • When the Electronic
pedal. This is normal and it means
for approximately 3 sec- Stability Control is operat-
your ESC is active.
onds, then ESC is turned ing properly, you can feel a
on. slight pulsation in the vehi-
✽ NOTICE • Press the ESC OFF but- cle. This is only the effect
For maximum protection, always ton for at least half a sec- of brake control and indi-
wear your seat belt. No system, no ond after turning the igni- cates nothing unusual.
matter how advanced, can compen- tion ON to turn ESC off. • When moving out of the
sate for all driver error and/or driv- (ESC OFF indicator will mud or slippery road,
ing conditions. Always drive respon- illuminate). To turn the pressing the accelerator
sibly. ESC on, press the ESC pedal may not cause the
OFF button (ESC OFF engine rpm (revolutions
indicator light will go off). per minute) to increase.
• When starting the engine,
you may hear a slight tick-
ing sound. This is the ESC
performing an automatic
system self-check and
does not indicate a prob-
lem.
5 28
ESC operation off • ESC off state 2 Indicator light

ESC OFF state To cancel ESC operation,
■ ESC indicator light
This car has 2 kinds of ESC press the ESC OFF button
off states. (ESC OFF ) for more than 3
seconds. ESC OFF indicator
If the engine stops when light (ESC OFF ) illuminates
ESC is off, ESC remains off. and ESC OFF warning chime
Upon restarting the engine, will sound. At this state, the ■ ESC OFF indicator light
the ESC will automatically engine control function and
turn on again. brake control function do not
operate. It means the car sta-
• ESC off state 1 bility control function does not
To cancel ESC operation, operate any more.
press the ESC OFF button When the ignition switch is turned
(ESC OFF ) shortly (ESC ON, the indicator light illuminates,
OFF indicator light (ESC then goes off if ESC system is oper-
OFF ) illuminates). At this ating normally.
state, the engine control The ESC indicator light blinks when-
function does not operate. It ever ESC is operating.
means the traction control
function does not operate. The ESC indicator light blinks when-
Brake control function only ever ESC is operating or illuminates
operates. when ESC fails to operate.
The ESC OFF indicator light comes
on when the ESC is turned off with
the button.
5 29
Driving with varying tire or wheel ESC OFF usage

sizes may cause the ESC system to When driving WARNING - Operating
malfunction. When replacing tires, ESC
make sure they are the same size as • It’s a good idea to keep the ESC
turned on for daily driving whenev- Never press the ESC OFF but-
your original tires. ton while ESC is operating.
er possible.
• To turn ESC off while driving, press If the ESC is turned off while
WARNING - Electronic sta- the ESC OFF button while driving ESC is operating, the vehicle
bility control on a flat road surface. may go out of control.
Drive carefully even though Never press the ESC OFF button
your vehicle has Electronic while ESC is operating (ESC indica-
Stability Control. It can only tor light blinks).
assist you in maintaining con- If ESC is turned off while ESC is
trol under certain circum- operating, the vehicle may slip out of
stances. control.
5 30
Hill-start assist control (HAC) Vehicle stability management

Hill start Assist Control is a comfort
WARNING - Maintaining (VSM)
function. The main intent is to pre- Brake Pressure on Incline
This system provides further
vent the vehicle from rolling back- HAC does not replace the need enhancements to vehicle stability
wards while driving uphill on an to apply brakes while stopped on and steering responses when a vehi-
inclined surface. HAC holds the brak- an incline. While stopped, make cle is driving on a slippery road or a
ing pressure builtup by driver during sure you maintain brake pres- vehicle detected changes in coeffi-
stopping procedure for 2 seconds sure sufficient to prevent your cient of friction between right wheels
after releasing brake pedal. vehicle from rolling backward and left wheels when braking.
During the pressure-hold period, the and causing an accident. Don’t
driver has enough time to press the release the brake pedal until you
accelerator pedal to drive off. are ready to accelerate forward. VSM operation
The braking pressure is reduced as When the VSM is in operation, ESC
soon as the system detects the dri- indicator light ( ) blinks.
• The HAC does not operate when
ver’s intention to drive off. When the vehicle stability manage-
the transaxle shift lever is in the P
ment is operating properly, you can
(Park) or N (Neutral) position.
feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle
• The HAC activates even though and/or abnormal steering responses
the ESP is off but it does not acti- (EPS). This is only the effect of brake
vate when the ESP has malfunc- and EPS control and indicates noth-
tioned. ing unusual.
5 31
The VSM does not operate when: VSM operation off • The VSM is designed to function
• Driving on bank roads such as gra- If you press the ESC OFF button to above approximately 18 mph (30
dient or incline turn off the ESC, the VSM will also km/h) when a vehicle is braking on
cancel and the ESC OFF indicator a split-mu road. The split-mu road
• Driving rearward
light ( ) illuminates. is made of surfaces which have dif-
• ESC OFF indicator light ( ) ferent friction forces.
remains on the instrument To turn on the VSM, press the button
again. The ESC OFF indicator light • The Vehicle Stability Management
cluster
goes out. system is not a substitute for safe
• EPS indicator light remains on the driving practices but a supplemen-
instrument cluster tary function only. It is the respon-
Malfunction indicator sibility of the driver to always check
The VSM can be deactivated even if the speed and the distance to the
you don’t cancel the VSM operation vehicle ahead. Always hold the
by pressing the ESC OFF button. It steering wheel firmly while driving.
indicates that a malfunction has • Your vehicle is designed to activate
been detected somewhere in the according to the driver’s intention,
Electric Power Steering system or even with installed VSM. Always
VSM system. If the ESC indicator follow all the normal precautions
light ( ) or EPS warning light for driving at safe speeds for the
remains on, take your vehicle to an conditions – including driving in
authorized Kia dealer and have the inclement weather and on a slip-
system checked. pery road.
• The VSM is designed to function
above approximately 9 mph (15
km/h) on curves.
5 32
Good braking practices • Don't "ride" the brake pedal.

WARNING - Tire/Wheel • Check to be sure the parking brake Resting your foot on the brake
size is not engaged and that the park- pedal while driving can be danger-
When replacing tires and ing brake indicator light is out ous because the brakes might
wheels, make sure they are the before driving away. overheat and lose their effective-
same size as the original tires ness. It also increases the wear of
• Driving through water may get the the brake components.
and wheels installed. Driving brakes wet. They can also get wet
with varying tire or wheel sizes when the vehicle is washed. Wet • If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
may affect the vehicle's han- brakes can be dangerous! Your ing, apply the brakes gently and
dling. vehicle will not stop as quickly if the keep the vehicle pointed straight
brakes are wet. Wet brakes may ahead while you slow down. When
cause the vehicle to pull to one you are moving slowly enough for it
side. to be safe to do so, pull off the road
and stop in a safe place.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action • If your vehicle is equipped with an
returns to normal, taking care to automatic transaxle, don't let your
keep the vehicle under control at vehicle creep forward. To avoid
all times. If the braking action does creeping forward, keep your foot
not return to normal, stop as soon firmly on the brake pedal when the
as it is safe to do so and call an vehicle is stopped.
authorized Kia dealer for assis-
tance.
• Don't coast down hills with the
vehicle out of gear. This is extreme-
ly hazardous. Keep the vehicle in
gear at all times, use the brakes to
slow down, then shift to a lower
gear so that engine braking will
help you maintain a safe speed.
5 33
• Be cautious when parking on a hill. • Do not hold the vehicle on the

Firmly engage the parking brake upgrade with the accelerator
and place the shift lever in P (auto- pedal. This can cause the transaxle
matic transaxle) or in first or to overheat. Always use the brake
reverse gear (manual transaxle). If pedal or parking brake.
your vehicle is facing downhill, turn
the front wheels into the curb to
help keep the vehicle from rolling. If
your vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb to help keep the vehicle from
rolling. If there is no curb or if it is
required by other conditions to
keep the vehicle from rolling, block
the wheels.
• Under some conditions your park-
ing brake can freeze in the
engaged position. This is most like-
ly to happen when there is an
accumulation of snow or ice
around or near the rear brakes or if
the brakes are wet. If there is a risk
that the parking brake may freeze,
apply it only temporarily while you
put the shift lever in P (automatic
transaxle) or in first or reverse gear
(manual transaxle) and block the
rear wheels so the vehicle cannot
roll. Then release the parking
brake.
5 34
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

The cruise control system allows you ✽ NOTICE Cruise control switch
to program the vehicle to maintain a • During normal cruise control
constant speed without depressing operation, when the SET switch is
the accelerator pedal. activated or reactivated after
This system is designed to function applying the brakes, the cruise
above approximately 40 km/h (25 control will energize after approx-
mph). imately 3 seconds. This delay is
If the cruise control is left on, normal.
(CRUISE indicator light in the instru- • To activate cruise control, depress
ment cluster illuminated) the cruise the brake pedal at least once after
control can be switched on acciden- turning the ignition switch to the
tally. Keep the cruise control system ON position or starting the engine.
off (CRUISE indicator light OFF) This is to check if the brake switch
OYDDDR3027
when the cruise control is not in use, which is important part to cancel
to avoid inadvertently setting a cruise control is in normal condi- CRUISE : Turns cruise control sys-
speed. tion. tem on or off.
Use the cruise control system only CANCEL: Cancels cruise control
when traveling on open highways in operation.
WARNING - Misuse of
good weather. Cruise Control RES+: Resumes or increases cruise
Do not use the cruise control when control speed.
Do not use cruise control if the
driving in heavy or varying traffic, or traffic situation does not allow SET-: Sets or decreases cruise con-
on slippery (rainy, icy or snow-cov- you to drive safely at a constant trol speed.
ered) or winding roads or over 6% speed and with sufficient dis-
up-hill or down-hill roads. tance to the vehicle in front.
5 35
To set cruise control speed: ✽ NOTICE - Manual transaxle

For manual transaxle vehicles, you
should depress the brake pedal at
least once to set the cruise control
after starting the engine.
OYDDDR3023
OYDEDR3022 3.Move the lever down (to SET-), and

release it at the desired speed. The
1.Press the CRUISE button on the SET indicator light in the instru-
steering wheel to turn the system ment cluster will illuminate.
on. The CRUISE indicator light in Release the accelerator pedal at
the instrument cluster will illumi- the same time. The desired speed
nate. will automatically be maintained.
2.Accelerate to the desired speed, On a steep grade, the vehicle may
which must be more than 30 km/h slow down or speed up slightly while
(20 mph). going uphill or downhill.
5 36
To increase cruise control set To decrease the cruising To temporarily accelerate with
speed: speed: the cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with cruise control operation or
change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
OYDDDR3024 OYDDDR3023
Follow either of these procedures: Follow either of these procedures:

• Move the lever up (to RES+) and • Move the lever down (to SET-) and
hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate. hold it. Your vehicle will gradually
Release the lever at the speed you slow down. Release the lever at the
want. speed you want to maintain.
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and • Move the lever down (to SET-) and
release it immediately. release it immediately.
The cruising speed will increase by The cruising speed will decrease
2 km/h (or 1 mph) each time you by 2 km/h (or 1 mph) each time you
move the lever up (to RES+) in this move the lever down (to SET-) in
manner. this manner.
5 37
To cancel cruise control, do Each of these actions will cancel To resume cruising speed at
one of the following: cruise control operation (the SET more than approximately 40
indicator light in the instrument clus- km/h (25 mph):
ter will go off), but it will not turn the
system off. If you wish to resume
cruise control operation, move up the
lever (to RES+) located on your
steering wheel. You will return to your
previously preset speed.
OYDDDR3025
OYDDDR3024
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Depress the clutch pedal with a If any method other than the
manual transaxle. CRUISE button was used to cancel
cruising speed and the system is still
• Shift into N (Neutral) with an auto-
activated, the most recent set speed
matic transaxle.
will automatically resume when you
• Press the CANCEL button. move the lever up (to RES+).
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower It will not resume, however, if the
than the memory speed by 15 vehicle speed has dropped below
km/h (9 mph). approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 40 km/h (25
mph).
5 38
✽ NOTICE To turn cruise control off, do

Always check the road conditions one of the following:
when you move the lever up (to
RES+) to resume the speed.
OYDDDR3022
• Press the CRUISE button (the

CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster will go off).
• Turn the ignition off.
Both of these actions cancel cruise
control operation. If you want to
resume cruise control operation,
repeat the steps provided in “To set
cruise control speed” on the previous
page.
5 39
ACTIVE ECO SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

Active ECO operation Limitation of Active ECO oper-
ation:
If the following conditions occur while
Active ECO is operating, the system
operation is limited even though
there is no change in the ECO indi-
cator.
• When the coolant temperature is
low:
The system will be limited until
engine performance becomes nor-
mal.
OYDNDR3020
• When driving up a hill:
Active ECO helps improve fuel effi- The system will be limited to gain
ciency by controlling the engine and power when driving uphill because
transaxle. But fuel-efficiency can be the engine torque is restricted.
affected by the driver's driving habits • When using sports mode:
and road conditions.
The system will be limited accord-
• When the Active ECO button is ing to the shift location.
pressed the ECO indicator (green)
will illuminate to show that the • When the accelerator pedal is fully
Active ECO is operating. pressed for a few seconds:
• When the Active ECO is activated, The system will be limited,as it has
it does not turn off even though the determined that the driver has
engine is restarted again. To turn accelerated judging that the driver
off the system, press the active wants to speed up.
ECO button again.
• If Active ECO is turned off, it will
return to the normal mode.
5 40
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends • Don't "ride" the brake pedal. This • Keep your vehicle in good condi-
mainly on your style of driving, where can increase fuel consumption and tion. For better fuel economy and
you drive and when you drive. also increase wear on these com- reduced maintenance costs, main-
Each of these factors affects how ponents. In addition, driving with tain your vehicle in accordance
many miles (kilometers) you can get your foot resting on the brake pedal with the maintenance schedule in
from a gallon (liter) of fuel. To operate may cause the brakes to overheat, section 7. If you drive your vehicle
your vehicle as economically as pos- which reduces their effectiveness in severe conditions, more frequent
sible, use the following driving sug- and may lead to more serious con- maintenance is required (see sec-
gestions to help save money in both sequences. tion 7 for details).
fuel and repairs: • Take care of your tires. Keep them • Keep your vehicle clean. For maxi-
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a inflated to the recommended pres- mum service, your vehicle should
moderate rate. Don't make "jack- sure. Incorrect inflation, either too be kept clean and free of corrosive
rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts much or too little, results in unnec- materials. It is especially important
and maintain a steady cruising essary tire wear. Check the tire that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be
speed. Don't race between stop- pressures at least once a month. allowed to accumulate on the
lights. Try to adjust your speed to • Be sure that the wheels are underside of the vehicle. This extra
the traffic so you don't have to aligned correctly. Improper align- weight can result in increased fuel
change speeds unnecessarily. ment can result from hitting curbs consumption and also contribute to
Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos- or driving too fast over irregular corrosion.
sible. Always maintain a safe dis- surfaces. Poor alignment causes • Travel lightly. Don't carry unneces-
tance from other vehicles so you faster tire wear and may also result sary weight in your vehicle. Weight
can avoid unnecessary braking. in other problems as well as reduces fuel economy.
This also reduces brake wear. greater fuel consumption. • Don't let the engine idle longer
• Drive at a moderate speed. The than necessary. If you are waiting
faster you drive, the more fuel your (and not in traffic), turn off your
vehicle uses. Driving at a moderate engine and restart only when
speed, especially on the highway, you're ready to go.
is one of the most effective ways to
reduce fuel consumption.
5 41
• Remember, your vehicle does not • Use your air conditioning sparingly.
require extended warm-up. After The air conditioning system is WARNING - Engine off
the engine has started, allow the operated by engine power so your during
engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds fuel economy is reduced when you motion
prior to placing the vehicle in gear. use it. Never turn the engine off to
In very cold weather, however, give • Open windows at high speeds can coast down hills or anytime the
your engine a slightly longer warm- reduce fuel economy. vehicle is in motion. The power
up period. steering and power brakes will
• Fuel economy is reduced by cross-
• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine. winds and headwinds. To help off- not function properly without
Lugging is driving too slowly in a set some of this loss, slow down the engine running. In addition,
very high gear resulting in engine when driving in these conditions. turning off the ignition while
bucking. If this happens, shift to a driving could engage the steer-
lower gear. Over-revving is racing ing wheel lock resulting in loss
the engine beyond its safe limit. Keeping a vehicle in good operating of vehicle steering. Keep the
This can be avoided by shifting at condition is important both for econ- engine on and downshift to an
the recommended speed. omy and safety. Therefore, have an appropriate gear for engine
authorized Kia dealer perform braking effect.
scheduled inspections and mainte-
nance.
5 42
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS

Hazardous driving conditions Do not pump the brake pedal on a Rocking the vehicle
When hazardous driving conditions vehicle equipped with ABS. If it is necessary to rock the vehicle
are encountered such as water, • If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, to free it from snow, sand, or mud,
snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar haz- use second gear. Accelerate slow- first turn the steering wheel right and
ards, follow these suggestions: ly to avoid spinning the drive left to clear the area around your
• Drive cautiously and allow extra wheels. front wheels. Then, shift back and
distance for braking. • Use sand, rock salt, or other non- forth between 1st (First) and R
slip material under the drive (Reverse) in vehicles equipped with
• Avoid sudden braking or steering. a manual transaxle or R (Reverse)
wheels to provide traction when
• When braking with non-ABS stalled in ice, snow, or mud. and any forward gear in vehicles
brakes pump the brake pedal with equipped with an automatic
a light up-and-down motion until transaxle. Do not race the engine,
the vehicle is stopped. WARNING - Downshifting and spin the wheels as little as pos-
Do not downshift with an auto- sible. If you are still stuck after a few
matic transaxle while driving on tries, have the vehicle pulled out by a
slippery surfaces. The sudden tow vehicle to avoid engine overheat-
change in tire speed could ing and possible damage to the
cause the tires to skid and transaxle.
result in an accident. The ESC system should be turned
OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.
CAUTION - Vehicle
rocking
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine overheating, transaxle
damage or failure, and tire dam-
age.
5 43
Smooth cornering Driving at night

CAUTION - Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, espe-
cially at speeds more than 56
km/h (35 mph). Spinning the
wheels at high speeds when the
vehicle is stationary could
cause a tire to overheat which
could result in tire damage.
WARNING - Sudden
vehicle movement OBH058035L OMC035004
Do not attempt to rock the vehi-
Avoid braking or gear changing in Because night driving presents more
cle if people or objects are near-
corners, especially when roads are hazards than driving in the daylight,
by. The vehicle may suddenly
wet. Ideally, corners should always here are some important tips to
move forward or backwards as
be taken under gentle acceleration. If remember:
it becomes unstuck.
you follow these suggestions, tire • Slow down and keep more dis-
wear will be held to a minimum. tance between you and other vehi-
cles, as it may be more difficult to
see at night, especially in areas
where there may not be any street
lights.
5 44
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the Driving in the rain • If your tires are not in good condi-
glare from other driver's head- tion, making a quick stop on wet
lights. pavement can cause a skid and
• Keep your headlights clean and possibly lead to an accident. Be
properly aimed on vehicles not sure your tires are in good shape.
equipped with the automatic head- • Turn on your headlights to make it
light aiming feature. Dirty or easier for others to see you.
improperly aimed headlights will • Driving too fast through large pud-
make it much more difficult to see dles can affect your brakes. If you
at night. must go through puddles, try to
• Avoid staring directly at the head- drive through them slowly.
lights of oncoming vehicles. You • If you believe you may have gotten
could be temporarily blinded, and it 1JBB3303 your brakes wet, apply them lightly
will take several seconds for your while driving until normal braking
eyes to readjust to the darkness. Rain and wet roads can make driving operation returns.
dangerous, especially if you’re not
prepared for the slick pavement.
Here are a few things to consider Driving in flooded areas
when driving in the rain: Avoid driving through flooded areas
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder unless you are sure the water is no
to see and will increase the dis- higher than the bottom of the wheel
tance needed to stop your vehicle, hub. Drive through any water slowly.
so slow down. Allow adequate stopping distance
• Keep your windshield wiping because brake performance may be
equipment in good shape. Replace affected.
your windshield wiper blades when After driving through water, dry the
they show signs of streaking or brakes by gently applying them sev-
missing areas on the windshield. eral times while the vehicle is moving
slowly.
5 45
Driving off-road Fuel, engine coolant and engine

Drive carefully off-road because your
WARNING - Tire tread oil
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or Always check the tire tread High speed travel consumes more
roots of trees. Become familiar with before driving your vehicle. fuel than urban motoring. Do not for-
the off-road conditions where you Worn-out tires can result in loss get to check both the engine coolant
are going to drive before you begin of vehicle control. Worn-out and engine oil.
driving. tires should be replaced as
soon as possible. For further
information and tread limits, Drive belt
Highway driving refer to "Tires and wheels" in A loose or damaged drive belt may
Tires section 7. overheat the engine.
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pres-
sures will result in overheating and WARNING - Under/Over
possible failure of the tires. Inflated Tires
Avoid using worn or damaged tires Always check the tires for prop-
which may result in reduced traction er inflation before driving.
or tire failure. Underinflated or overinflated
Never exceed the maximum tire tires can cause poor handling,
inflation pressure shown on the tires. loss of vehicle control, and sud-
den tire failure leading to acci-
dents, injuries, and even death.
5 46
WINTER DRIVING
Snowy or Icy conditions Snow tires
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it If you mount snow tires on your vehi-
may be necessary to use snow tires cle, make sure they are radial tires of
on your tires. If snow tires are need- the same size and load range as the
ed, it is necessary to select tires original tires. Mount snow tires on all
equivalent in size and type of the four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
original equipment tires. Failure to do handling in all weather conditions.
so may adversely affect the safety Keep in mind that the traction provid-
and handling of your car. ed by snow tires on dry roads may
Furthermore, speeding, rapid accel- not be as high as your vehicle's orig-
eration, sudden brake applications, inal equipment tires. You should drive
1JBB3305 and sharp turns are potentially very cautiously even when the roads are
Severe weather conditions in the hazardous practices. clear. Check with the tire dealer for
winter result in greater wear and During deceleration, use engine maximum speed recommendations.
other problems. To minimize the braking to the fullest extent. Sudden Do not install studded tires without
problems of winter driving, you brake applications on snowy or icy first checking local, state and munic-
should follow these suggestions: roads may cause skids. You need to ipal regulations for possible restric-
keep sufficient distance between the tions against their use.
vehicle in operation in front and your
vehicle. Also, apply the brake gently. WARNING - Snow tire size
Snow tires should be equivalent
in size and type to the vehicle's
standard tires. Otherwise, the
safety and handling of your vehi-
cle may be adversely affected.
5 47
Use high quality ethylene gly- Change to "winter weight" oil To keep locks from freezing
col coolant if necessary To keep the locks from freezing,
Your vehicle is delivered with high In some climates it is recommended squirt an approved de-icer fluid or
quality ethylene glycol coolant in the that a lower viscosity "winter weight" glycerine into the key opening. If a
cooling system. It is the only type of oil be used during cold weather. See lock is covered with ice, squirt it with
coolant that should be used because section 8 for recommendations. If an approved de-icing fluid to remove
it helps prevent corrosion in the cool- you aren't sure what weight oil you the ice. If the lock is frozen internally,
ing system, lubricates the water should use, consult an authorized you may be able to thaw it out by
pump and prevents freezing. Be sure Kia dealer. using a heated key. Handle the heat-
to replace or replenish your coolant ed key with care to avoid injury.
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in section 7. Before winter, Check spark plugs and igni-
have your coolant tested to assure tion system Use approved window washer
that its freezing point is sufficient for Inspect your spark plugs as anti-freeze in system
the temperatures anticipated during described in section 7 and replace To keep the water in the window
the winter. them if necessary. Also check all washer system from freezing, add an
ignition wiring and components to be approved window washer anti-freeze
sure they are not cracked, worn or solution in accordance with instruc-
Check battery and cables damaged in any way. tions on the container. Window wash-
Winter puts additional burdens on er anti-freeze is available from an
the battery system. Visually inspect authorized Kia dealer and most auto
the battery and cables as described parts outlets. Do not use engine
in section 7. The level of charge in coolant or other types of anti-freeze
your battery can be checked by an as these may damage the paint fin-
authorized Kia dealer or a service ish.
station.
5 48
Don't let your parking brake Carry emergency equipment TRAILER TOWING
freeze Depending on the severity of the We do not recommend using this
Under some conditions your parking weather you should carry appropri- vehicle for trailer towing.
brake can freeze in the engaged ate emergency equipment. Some of
position. This is most likely to hap- the items you may want to carry
pen when there is an accumulation include tow straps or chains, flash-
of snow or ice around or near the light, emergency flares, sand, a
rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. shovel, jumper cables, a window
If there is a risk the parking brake scraper, gloves, ground cloth, cover-
may freeze, apply it only temporarily alls, a blanket, etc.
while you put the shift lever in P
(automatic transaxle) or in first or
reverse gear (manual transaxle) and
block the rear wheels so the vehicle
cannot roll. Then release the parking
brake.
Don't let ice and snow accu-

mulate underneath
Under some conditions, snow and
ice can build up under the fenders
and interfere with the steering. When
driving in severe winter conditions
where this may happen, you should
periodically check underneath the
car to be sure the movement of the
front wheels and the steering com-
ponents is not obstructed.
5 49
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

Tire and loading information label
OYDNEM4010 OYDNEM4010N OYDNEM4012C
OYDNEM4011 OYDNEM4010C OYDNEM4010A
The label located on the driver's door

sill gives the original tire size, cold
tire pressures recommended for your
vehicle, the number of people that
can be in your vehicle and vehicle
capacity weight.
OYDNEM4012 OYDNEM4011C
5 50
Vehicle capacity weight: Towing capacity: 4. The resulting figure equals the
385 kg (849 lbs.) We do not recommend using this available amount of cargo and lug-
vehicle for trailer towing. gage load capacity. For example, if
Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi- the "XXX" amount equals 635 kg
mum combined weight of occupants (1400 lbs.) and there will be five 68
and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped Cargo capacity:
kg (150 lbs.) passengers in your
with a trailer, the combined weight The cargo capacity of your vehicle vehicle, the amount of available
includes the tongue load. will increase or decrease depending cargo and luggage load capacity
on the weight and the number of is 295 kg (650 lbs).
Seating capacity: occupants and the tongue load, if
your vehicle is equipped with a trailer. (635-340 (5 x 68) = 295 kg or
Total : 5 persons 1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
(Front seat : 2 persons, 5.Determine the combined weight of
Rear seat : 3 persons) Steps For Determining Correct luggage and cargo being loaded
Seating capacity is the maximum Load Limit - on the vehicle. That weight may not
number of occupants including a 1.Locate the statement "The com- safely exceed the available cargo
driver, your vehicle may carry. bined weight of occupants and and luggage load capacity calcu-
However, the seating capacity may cargo should never exceed XXX kg lated in Step 4.
be reduced based upon the weight of or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's plac- 6.If your vehicle will be towing a trail-
all of the occupants, and the weight ard. er, load from your trailer will be
of the cargo being carried or towed. 2.Determine the combined weight of transferred to your vehicle. Consult
Do not overload the vehicle as there the driver and passengers that will this manual to determine how this
is a limit to the total weight, or load be riding in your vehicle. reduces the available cargo and
limit including occupants and cargo, 3.Subtract the combined weight of luggage load capacity of your vehi-
the vehicle can carry. the driver and passengers from cle.
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
5 51
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
A B C A B C A B C
C190F01JM C190F02JM C190F03JM
Item Description Total Item Description Total Item Description Total

Vehicle Capacity 385 kg Vehicle Capacity 385 kg Vehicle Capacity 385 kg
A A A
Weight (849 lbs) Weight (849 lbs) Weight (849 lbs)
Subtract Occupant Subtract Occupant Subtract Occupant
136 kg 340 kg 365 kg
B Weight B Weight B Weight
(300 lbs) (750 lbs) (805 lbs)
68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 73 kg (161 lbs) × 5
Available Cargo and 249 kg Available Cargo and 45 kg Available Cargo and 20 kg
C C C
Luggage weight (549 lbs) Luggage weight (99 lbs) Luggage weight (44 lbs)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight
and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's
capacity weight.
5 52
Certification label To find out the actual loads on your The label will help you decide how
The certification label is located on front and rear axles, you need to go much cargo and installed equipment
the driver's door sill at the center pil- to a weigh station and weigh your your vehicle can carry.
lar. vehicle.Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load
This label shows the maximum equally on both sides of the center- If you carry items inside your vehicle
allowable weight of the fully loaded line. - like suitcases, tools, packages, or
vehicle. This is called the GVWR anything else - they are moving as
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop
GVWR includes the weight of the WARNING - Over or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,
vehicle, all occupants, fuel and loading the items will keep going and can
cargo. cause an injury if they strike the driv-
Never exceed the GVWR for er or a passenger.
This label also tells you the maxi- your vehicle, the GAWR for
mum weight that can be supported either the front or rear axle and
by the front and rear axles, called vehicle capacity weight.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Exceeding these ratings can
affect your vehicle’s handling
and braking ability.
5 53
WARNING - Over WARNING - Loose cargo

loading Do not travel with unsecured
Do not overload your vehicle. blunt objects in the passenger
Overloading your vehicle can compartment of your vehicle
cause heat buildup in your vehi- (e.g. suit cases or unsecured
cle's tires and possible tire fail- child seats). These items may
ure, increased stopping dis- strike occupant during a sud-
tances and poor vehicle han- den stop or crash.
dling--all of which may result in
a crash.
✽ NOTICE
Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be cov-
ered by your warranty. Do not over-
load your vehicle.
5 54
VEHICLE WEIGHT
This section will guide you in the Cargo weight GVWR
proper loading of your vehicle and/or This figure includes all weight added (Gross vehicle weight rating)
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle to the Base Curb Weight, including This is the maximum allowable
weight within its design rating capa- cargo and optional equipment. weight of the fully loaded vehicle
bility, with or without a trailer.
(including all options, equipment,
Properly loading your vehicle will
GAW (Gross axle weight) passengers and cargo). The GVWR
provide maximum return of the vehi-
is shown on the certification label
cle design performance. Before load- This is the total weight placed on located on the driver’s door sill.
ing your vehicle, familiarize yourself each axle (front and rear) - including
with the following terms for determin- vehicle curb weight and all payload.
ing your vehicle's weight ratings, with
or without a trailer, from the vehicle's
specifications and the compliance GAWR
label: (Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
Base curb weight weight that can be carried by a single
axle (front or rear). These numbers
This is the weight of the vehicle are shown on the compliance label.
including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not The total load on each axle must
include passengers, cargo, or option- never exceed its GAWR.
al equipment.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
Vehicle curb weight This is the Base Curb Weight plus
This is the weight of your new vehicle actual Cargo Weight plus passen-
when you picked it up from your deal- gers.
er plus any aftermarket equipment.
5 55
What to do in an emergency
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

• Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 • Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
In case of an emergency while driving . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 • Removable towing hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing. . . . . . . 6-3 • Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
• If you have a flat tire while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
• If engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
If the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
• If engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly . . . . 6-4
• If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 6-4
Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Jump starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
• Push-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
• If the engine overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
If you have a flat tire (with tire mobility kit) . . . . 6-8
• Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
• Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . 6-9 6
• Components of the TireMobilityKit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
• Using the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
If you have a flat tire (with spare tire) . . . . . . . . . 6-14
• Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
• Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
• Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
• Jack label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
ROAD WARNING
Hazard warning flasher It should be used whenever emer-
gency repairs are being made or
when the vehicle is stopped near the
edge of a roadway.
Depress the flasher switch with the
ignition switch in any position. The
flasher switch is located in the center
console switch panel. All turn signal
lights will flash simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher oper-

ates whether your vehicle is run-
OYDEEM2001CN ning or not.
The hazard warning flasher serves • The turn signals do not work when
as a warning to other drivers to exer- the hazard flasher is on.
cise extreme caution when • Care must be taken when using
approaching, overtaking, or passing the hazard warning flasher while
your vehicle. the vehicle is being towed.
6 2
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING

In an emergency situation while the If the engine stalls at a cross- 2.When the vehicle is stopped, turn
vehicle is in motion, you are able to road or crossing on your emergency hazard flash-
turn the engine off and to the ACC ers, set the parking brake and put
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
position by pressing the ENGINE the transaxle in P (automatic
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
START/STOP button for more than 2 transaxle) or reverse (manual
(Neutral) position and then push the
seconds or 3 times successively transaxle).
vehicle to a safe place.
within 3 seconds. If the vehicle is still 3.Have all passengers get out of the
moving, you can restart the engine vehicle. Be sure they all get out on
without depressing the brake pedal If you have a flat tire while the side of the vehicle that is away
by pressing the ENGINE driving from traffic.
lever in the N (Neutral) position If a tire goes flat while you are driv- 4.When changing a flat tire, follow
(if smart key equipped). ing: the instruction provided later in this
1.Take your foot off the accelerator section.
pedal and let the vehicle slow
down while driving straight ahead.
Do not apply the brakes immedi-
If engine stalls while driving
ately or attempt to pull off the road 1.Reduce your speed gradually,
as this may cause a loss of control. keeping a straight line. Move cau-
When the vehicle has slowed down tiously off the road to a safe place.
to such a speed that it is safe to do 2.Turn on your emergency flashers.
so, brake carefully and pull off the 3.Try to start the engine again. If your
road. Drive off the road as far as vehicle will not start, contact an
possible and park on a firm level authorized Kia dealer or seek other
ground. If you are on a divided qualified assistance.
highway, do not park in the median
area between the two traffic lanes.
6 3
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

If the engine doesn't turn over If engine turns over normally
or turns over slowly but does not start
1.If your vehicle has an automatic 1.Check fuel level.
transaxle, be sure the shift lever is 2.With the ignition switch in the
in N (Neutral) or P (Park) and the LOCK position, check all connec-
emergency brake is set. tors at the ignition coil and spark
2.Check the battery connections to plugs. Reconnect any that may be
be sure they are clean and tight. disconnected or loose.
3.Turn on the interior light. If the light 3.Check the fuel line in the engine
dims or goes out when you operate compartment.
the starter, the battery is dis- 4.If the engine still does not start, call
charged. an authorized Kia dealer or seek
4.Check the starter connections to other qualified assistance.
be sure they are securely tight-
ened.
5.Do not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. See instructions for "Jump
starting".
WARNING - Push/
pull start
Do not push or pull the vehicle
to start it. Push or pull starting
may cause the catalytic con-
verter to overload and create a
fire hazard.
6 4
EMERGENCY STARTING
Jumper Cables
CAUTION - 12 volt battery WARNING - Battery
Use only a 12-volt jumper sys- Keep all flames or sparks away
tem. You can damage a 12-volt from the battery. The battery
starting motor, ignition system, produces hydrogen gas which
(-)
and other electrical parts will explode if exposed to flame
(+) beyond repair by use of a 24- or sparks.
(-)
Discharged battery
volt power supply (either two
12-volt batteries in series or a
(+)
24-volt motor generator set).
Booster battery
WARNING - Sulfuric acid
risk
1VQA4001
WARNING - Battery When jump starting your vehi-
Connect cables in numerical order
cle be careful not to get acid on
and disconnect in reverse order. Never attempt to check the elec- yourself, your clothing or on the
trolyte level of the battery as vehicle. Automobile batteries
Jump starting this may cause the battery to contain sulfuric acid. This is
rupture or explode. poisonous and highly corro-
Jump starting can be dangerous if
done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid sive.
harm to yourself or damage to your
vehicle or battery, follow these jump WARNING - Frozen
starting procedures. If in doubt, we batteries
strongly recommend that you have a Do not attempt to jump start the
competent technician or towing serv- vehicle if the discharged battery
ice jump start your vehicle. is frozen or if the electrolyte
level is low as the battery may
rupture or explode.
6 5
Jump starting procedure Do not allow the jumper cables to Push-starting

1.Make sure the booster battery is contact anything except the correct Your manual transaxle-equipped
12-volt and that its negative termi- battery terminals or the correct vehicle should not be push-started
nal is grounded. ground. Do not lean over the bat- because it might damage the emis-
tery when making connections. sion control system.
2.If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to Vehicles equipped with automatic
touch. transaxle cannot be push-started.
WARNING - Battery
3.Turn off all unnecessary electrical cables Follow the directions in this section
loads. for jump-starting.
Do not connect the jumper cable
4.Connect the jumper cables in the from the negative terminal of the
exact sequence shown in the illus- booster battery to the negative
tration. First connect one end of a WARNING - Tow starting
terminal of the discharged bat- vehicle
jumper cable to the positive termi- tery. This can cause the dis-
nal of the discharged battery (1), charged battery to overheat and Never tow a vehicle to start it
then connect the other end to the crack, releasing battery acid. because the sudden surge for-
positive terminal on the booster ward when the engine starts
battery (2). could cause a collision with the
Proceed to connect one end of the 5.Start the engine of the vehicle with tow vehicle.
other jumper cable to the negative the booster battery and let it run at
terminal of the booster battery (3), 2,000 rpm, then start the engine of
then the other end to a solid, sta- the vehicle with the discharged
tionary, metallic point (for example, battery.
the engine lifting bracket) away If the cause of your battery discharg-
from the battery (4). Do not con- ing is not apparent, you should have
nect it to or near any part that your vehicle checked by an author-
moves when the engine is cranked. ized Kia dealer.
6 6
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

If your temperature gauge indicates 4.Check to see if the water pump
overheating, you will experience a drive belt is missing. If it is not WARNING - Radiator cap
loss of power, or hear loud pinging or missing, check to see that it is Do not remove the radiator cap
knocking, the engine is probably too tight. If the drive belt seems to be when the engine is hot. This can
hot. If this happens, you should: satisfactory, check for coolant leak- allow coolant to be blown out of
ing from the radiator, hoses or the opening and cause serious
under the vehicle. (If the air condi- burns.
1.Pull off the road and stop as soon tioning had been in use, it is nor-
as it is safe to do so. mal for cold water to be draining
2.Place the shift lever in P (automat- from it when you stop). 6.If you cannot find the cause of the
ic transaxle) or neutral (manual overheating, wait until the engine
transaxle) and set the parking temperature has returned to nor-
brake. If the air conditioning is on, WARNING - Under the mal. Then, if coolant has been lost,
turn it off. hood carefully add coolant to the reser-
3.If engine coolant is running out While the engine is running, voir to bring the fluid level in the
under the vehicle or steam is com- keep hair, hands and clothing reservoir up to the halfway mark.
ing out from underneath the hood, away from moving parts such 7.Proceed with caution, keeping
stop the engine. Do not open the as the fan and drive belts. alert for further signs of overheat-
hood until the coolant has stopped ing. If overheating happens again,
running or the steaming has 5.If the water pump drive belt is bro- call an authorized Kia dealer for
stopped. If there is no visible loss ken or engine coolant leaks, stop assistance.
of engine coolant and no steam, the engine immediately and call
leave the engine running and Serious loss of coolant indicates
the nearest authorized Kia dealer there is a leak in the cooling system
check to be sure the engine cool- for assistance.
ing fan is operating. If the fan is not and this should be checked as soon
running, turn the engine off. as possible by an authorized Kia
dealer.
6 7
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (WITH TIRE MOBILITY KIT, IF EQUIPPED)

✽ NOTICE Introduction
The Tire Mobility Kit sealing com-
pound in the bottle is to be used for
one tire only. See your Kia dealer-
ship for additional replacement
sealant bottles.
WARNING - Tire wall

Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit
to repair punctures in the tire
OYDNEM2013 walls. This can result in an acci-
For safe operation, carefully read dent due to tire failure.
OEL069019
and follow the instructions in this
manual before use. With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay
Have your tire repaired as soon as mobile even after experiencing a tire
(1) Compressor
possible. The tire may loose air pres- puncture.
(2) Sealant bottle sure at any time after inflating with The system of compressor and seal-
The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary the Tire Mobility Kit. ing compound effectively and com-
fix to the tire and the tire should be fortably seals most punctures in a
inspected by an authorized Kia deal- passenger car tire caused by nails
er as soon as possible. or similar objects and reinflates the
tire.
After you ensured that the tire is
properly sealed you can drive cau-
tiously on the tire (up to 200 km (120
miles)) at a max. speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph) in order to reach a service
station or tire dealer to have the tire
repaired or replaced.
6 8
It is possible that some tires, espe- Notes on the safe use of the • Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a
cially with larger punctures or dam- Tire Mobility Kit tire is severely damaged by driving
age to the sidewall, cannot be sealed run flat or with insufficient air pres-
• Park your car at the side of the
completely. sure.
road so that you can work with the
Air pressure loss in the tire may Tire Mobility Kit away from moving • Do not remove any foreign objects
adversely affect tire performance. traffic. such as nails or screws that have
For this reason, you should avoid penetrated the tire.
• To be sure your vehicle will not
abrupt steering or other driving move, even when you're on fairly • Provided the car is outdoors, leave
maneuvers, especially if the vehicle level ground, always set your park- the engine running. Otherwise
is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in ing brake. operating the compressor may
use. eventually drain the car battery.
• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for
The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed sealing/inflation passenger car • Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit
or intended as a permanent tire tires. Only punctured areas located unattended while it is being used.
repair method and is to be used for within the tread region of the tire • Do not leave the compressor run-
one tire only. can be sealed using the tire mobil- ning for more than 10 min. at a time
This instruction shows you step by ity kit. or it may overheat.
step procedure to temporarily seal • Do not use on motorcycles, bicy- • Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if
the puncture. cles or any other type of tires. the ambient temperature is below -
Read the section "Notes on the safe • When the tire and wheel are dam- -30°C (22°F).
use of the Tire Mobility Kit". aged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit
for your safety.
• Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not
be effective for tire damage larger
than approximately 6 mm (0.24 in).
Please contact the nearest Kia
dealership if the tire cannot be
made roadworthy with the Tire
Mobility Kit.
6 9
Components of the TireMobilityKit 9. Hose to connect compressor and

sealant bottle or compressor and
wheel
Connectors, cable and connection
hose are stored in the compressor
housing.
WARNING - Expired
sealant
Do not use the Tire sealant after
expiration date noted on the
sealant bottle. This can increase
the risk of tire failure.
WARNING - Sealant
• Keep out of reach of children.
• Avoid contact with eyes.
• Do not swallow.
OEL069020
0. Speed restriction label 4. Holder for the sealant bottle

Strictly follow the specified
1. Sealant bottle and label with 5. Compressor sequence, otherwise the sealant
speed restriction 6. On/off switch may escape under high pressure.
2. Filling hose from sealant bottle to 7. Pressure gauge for displaying the
wheel tire inflation pressure
3. Connectors and cable for the 8. Button for reducing tire inflation
power outlet direct connection pressure
6 10
Using the Tire Mobility Kit

1.Detach the speed restriction label
WARNING - Tire pressure
(0) from the sealant bottle (1), and Do not attempt to drive your
place it in a highly visible place vehicle if the tire pressure is
inside the vehicle such as on the below 29 PSI(200kpa). This
steering wheel to remind the driver could result in an accident due
not to drive too fast. to sudden tire failure.
2.Screw connection hose (9) onto
the connector of the sealant bottle.
9.Switch off the compressor.
3.Ensure that button (8) on the com-
pressor is not pressed. 10. Detach the hoses from the
OEL069019 sealant bottle connector and
4.Unscrew the valve cap from the 6.Ensure that the compressor is from the tire valve.
valve of the defective wheel and switched off, position 0.
screw filling hose (2) of the sealant Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its stor-
bottle onto the valve. 7.Connect between compressor and age location in the vehicle.
the vehicle power outlet using the
5.Insert the sealant bottle into the cable and connectors.
housing of the compressor (4)so WARNING - Carbon
that the bottle is upright. 8.With the engine start/stop button
position on or ignition switch posi- monoxide
tion on, switch on the compressor Do not leave your vehicle run-
✽ NOTICE and let it run for approximately 5~7 ning in a poorly ventilated area
If a foreign object is seen that has minutes to fill the sealant up to for extended periods of time.
punctured the tire, do not remove it proper pressure. (refer to the Tire Carbon monoxide poisoning
before using Tire Mobility Kit. and Wheels, chapter 8). The infla- and suffocation can occur.
tion pressure of the tire after filling
is unimportant and will be
checked/corrected later.
Be careful not to overinflate the tire
and stay away from the tire when
filling it.
6 11
Distributing the sealant Checking the tire inflation ✽ NOTICE

11. Immediately drive approximately pressure The pressure gauge may show high-
7~10km (4~6miles or, about 1.After driving approximately 7 ~ 10 er than actual reading when the
10min) to evenly distribute the km (4 ~ 6 miles or about 10 min), compressor is running. To get an
sealant in the tire. stop at a safe location. accurate tire reading, the compres-
Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h 2.Connect connection hose (9) of the sor needs to be turned off.
(50 mph). If possible, do not fall compressor directly to the tire
below a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph). valve. - To reduce the inflation pres-
While driving, if you experience any 3.Plug the compressor power cord sure: Press the button 8 on the
unusual vibration, ride disturbance or into the vehicle power outlet. compressor.
noise, reduce your speed and drive 4.Adjust the tire inflation pressure to
with caution until you can safely pull the recomended tire inflation.
off of the side of the road.
With the ignition switch on, pro-
Call for road side service or towing. ceed as follows.
When you use the Tire Mobility Kit, - To increase the inflation pres-
the tire pressure sensor valve stem sure : Switch on the compressor,
and wheel may be stained by position I. To check the current
sealant. After use wipe off sealant inflation pressure setting, briefly
residue and inspect. Consult you Kia switch off the compressor.
dealership if necessary.
6 12
Technical Data
CAUTION - Tire pressure
sensor System voltage : DC 12 V
When you use the Tire Mobility Working voltage : DC 10 - 15 V
Kit including sealant not Amperage rating : max. 15 A
approved by Kia, the tire pres- Suitable for use at temperatures :
sure sensors may be damaged -30 ~ +70°C (-22 ~ +158°F)
by sealant. The sealant on the
tire pressure sensor and wheel Max. working pressure :
should be removed when you 6 bar (87 psi)
replace the tire with a new one Size
and inspect the tire pressure
Compressor : 168 x 150 x 68 mm
sensors at an authorized dealer.
(6.6 x 5.9 x 2.7 in.)
Sealant bottle : 104 x ø 85 mm
(4.1 x ø 3.3 in.)
Compressor weight :
1.05 kg (2.31 lbs)
Sealant volume :
300 ml (18.3 cu. in.)
Sealant warranty :
5 years (sealant.)
6 13
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (IF EQUIPPED)

Jack and tools Jacking instructions Always move the vehicle completely
The jack is provided for emergency off the road and onto the shoulder
tire changing only. before trying to change a tire. The
jack should be used on firm level
To prevent the jack from “rattling” ground. If you cannot find a firm level
while the vehicle is in motion, store it place off the road, call a towing serv-
properly. ice company for assistance.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce Be sure to use the correct front and
the possibility of personal injury. rear jacking positions on the vehicle;
never use the bumpers or any other
WARNING - Changing part of the vehicle for jack support.
tires
OTF060002 Never attempt vehicle repairs in WARNING - Tire Jack
the traffic lanes of a public road Do not place any portion of your
The spare tire, jack, jack handle and or highway.
wheel lug nut wrench are stored in body under a vehicle that is only
the luggage compartment. supported by a jack since the
Remove the luggage under tray out vehicle can easily roll off the
of the way to reach the equipment. jack. Use vehicle support stands.
(1) Jack handle
(2) Jack
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench
6 14
Do not allow anyone to remain in the Removing and storing the Changing tires
vehicle while it is on the jack. spare tire
Make sure any children present are
in a secure place away from the road
and from the vehicle to be raised with
the jack.
WARNING - Running vehi-

cle on jack
Do not start or run the engine of
the vehicle while the vehicle is
on the jack as this may cause
OED066033
the vehicle to fall off the jack.
ONF068004
1.Park on a level surface and apply
Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt the parking brake firmly.
counterclockwise. 2.Shift the shift lever into R
Store the tire in the reverse order of (Reverse) for manual transaxle or
removal. P (Park) for automatic transaxle.
To prevent the spare tire and tools 3.Activate the hazard warning flash-
from “rattling” while the vehicle is in ers.
motion, store them properly.
6 15
WARNING - Changing a
tire
• To prevent vehicle movement
while changing a tire, always
set the parking brake fully,
and always block the wheel
diagonally opposite the wheel
being changed.
• We recommend that the
wheels of the vehicle be
1JBA6504 chocked, and that no person OYDDEM2004
4.Remove the wheel lug nut wrench, remain in a vehicle that is 6.Loosen the wheel lug nuts counter-
jack, jack handle, and spare tire being jacked. clockwise one turn each, but do
from the vehicle. not remove any nut until the tire
5.Block both the front and rear of the has been raised off the ground.
wheel that is diagonally opposite
the jack position.
6 16
9.Loosen the wheel nuts and remove

them with your fingers. Slide the
wheel off the studs and lay it flat so
it cannot roll away. To put the
wheel on the hub, pick up the
spare tire, line up the holes with
the studs and slide the wheel onto
them. If this is difficult, tip the wheel
slightly and get the top hole in the
wheel lined up with the top stud.
Then jiggle the wheel back and
OMDC063020 OYDDEM2005 forth until the wheel can be slid
over the other studs.
7.Place the jack at the front or rear 8.Insert the jack handle into the jack
jacking position closest to the tire and turn it clockwise, raising the
you are changing. Place the jack at vehicle until the tire just clears the
the designated locations under the ground. This measurement is
frame. The jacking positions are approximately 30 mm (1 in). Before
plates welded to the frame with two removing the wheel lug nuts, make
tabs and a raised dot to index with sure the vehicle is stable and that
the jack. there is no chance for movement
or slippage.
WARNING - Jack location
To reduce the possibility of
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle in
the correct jack position; never
use any other part of the vehicle
for jack support.
6 17
Wheels and wheel covers may have 10. To install the wheel, hold it on the
sharp edges. Handle them carefully studs, put the wheel nuts on the
to avoid possible injury. Before put- studs and tighten them finger
ting the wheel into place, be sure tight. Jiggle the tire to be sure it is
that there is nothing on the hub or completely seated, then tighten
wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel, etc.) the nuts as much as possible
that prevents the wheel from fitting with your fingers again.
solidly against the hub. 11. Lower the vehicle to the ground
by turning the wheel nut wrench
counterclockwise.
WARNING - Installing a
wheel OTF060007
Make sure the wheel makes Then position the wrench as shown
good contact with the hub when in the drawing and tighten the wheel
installed. If the contact of the nuts. Be sure the socket is seated
mounting surface between the completely over the nut. Do not stand
wheel and hub is not good, the on the wrench handle or use an
wheel nuts could come loose extension pipe over the wrench han-
and cause the loss of a wheel. dle.
Loss of a wheel may result in
loss of control of the vehicle. Go around the wheel tightening
every nut following the numerical
sequence shown in the image until
they are tight. Then double-check
each nut for tightness. After changing
the wheels, have an authorized Kia
dealer tighten the wheel nuts to their
proper torque as soon as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:
9~11 kg.m (65~79 lb.ft)
6 18
If you have a tire gauge, remove the

valve cap and check the air pressure. CAUTION - Replacing lug WARNING - Wheel studs
If the pressure is lower than recom- nuts Do not drive your vehicle with
mended, drive slowly to the nearest Make certain during wheel damaged wheel studs. If the
service station and inflate to the cor- removal that the same nuts that studs are damaged, they may
rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust were removed are reinstalled - lose their ability to retain the
it until it is correct. Always reinstall or, if replaced, that nuts with wheel.This could lead to the loss
the valve cap after checking or metric threads and the same of the wheel and a collision.
adjusting the tire pressure. If the cap chamfer configuration are used.
is not replaced, air may leak from the Your vehicle has metric threads
tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy on the wheel studs and nuts. To prevent the jack, jack handle,
another and install it as soon as pos- Installation of a non-metric wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire
sible. thread nut on a metric stud will from rattling while the vehicle is in
After you have changed wheels, not secure the wheel to the hub motion, store them properly.
always secure the flat tire in its place properly and will damage the Check the inflation pressures as
and return the jack and tools to their stud so that it must be replaced. soon as possible after installing the
proper storage locations. spare tire. Adjust it to the specified
pressure, if necessary. Refer to
Note that most lug nuts do not have “Tires and wheels” in section 8.
metric threads. Be sure to use
extreme care in checking for thread
style before installing aftermarket lug
nuts or wheels. If in doubt, consult an
6 19
Important - use of compact spare When using a compact spare tire,

tire (if equipped) WARNING - Spare tire observe the following precautions:
Your vehicle is equipped with a com- Do not operate your vehicle on • Under no circumstances should
pact spare tire. This compact spare this compact spare at speeds you exceed 80 km/h (50 mph); a
tire takes up less space than a regu- over 80 km/h (50 mph). The higher speed could damage the
lar-size tire. This tire is smaller than a compact spare tire is for emer- tire.
conventional tire and is designed for gency use only. The original tire • Ensure that you drive slowly
temporary use only. should be repaired or replaced enough for the road conditions to
You should drive carefully when the as soon as possible to avoid avoid all hazards. Any road hazard,
compact spare is in use. The com- failure of the spare. such as a pothole or debris, could
pact spare should be replaced by the seriously damage the compact
proper conventional tire and rim at spare.
the first opportunity. The compact spare should be inflat-
ed to 420 kPa (60 psi). • Any continuous road use of this tire
The operation of this vehicle is not could result in tire failure, loss of
recommended with more than one Check the inflation pressure after vehicle control, and possible per-
compact spare tire in use at the installing the spare tire. Adjust it to sonal injury.
same time. the specified pressure, as necessary.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-
mum load rating or the load-carry-
ing capacity shown on the sidewall
of the compact spare tire.
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The
compact spare tire diameter is
smaller than the diameter of a con-
ventional tire and reduces the
ground clearance approximately
25 mm (1 inch), which could result
in damage to the vehicle.
6 20
• Do not take this vehicle through an • Do not use more than one compact
automatic car wash while the com- spare tire at a time.
pact spare tire is installed. • Do not tow a trailer while the com-
• The compact spare tire should not pact spare tire is installed.
be installed on the front axle if the
vehicle must be driven in snow or
on ice.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire’s tread life
is shorter than a regular tire.
Inspect your compact spare tire
regularly and replace worn com-
pact spare tires with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
• The compact spare tire should not
be used on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow tires,
wheel covers or trim rings be used
with the compact spare wheel. If
such use is attempted, damage to
these items or other car compo-
nents may occur.
6 21
Jack label 1. Model Name

■ Example 2. Maximum allowable load
• Type A 3. When using the jack, set your
parking brake.
4. When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
6. The designated locations under
OHYK064001 the frame
• Type B
7. When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles
with manual transmission or move
the shift lever to the P position on
vehicles with automatic transmis-
OHYK064005 sion.
• Type C
9. The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacturer
11. Production date
12. Representative company and
address
OHYK064002
❈ The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For
more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
6 22
TOWING
Towing service It is acceptable to tow the vehicle
with the rear wheels on the ground
A (without dollies) and the front wheels
off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or sus-
pension components are damaged
or the vehicle is being towed with the
front wheels on the ground, use a
B
towing dolly under the front wheels. HXD02
When being towed by a commercial
tow truck and wheel dollies are not
dolly used, the front of the vehicle should
always be lifted, not the rear.
WARNING - Side and

curtain air bag
OMC045012 If your vehicle is equipped with
side and curtain air bag, set the HXD03
If emergency towing is necessary, ignition switch to LOCK or ACC
we recommend having it done by an position when the vehicle is CAUTION - Towing
authorized Kia dealer or a commer- being towed. The side and cur- • Do not tow the vehicle back-
cial tow-truck service. Proper lifting tain air bag may deploy when wards with the front wheels on
and towing procedures are neces- the ignition is ON, and the the ground as this may cause
sary to prevent damage to the vehi- rollover sensor detects the situ- damage to the vehicle.
cle. The use of wheel dollies or ation as a rollover.
flatbed is recommended. • Do not tow with sling-type
equipment. Use wheel lift or
flatbed equipment.
6 23
When towing your vehicle in an Removable towing hook (front) Emergency towing
emergency without wheel dollies : (if equipped) • Front
1.Set the ignition switch in the ACC
position.
2.Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
3.Release the parking brake.
CAUTION - Towing gear OYDDEM2007

position • Rear (4 Door)
Always place the transaxle shift
lever in N (Neutral) when towing
your vehicle. Failure to place the OYDDEM2006
transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral) may cause internal 1.Remove the towing hook from the
damage to the transaxle. tool case.
2.Remove the hole cover pressing
the lower part of the cover on the
front bumper. OYDDEM2008
• Rear (2 Door, 5 Door)
3.Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is
fully secured.
4.Remove the towing hook and
install the cover after use.
OYDDEM3020
6 24
If towing is necessary, we recom- If towing service is not available in an • Attach a towing strap to the towing
mend you have it done by an emergency, your vehicle may be hook.
authorized Kia dealer or a com- temporarily towed using a cable or • Using a portion of the vehicle other
mercial tow truck service. chain secured to the emergency tow- than the tow hooks for towing may
ing hook under the front (or rear) of damage the body of your vehicle.
the vehicle. Use extreme caution
when towing the vehicle. A driver • Use only a cable or chain specifi-
must be in the vehicle to steer it and cally intended for use in towing
operate the brakes. vehicles. Securely fasten the cable
or chain to the towing hook provid-
Towing in this manner may be done ed.
only on hard-surfaced roads for a
short distance and at low speeds. • Before emergency towing, check
Also, the wheels, axles, power train, that the hook is not broken or dam-
steering and brakes must all be in aged.
good condition. • Fasten the towing cable or chain
• Do not use the towing hooks to pull securely to the hook.
a vehicle out of mud, sand or other • Do not jerk the hook. Apply it
conditions from which the vehicle steadily with even force.
cannot be driven out under its own • To avoid damaging the hook, do
power. not pull from the side or at a verti-
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than cal angle. Always pull straight
the vehicle doing the towing. ahead.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other fre-
quently.
6 25
Emergency towing precautions If the car is being towed with all four
• Turn the ignition switch to ACC so wheels on the ground, it can be
the steering wheel isn’t locked. towed only from the front. Be sure
that the transmission is in neutral. Be
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N sure the steering is unlocked by plac-
(Neutral). ing the ignition switch in the ACC
• Release the parking brake. position. A driver must be in the
• Press the brake pedal with more towed vehicle to operate the steering
force than normal since you will and brakes.
have reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be CAUTION - Automatic
OYF062017 required because the power steer- transaxle
• Use a towing strap less than 5 m ing system will be disabled.
• To avoid serious damage to
(16 feet) long. Attach a white or red • If you are driving down a long hill, the automatic transmission,
cloth (about 30 cm (12 inches) the brakes may overheat and brake limit the vehicle speed to 15
wide) in the middle of the strap for performance will be reduced. Stop km/h (10 mph) and drive less
easy visibility. often and let the brakes cool off. than 1.5 km (1 mile) when tow-
• Drive carefully so that the towing ing.
strap is not loosened during tow- • Before towing, check for an
ing. automatic transmission fluid
leak under your vehicle. If the
automatic transmission fluid
is leaking, a flatbed equipment
or towing dolly must be used.
6 26
Maintenance
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37

Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 • Filter inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
• Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
• Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 • Blade inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 • Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
• Owner maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Scheduled maintenance service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 • For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
• Normal maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 • Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
• Maintenance under severe usage conditions. . . . . . . 7-23 • Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 7-25 Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29 • Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
• Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29 • Recommended cold tire inflation pressures . . . . . . . 7-44
• Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30 • Checking tire inflation pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 • Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
• Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 • Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
• Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33 • Tire replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
• Wheel replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Brake/clutch fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
• Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
• Checking the brake/clutch fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
• Tire maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35 • Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
• Checking the washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35 • All season tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55 7
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35 • Summer tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
• Checking the parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35 • Snow tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36 • Radial-ply tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
• Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36 • Low aspect raito tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
• Instrument panel fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
• Engine compartment fuse replacement. . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
• Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
• Engine compartment fuse panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
• Engine room (Battery terminal cover) . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65
Appearance care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71
• Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71
• Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76
Emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-78
• Crankcase emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-78
• Evaporative emission control
(including ORVR: Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-78
• Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-79
7
Maintenance
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ 1.8 / 2.0 Gasoline engine
1. Engine oil filler cap

2. Engine oil dipstick
3. Brake/clutch fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
■ 1.6 Turbo GDI engine
6. Positive battery terminal
7. Negative battery terminal
8. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
9. Radiator cap
10. Engine coolant reservoir
❈ The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OYDNMC2041/OYDNMC2067
7 3
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care Owner’s responsibility Repairs and adjustments required as
to prevent damage to your vehicle a result of improper maintenance or
and injury to yourself whenever per- a lack of required maintenance are
forming any maintenance or inspec- ✽ NOTICE not covered.
tion procedures. Maintenance Service and Record We recommend you have your vehi-
Should you have any doubts con- Retention are the owner's responsi- cle maintained and repaired by an
cerning the inspection or servicing of bility. authorized Kia dealer. An authorized
your vehicle, we strongly recom- You should retain documents that Kia dealer meets Kia’s high service
mend that you have an authorized show proper maintenance has been quality standards and receives tech-
Kia dealer perform this work. performed on your vehicle in accor- nical support from Kia in order to pro-
An authorized Kia dealer has factory-
dance with the scheduled mainte- vide you with a high level of service
trained technicians and genuine Kia
nance service charts shown on the satisfaction.
parts to service your vehicle proper-
following pages. You need this infor-
ly. For expert advice and quality serv-
mation to establish your compliance
ice, see an authorized Kia dealer.
with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle war-
Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi- ranties.
cient servicing may result in opera- Detailed warranty information is
tional problems with your vehicle that provided in your Warranty &
could lead to vehicle damage, an Consumer Information manual.
accident, or personal injury.
7 4
Maintenance
Owner maintenance precau-

tions WARNING - Maintenance
work
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives Do not wear jewelry or loose
instructions only for the maintenance clothing while working under
items that are easy to perform. the hood of your vehicle with
the engine running. These can
As explained earlier in this section,
become entangled in moving
several procedures can be done only
parts, if you must run the
by an authorized Kia dealer with spe-
engine while working under the
cial tools.
hood, make certain that you
remove all jewelry (especially
✽ NOTICE rings, bracelets, watches, and
Improper owner maintenance dur- necklaces) and all neckties,
ing the warranty period may affect scarves, and similar loose
warranty coverage. For details, read clothing before getting near the
the separate Warranty & Consumer engine or cooling fans.
Information manual provided with
the vehicle. If you're unsure about
any servicing or maintenance proce-
dure, have it done by an authorized
Kia dealer.
7 5
Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE
The following lists are vehicle checks Owner maintenance schedule While operating your vehicle:
and inspections that should be per- • Note any changes in the sound of
formed by the owner or an author-
When you stop for fuel:
the exhaust or any smell of
ized Kia dealer at the frequencies • Check the engine oil level.
exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
indicated to help ensure safe, • Check the coolant level in coolant
dependable operation of your vehi- • Check for vibrations in the steering
reservoir.
cle. wheel. Notice any increased steer-
• Check the windshield washer fluid ing effort or looseness in the steer-
Any adverse conditions should be level. ing wheel, or change in its straight-
brought to the attention of your deal- • Look for low or under-inflated tires. ahead position.
er as soon as possible.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly
These Owner Maintenance Checks turns slightly or “pulls” to one side
are generally not covered by war- WARNING - Hot coolant when traveling on smooth, level
ranties and you may be charged for Be careful when checking your road.
labor, parts and lubricants used. engine coolant level when the • When stopping, listen and check
engine is hot. Scalding hot for unusual sounds, pulling to one
coolant and steam may blow side, increased brake pedal travel
out under pressure. or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the
operation of your transaxle occurs,
check the transaxle fluid level.
• Check the automatic transaxle P
(Park) function.
• Check the parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your
vehicle (water dripping from the air
conditioning system during or after
use is normal).
7 6
Maintenance
At least monthly: At least twice a year At least once a year :

• Check the coolant level in the (i.e., every Spring and Fall) : • Clean the body and door drain
engine coolant reservoir. • Check the radiator, heater and air holes.
• Check the operation of all exterior conditioning hoses for leaks or • Lubricate the door hinges and
lights, including the stoplights, turn damage. check the hood hinges.
signals and hazard warning flash- • Check the windshield washer • Lubricate the door and hood locks
ers. spray and wiper operation. Clean and latches.
• Check the inflation pressures of all the wiper blades with clean cloth
• Lubricate the door rubber weather-
tires including the spare. dampened with washer fluid.
strips.
• Check the headlight alignment.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Check the muffler, exhaust pipes,
• Check the power steering fluid
shields and clamps.
level.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
wear and function.
transaxle linkage and controls.
• Check for worn tires and loose
• Clean the battery and terminals.
wheel lug nuts.
• Check the brake/clutch fluid level.
7 7
Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE

Follow the Normal Maintenance If your vehicle is operated under the
Schedule if the vehicle is usually above conditions, you should
operated where none of the following inspect, replace or refill more fre-
conditions apply. If any of the following quently than the following Normal
conditions apply, follow the Maintenance Schedule. After 120
Maintenance Under Severe Usage months or 240,000 km (150,000
Conditions. miles) continue to follow the pre-
• Repeated short distance driving. scribed maintenance intervals.
• Driving in dusty conditions or
sandy areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in
cold temperatures and/or extreme-
ly humid climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy
city traffic during hot weather
above 32°C (90°F).
7 8
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance.
Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the
frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
*1 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this mainte-
nance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of
power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an author-
ized Kia dealer for details.
*2 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your
authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*3 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced excessively.
7 9
Maintenance

12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 6 months 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 12 months
❑ Rotate tire ❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect battery condition ❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter ❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose ❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Replace engine oil and filter - MPI/GDI Engine ❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Add fuel additive *2
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months) ❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections ❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - Turbo GDI ❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
(Every 12,000km) ❑ Replace climate control air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter- Turbo GDI (At first, replace at (for evaporator and blower unit)
5,000km or 6 months, after that, every 8,000 km or 6 months.) ❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads, parking brake
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or (24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)
replace. ❑ Add fuel additive *2
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
7 10
Maintenance

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter ❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect vacuum hose ❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Replace engine oil and filter ❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
(36,000 km (22,500 miles) or 36 months) ❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Add fuel additive *2 ❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months) ❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections ❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
replace.
❑ Inspect fuel filter *1
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *1
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads, parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
(Continued)
7 11
Maintenance

(Continued) 72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 36 months
❑ Add fuel additive *2 ❑ Rotate tire
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months) ❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections ❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play ❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks ❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or ❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
replace. ❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers and rotors
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
60,000 km (37,500 miles) or 30 months joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Rotate tire ❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose ❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads, parking brake
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped) ❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 72 months)
(60,000 km (37,500 miles) or 60 months) ❑ Add fuel additive *2
❑ Add fuel additive *2 (12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months) ❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections ❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play ❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace. replace.
7 12
Maintenance

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter ❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect vacuum hose ❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Replace engine oil and filter ❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
(84,000 km (52,500 miles) or 84 months) ❑ Inspect drive belts *3
❑ Add fuel additive *2 (First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months) after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections ❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play ❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers and rotors
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or ❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
replace. joint, upper arm ball joint
(Continued)
7 13
Maintenance

❑ Replace climate control air filter ❑ Rotate tire
(for evaporator and blower unit) ❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Replace air cleaner filter ❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter ❑ Inspect vacuum hose
(96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 96 months) ❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Add fuel additive *2 (108,000 km (67,500 miles) or 108 months)
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months) ❑ Add fuel additive *2
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections (12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play ❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks ❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace. replace.
7 14
Maintenance

120,000 km (75,000 miles) or 60 months (Continued)
❑ Rotate tire ❑ Add fuel additive *2
❑ Inspect battery condition (12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter ❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant ❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines ❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❑ Inspect drive belts *3
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluid (if equipped)
(Continued)
7 15
Maintenance

❑ Inspect air cleaner filter ❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect vacuum hose ❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Replace engine oil and filter ❑ Inspect drive belts *3
(132,000 km (82,500 miles) or 132 months) (First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months
❑ Add fuel additive *2 after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months)
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months) ❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections ❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play ❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers and rotors
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or joint, upper arm ball joint
replace.
(Continued)
7 16
Maintenance

❑ Replace air cleaner filter ❑ Rotate tire
❑ Replace engine oil and filter ❑ Inspect battery condition
(144,000 km (90,000 miles) or 144 months) ❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Add fuel additive *2 ❑ Inspect vacuum hose
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months) ❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections (156,000 km (97,500 miles) or 156 months)
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play ❑ Add fuel additive *2
❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks (12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
replace. ❑ Inspect brake pedal free play

replace.
7 17
Maintenance

❑ Rotate tire ❑ Add fuel additive *2

❑ Inspect battery condition (12,000 km (7,5000 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter ❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant ❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines ❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months) replace.
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated)
(Continued)
7 18
Maintenance

❑ Rotate tire
❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluild (if equipped)
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or ❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
replace. ❑ Inspect brake/clutch (if equipped) fluid
(Continued)
7 19
Maintenance

❑ Replace air cleaner filter ❑ Rotate tire
❑ Replace engine oil and filter ❑ Inspect battery condition
(192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 192 months) ❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Replace coolant ❑ Inspect vacuum hose
(First, 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 120 months ❑ Replace engine oil and filter
after every 48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months) (204,000 km (127,500 miles) or 204 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *2 ❑ Add fuel additive *2
(12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months) (12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections ❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect brake pedal free play ❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.
replace.
7 20
Maintenance

❑ Rotate tire ❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections

❑ Inspect battery condition ❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter ❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months
228,000 km (142,500 miles) or 114 months
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots ❑ Rotate tire
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler ❑ Inspect battery condition
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads, parking brake ❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball ❑ Inspect vacuum hose
joint, upper arm ball joint ❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts (228,000 km (142,500 miles) or 228 months)
❑ Inspect vacuum hose ❑ Add fuel additive *2
❑ Replace climate control air filter (12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
(for evaporator and blower unit) ❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers and rotors ❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❑ Replace engine oil and filter ❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
(216,000 km (135,000 miles) or 216 months) replace.
(Continued)
7 21
Maintenance

❑ Rotate tire ❑ Replace climate control air filter

❑ Inspect battery condition (for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant ❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines ❑ Replace engine oil and filter
❑ Inspect drive belts *3 (240,000 km (150,000 miles) or 240 months)
(First, 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 72 months ❑ Replace coolant
after every 24,000 km (15,000 miles) or 24 months) (First, 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 120 months
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots after every 48,000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months)
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler ❑ Add fuel additive *2
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers and rotors (12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 12 months)
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball ❑ Inspect cooling system hoses and connections
joint, upper arm ball joint ❑ Inspect brake pedal free play
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts ❑ Inspect all latch, hinges and locks
replace.
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *1 No check, No service required
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads, parking brake ❑ Automatic transaxle fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect manual transaxle fluild (if equipped)
(Continued)
7 22
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer
to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE DRIVING
MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
OPERATION CONDITION
EVERY 6,000 KM (3,750 MILES) OR A, B, C, D, E, F,
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER (MPI/GDI) R
6 MONTHS G, H, I, J, K
EVERY 5,000 KM (3,000 MILES) OR A, B, C, D, E, F,
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER (Turbo GDI) R
6 MONTHS G, H, I, J, K
AIR CLEANER FILTER R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E
SPARK PLUGS R MORE FREQUENTLY B, H
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID R EVERY 96,000 KM (60,000 MILES) A, C, E, F, G, I
MANUAL TRANSAXLE FLUID R EVERY 120,000 KM (75,000 MILES) A, C, E, F, G, I
(Continued)
7 23
Maintenance
MAINTENANCE DRIVING
MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
OPERATION CONDITION
FRONT DISC BRAKE/PADS, CALIPERS
I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H
AND ROTORS
REAR DISC BRAKE/PADS, PARKING
I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, G, H
BRAKE
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE &
BOOTS/LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER I MORE FREQUENTLY C, D, E, F, G, H, I
ARM BALL JOINT
EVERY 120,000 KM (75,000 MILES) OR 6
DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS I C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
MONTHS
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (FOR
R MORE FREQUENTLY C, E
EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles) F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 32°C (90°F)
in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in freez- G- Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
ing temperature H- Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long dis- I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle
tances towing
C- Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt- J - Driving over 170 km/h (106 mph)
spread roads K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
D- Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in
very cold weather
E - Driving in sandy areas
7 24
Maintenance
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Engine oil and filter Fuel filter Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
The engine oil and filter should be A clogged filter can limit the speed at nections
changed at the intervals specified in which the vehicle may be driven, Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
the maintenance schedule. If the car damage the emission system and connections for leakage and dam-
is being driven in severe conditions, cause multiple issues such as hard age. Have an authorized Kia dealer
more frequent oil and filter changes starting. If an excessive amount of replace any damaged or leaking
are required. foreign matter accumulates in the parts immediately.
fuel tank, the filter may require
replacement more frequently.
Drive belts Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
After installing a new filter, run the
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of engine for several minutes, and The vapor hose and fuel filler cap
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil check for leaks at the connections. should be inspected at those inter-
saturation and replace if necessary. Fuel filters should be installed by an vals specified in the maintenance
Drive belts should be checked peri- authorized Kia dealer. schedule. Make sure that a new
odically for proper tension and vapor hose or fuel filler cap is cor-
adjusted as necessary. rectly replaced.
7 25
Maintenance
Vacuum crankcase ventilation Air cleaner filter Coolant

hoses A Genuine Kia air cleaner filter is The coolant should be changed at
Inspect the surface of hoses for evi- recommended when the filter is the intervals specified in the mainte-
dence of heat and/or mechanical replaced. nance schedule.
damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and Manual transaxle fluid
excessive swelling indicate deterio- Spark plugs
(if equipped)
ration. Particular attention should be Make sure to install new spark plugs
paid to examine those hose surfaces of the correct heat range. Inspect the manual transaxle fluid
nearest to high heat sources, such according to the maintenance sched-
as the exhaust manifold. ule.
Cooling system
Inspect the hose routing to assure
that the hoses do not come in con- Check cooling system components,
tact with any heat source, sharp such as radiator, coolant reservoir,
edges or moving component which hoses and connections for leakage
might cause heat damage or and damage. Replace any damaged
mechanical wear. Inspect all hose parts.
connections, such as clamps and
couplings, to make sure they are
secure, and that no leaks are pres-
ent. Hoses should be replaced
immediately if there is any evidence
of deterioration or damage.
7 26
Maintenance
Automatic transaxle fluid Brake hoses and lines Parking brake

(if equipped) Visually check for proper installation, Inspect the parking brake system
Automatic transaxle fluid should not chafing, cracks, deterioration and including the parking brake pedal
be checked under normal usage any leakage. Replace any deteriorat- and cables.
conditions. ed or damaged parts immediately.
But in severe conditions, the fluid Brake discs, pads, calipers
should be changed at an authorized Brake/clutch fluid and rotors
Kia dealer in accordance to the
scheduled maintenance at the begin- Check brake fluid level in the brake Check the pads for excessive wear,
ning of this chapter. fluid reservoir. The level should be discs for run out and wear, and
between “MIN” and “MAX” marks on calipers for fluid leakage.
the side of the reservoir. Use only
✽ NOTICE hydraulic brake fluid conforming to
Automatic transaxle fluid color is DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.
basically red.
As the vehicle is driven, the auto-
matic transaxle fluid will begin to
look darker.
It is normal condition and you
should not judge the need to replace
the fluid based upon the changed
color.
7 27
Maintenance
Exhaust pipe and muffler Steering gear box, linkage & Air conditioning refrigerant
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, boots/lower arm ball joint Check the air conditioning lines and
muffler and hangers for cracks, dete- With the vehicle stopped and engine connections for leakage and dam-
rioration, or damage. Start the off, check for excessive free-play in age.
engine and listen carefully for any the steering wheel.
exhaust gas leakage. Tighten con- Check the linkage for bends or dam-
nections or replace parts as neces- age. Check the dust boots and ball
sary. joints for deterioration, cracks, or
damage. Replace any damaged
Suspension mounting bolts parts.
Check the suspension connections
for looseness or damage. Retighten Drive shafts and boots
to the specified torque. Check the drive shafts, boots and
clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts and, if necessary, repack the
grease.
7 28
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil level
WARNING - Radiator
hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may
be hot enough to burn you.
5. Pull the dipstick out again and

check the level. The level should
be between F and L. OMD070003N
OYDNMC2054 If it is near or at L, add enough oil to

CAUTION - Replace bring the level to F. Do not overfill.
1. Be sure the vehicle is on level engine oil
ground.
Do not overfill with engine oil. Use a funnel to help prevent oil
2. Start the engine and allow it to Engine damage may result. from being spilled on engine com-
reach normal operating tempera- ponents.
ture.
3. Turn the engine off and wait for a Use only the specified engine oil.
few minutes (about 5 minutes) for (Refer to “Recommended lubricants
the oil to return to the oil pan. and capacities” in section 8.)
4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and reinsert it fully.
7 29
Maintenance
Changing the engine oil and

filter
Have engine oil and filter changed by
an authorized Kia dealer according
to the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this chapter.
WARNING
Used engine oil may cause irri-
tation or cancer of the skin if
left in contact with the skin for
prolonged periods of time.
Always protect your skin by
washing your hands thoroughly
with soap and warm water as
soon as possible after handling
used oil.
7 30
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT
The high-pressure cooling system Checking the coolant level Recommended engine coolant
has a reservoir filled with year-round • When adding coolant, use only
antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is deionized water or soft water for
filled at the factory. your vehicle and never mix hard
Check the antifreeze protection and water in the coolant filled at the fac-
coolant level at least once a year, at tory. An improper coolant mixture
the beginning of the winter season, can result in serious malfunction or
and before traveling to a colder cli- engine damage.
mate. • The engine in your vehicle has alu-
minum engine parts and must be
protected by an ethylene-glycol
WARNING - Cooling fan with phosphate based coolant to
Use caution when prevent corrosion and freezing.
OMD070004N
working near the • DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
blade of the cooling Check the condition and connections coolant or mix them with the spec-
fan. The electric of all cooling system hoses and ified coolant.
motor (cooling fan) is heater hoses. Replace any swollen
controlled by engine coolant • Do not use a solution that contains
or deteriorated hoses. more than 60% antifreeze or less
temperature, refrigerant pres- The coolant level should be filled
sure and vehicle speed. It may than 35% antifreeze, which would
between F (MAX) and L (MIN) marks reduce the effectiveness of the
sometimes operate even when on the side of the coolant reservoir solution.
the engine is not running. when the engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
specified coolant or distilled (deion-
ized) water to provide protection
against freezing and corrosion. Bring
the level to F (MAX), but do not over-
fill. If frequent coolant addition is
required, see an authorized Kia deal-
er for a cooling system inspection.
7 31
Maintenance
For mixture percentage, refer to the

following table. CAUTION - Removing
radiator cap
Mixture Percentage Never attempt to
Ambient (volume)
Temperature remove the radiator
Antifreeze Water cap while the engine
-15°C (5°F) 35 65 is operating or hot.
-25°C (-13°F) 40 60 Doing so might lead
-35°C (-31°F) 50 50 to cooling system and
-45°C (-49°F) 60 40
engine damage.
OMD071005L
WARNING
Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap

when the engine and radiator
are hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure.
7 32
Maintenance
Turn the engine off and wait until it Changing the coolant
cools down. Use care when remov- Have the coolant changed by an
ing the radiator cap. Wrap a thick authorized Kia dealer according to
towel around it, and turn it counter- the Maintenance Schedule at the
clockwise slowly to the first stop. beginning of this section.
Step back while the pressure is
released from the cooling system.
When you are sure all the pressure
has been released, press down on
the cap, using a thick towel, and con-
tinue turning counterclockwise to
remove it.
7 33
Maintenance
BRAKE/CLUTCH (IF EQUIPPED) FLUID

Checking the brake/clutch* In the event the brake/clutch* system
fluid level CAUTION - Proper fluid requires frequent additions of fluid,
Only use brake/clutch fluid in the vehicle should be inspected by
brake/clutch system. Small an authorized Kia dealer.
amounts of improper fluids When changing and adding
(such as engine oil) can cause brake/clutch* fluid, handle it carefully.
damage to the brake/clutch sys- Do not let it come in contact with
tem. your eyes. If brake/clutch* fluid
should come in contact with your
eyes, immediately flush them with a
If the level is low, add fluid to the large quantity of fresh tap water.
MAX level. The level will fall with Have your eyes examined by a doc-
accumulated mileage. This is a nor- tor as soon as possible.
mal condition associated with the
OYDDMC2004 wear of the brake linings and/or
clutch disc (if equipped). If the fluid CAUTION - Brake/clutch
Check the fluid level in the reservoir level is excessively low, have the fluid
periodically. The fluid level should be brake/clutch* system checked by an Do not allow brake/clutch* fluid
between MAX and MIN marks on the authorized Kia dealer. to contact the vehicle's body
side of the reservoir. paint, as paint damage will
Before removing the reservoir cap result.
and adding brake/clutch* fluid, clean Use only the specified brake/clutch*
the area around the reservoir cap fluid. (Refer to “Recommended lubri-
thoroughly to prevent brake/clutch* cants and capacities” in chapter 8.) Brake/clutch* fluid, which has been
fluid contamination. exposed to open air for an extended
time should never be used as its
* if equipped Never mix different types of fluid. quality cannot be guaranteed. It
should be disposed of properly.
7 34
Maintenance
WASHER FLUID PARKING BRAKE

Checking the washer fluid Checking the parking brake
level WARNING - Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may
cause loss of vehicle control.
WARNING - Windshield
OYDDDR2105
fluid
OMD070007
Do not drink the windshield Check the stroke of the parking
Check the fluid level in the washer washer fluid. The windshield brake by counting the number of
fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces- washer fluid is poisonous to “clicks’’ heard while fully applying it
sary. Plain water may be used if humans and animals. from the released position. Also, the
washer fluid is not available. parking brake alone should securely
However, use washer solvent with hold the vehicle on a fairly steep
antifreeze characteristics in cold cli- WARNING - Flammable grade. If the stroke is more or less
mates to prevent freezing. than specified, have the parking
fluid brake adjusted by an authorized Kia
Do not allow the washer fluid to dealer.
come in contact with open
flames or sparks. The windshield Stroke : 6~8 “clicks’’ at a force of 20
washer fluid reservoir is flamma- kg (44 lbs, 196 N).
ble under certain circumstances.
This can result in a fire.
7 35
Maintenance
AIR CLEANER
Filter replacement Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule. CAUTION - Air filter
If the vehicle is operated in extreme- maintenance
ly dusty or sandy areas, replace the • Do not drive with the air clean-
element more often than the usual er removed; this will result in
recommended intervals. (Refer to excessive engine wear.
“Maintenance under severe usage • When removing the air cleaner
conditions” in this chapter.) filter, be careful that dust or
dirt does not enter the air
intake, or damage may result.
• Use a Kia genuine part. Use of
nongenuine part could dam-
OMD070010 age the air flow sensor.
It must be replaced when necessary,
and should not be washed.
You can clean the filter when inspect-
ing the air cleaner element.
Clean the filter by using compressed
air.
7 36
Maintenance
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER (IF EQUIPPED)

Filter inspection
The climate control air filter should
be replaced according to the
Maintenance Schedule. If the vehicle
is operated in severely air-polluted
cities or on dusty rough roads for a
long period, it should be inspected
more frequently and replaced earlier.
When you replace the climate control
air filter, replace it performing the fol-
lowing procedure, and be careful to
avoid damaging other components.
7 37
Maintenance
WIPER BLADES
Blade inspection Contamination of either the wind- Blade replacement
shield or the wiper blades with for- When the wipers no longer clean
eign matter can reduce the effective- adequately, the blades may be worn
ness of the windshield wipers. or cracked, and require replacement.
Common sources of contamination
are insects, tree sap, and hot wax To prevent damage to the wiper arms
treatments used by some commer- or other components, do not attempt
cial car washes. If the blades are not to move the wipers manually.
wiping properly, clean both the win- The use of a non-specified wiper
dow and the blades with a good blade could result in wiper malfunc-
cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse tion and failure.
thoroughly with clean water.
1JBA5122
CAUTION - Wiper blades
Commercial hot waxes applied by To prevent damage to the wiper
automatic car washes have been blades, do not use gasoline,
known to make the windshield diffi- kerosene, paint thinner, or other
cult to clean. solvents on or near them.
7 38
Maintenance
Front windshield wiper blade
1JBA7037
OHM078059
1LDA5023 Type B
Type A 1. Raise the wiper arm.
CAUTION - Wiper arms

Do not allow the wiper arm to
fall against the windshield,
since it may chip or crack the
1JBA7038
windshield.
2. Compress the clip (1) and slide
1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the the blade assembly downward (2).
wiper blade assembly to expose 3. Lift it off the arm.
the plastic locking clip. 4. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
7 39
Maintenance
OHM078060 OHG070043
2. Lift up the wiper blade clip. Then 3. Install the new blade assembly in
pull down the blade assembly and the reverse order of removal.
remove it.
7 40
Maintenance
BATTERY
For best battery service
WARNING - Risk of WARNING - Sulfuric acid
explosion in batteries
Keep lit cigarettes and Keep batteries out of the
all other flames or reach of children
sparks away from the because batteries con-
battery. tain highly corrosive
The battery contains SULFURIC ACID and
hydrogen -- a highly electrolytes. Do not
combustible gas which allow battery acid to
will explode if it comes contact your skin, eyes,
in contact with a flame or clothing or paint finish.
OYDDMC2008 spark. Wear eye protection
when charging or work-
• Keep the battery securely mounting near a battery.
ed. Always provide ventila-
• Keep the battery top clean and dry. tion when working in an
• Keep the terminals and connec- enclosed space.
tions clean, tight, and coated with
petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from
the battery immediately with a
solution of water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be
used for an extended time, discon-
nect the battery cables.
7 41
Maintenance
Always read the following

instructions carefully when WARNING - Recharging WARNING - Risk of elec-
handling a battery. battery trocution
If any electrolyte gets into Never attempt to recharge the Never touch the electrical igni-
your eyes, flush your eyes battery when the battery cables tion system while the vehicle is
with clean water for at least are connected. running. This system works
15 minutes and get immedi- with high voltage which can
ate medical attention. "zap" you.
If electrolyte gets on your When the vehicle remains unused for
skin, thoroughly wash the a long time while tempertures are
contacted area. If you feel low, disconnect the battery and keep
pain or burning sensation, it indasrs.
get medical attention imme-
diately.
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local law(s)
or regulation.
The battery contains lead. Do
not dispose of it after use.
Please return the battery to
an authorized Kia dealer to
be recycled.
7 42
Maintenance
Battery recharging When recharging the battery, Reset items

Your vehicle has a maintenance-free, observe the following precautions: Items should be reset after the bat-
calcium-based battery. • The battery must be removed from tery has been discharged or the bat-
• If the battery becomes discharged the vehicle and placed in an area tery has been disconnected.
in a short time (because, for exam- with good ventilation. • Auto down window (See chapter 4)
ple, the headlights or interior lights • Watch the battery during charging, • Sunroof (See chapter 4)
were left on while the vehicle was and stop or reduce the charging
not in use), recharge it by slow rate if the battery cells begin • Trip computer (See chapter 4)
charging (trickle) for 10 hours. gassing (boiling) violently or if the • Climate control system
• If the battery gradually discharges temperature of the electrolyte of (See chapter 4)
because of high electric load while any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F). • Clock (See chapter 4)
the vehicle is being used, recharge • Wear eye protection when check- • Audio (See chapter 4)
it at 20-30A for two hours. ing the battery during charging.
• Disconnect the battery charger in
the following order.
1. Turn off the battery charger main
switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp from
the negative battery terminal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp from
the positive battery terminal.
• Before performing maintenance or
recharging the battery, turn off all
accessories and stop the engine.
• The negative battery cable must be
removed first and installed last
when the battery is disconnected.
7 43
Maintenance
TIRES AND WHEELS

Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
WARNING - Tire underin-
maximum fuel economy, you must flation
always maintain recommended tire Inflate your tires consistent with
inflation pressures and stay within the instructions provided in this
the load limits and weight distribution manual. Severe underinflation
recommended for your vehicle. (70 kPa (10 psi) or more) can
lead to severe heat build-up,
causing blowouts, tread separa-
Recommended cold tire inflation and other tire failures that
tion pressures can result in the loss of vehicle
All tire pressures (including the OMD060012N control. This risk is much higher
spare) should be checked when the All specifications (sizes and pres- on hot days and when driving
tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the sures) can be found on a label for long periods at high speeds.
vehicle has not been driven for at attached to the driver’s side center
least three hours or driven less than pillar.
1.6 km (one mile).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, top vehi-
cle handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pressure
refer to “Tire and wheels” in section
8.
7 44
Maintenance
• Underinflation also results in Always observe the following: Checking tire inflation pres-
excessive wear, poor handling and • Check tire pressure when the tires sure
reduced fuel economy. Wheel are cold. (After vehicle has been Check your tires once a month or
deformation also is possible. Keep parked for at least three hours or more.
your tire pressures at the proper hasn't been driven more than 1.6
levels. If a tire frequently needs Also, check the tire pressure of the
km (one mile) since startup.)
refilling, have it checked by an spare tire.
authorized Kia dealer. • Check the pressure of your spare
tire each time you check the pres-
• Overinflation produces a harsh sure of other tires. How to check
ride, excessive wear at the center Use a good quality gauge to check
of the tire tread, and a greater pos- • Never overload your vehicle. Be
careful not to overload a vehicle tire pressure. You can not tell if your
sibility of damage from road haz- tires are properly inflated simply by
ards. luggage rack if your vehicle is
equipped with one. looking at them. Radial tires may
• Warm tires normally exceed rec- look properly inflated even when
ommended cold tire pressures by they're underinflated.
28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6 psi). Do not WARNING - Tire Inflation Check the tire's inflation pressure
release air from warm tires to Overinflation or underinflation when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
adjust the pressure or the tires will can reduce tire life, adversely means your vehicle has been sitting
be underinflated. affect vehicle handling, and for at least three hours or driven no
• Be sure to reinstall the tire inflation lead to sudden tire failure. This more than 1.6 km (1 mile).
valve caps. Without the valve cap, could result in loss of vehicle
dirt or moisture could get into the control and potential injury.
valve core and cause air leakage. If
a valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
7 45
Maintenance
Remove the valve cap from the tire • Inspect your tires frequently for Tire rotation
valve stem. Press the tire gauge firm- proper inflation as well as wear and To equalize tread wear, it is recom-
ly onto the valve to get a pressure damage. Always use a tire pres- mended that the tires be rotated
measurement. If the cold tire inflation sure gauge. every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or
pressure matches the recommended • Tires with too much or too little sooner if irregular wear develops.
pressure on the tire and loading pressure wear unevenly causing
information label, no further adjust- During rotation, check the tires for
poor handling, loss of vehicle con- correct balance.
ment is necessary. If the pressure is trol, and sudden tire failure leading
low, add air until you reach the rec- to accidents, injuries, and even When rotating tires, check for uneven
ommended amount. death. The recommended cold tire wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
If you overfill the tire, release air by pressure for your vehicle can be usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
pushing on the metal stem in the found in this manual and on the tire sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
center of the tire valve. Recheck the label located on the driver's side of-balance wheels, severe braking or
tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be center pillar. severe cornering. Look for bumps or
sure to put the valve caps back on bulges in the tread or side of tire.
• Remember to check the pressure Replace the tire if you find either of
the valve stems. They help prevent of your spare tire. Kia recommends
leaks by keeping out dirt and mois- these conditions. Replace the tire if
that you check the spare every fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
ture. time you check the pressure of the be sure to bring the front and rear tire
other tires on your vehicle. pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
Refer to “Tire and wheels” in chapter
8.
7 46
Maintenance
Without a spare tire Rotate radial tires that have an direc- Wheel alignment and tire bal-
tional tread pattern only from front to ance
rear and not from right to left.
The wheels on your vehicle were
Do not use the compact spare tire for aligned and balanced carefully at the
tire rotation. factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
WARNING - Mixing tire In most cases, you will not need to
types have your wheels aligned again.
Do not mix bias ply and radial However, if you notice unusual tire
S2BLA790A
ply tires under any circum- wear or your vehicle pulling one way
Directional tires (if equipped)
stances. This may cause unusu- or the other, the alignment may need
al handling characteristics. to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
CAUTION - Wheel weight

Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's alu-
CBGQ0707A minum wheels. Use only
Disc brake pads should be inspected approved wheel weights.
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
7 47
Maintenance
Tire replacement The ABS works by comparing the Compact spare tire replacement
speed of the wheels. Tire size can A compact spare tire has a shorter
Tread wear indicator affect wheel speed. When replacing tread life than a regular size tire.
tires, all 4 tires must use the same Replace it when you can see the
size originally supplied with the vehi- tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
cle. Using tires of a different size can The replacement compact spare tire
cause the ABS (Anti-lock Brake should be the same size and design
System) and ESC (Electronic tire as the one provided with your
Stability Control) (if equipped) to new vehicle and should be mounted
work irregularly. on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
✽ NOTICE designed to be mounted on a regular
OEN076053
size wheel, and the compact spare
We recommend replacing tires with tire wheel is not designed for mount-
the same make and model originally ing a regular size tire.
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear supplied with the vehicle; not doing
indicator will appear as a solid band so may affect driving performance.
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tire.
7 48
Maintenance
Wheel replacement Tire traction Tire sidewall labeling

When replacing the metal wheels for Tire traction can be reduced if you 1
any reason, make sure the new drive on worn tires, tires that are
5,6
wheels are equivalent to the original improperly inflated or on slippery
factory units in diameter, rim width road surfaces. Tires should be 7
and offset. replaced when tread wear indicators
A wheel that is not the correct size appear. Slow down whenever there 4
may adversely affect wheel and is rain, snow or ice on the road, to
bearing life, braking and stopping reduce the possibility of losing con-
trol of the vehicle. 2
abilities, handling characteristics, 3
ground clearance, body-to-tire clear-
ance, snow chain clearance,
speedometer and odometer calibra-
Tire maintenance 1 I030B04JM
tion, headlight aim and bumper In addition to proper inflation, correct
height. wheel alignment helps to decrease This information identifies and
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn describes the fundamental charac-
unevenly, have your dealer check the teristics of the tire and also provides
CAUTION - Wheel the tire identification number (TIN)
wheel alignment.
Wheels that do not meet Kia's for safety standard certification. The
specifications may fit poorly When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This TIN can be used to identify the tire in
and result in damage to the case of a recall.
vehicle or unusual handling and will increase vehicle ride comfort and
poor vehicle control. tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed 1. Manufacturer or brand name
from the wheel. Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
7 49
Maintenance
2. Tire size designation 89 - Load Index, a numerical code Tire speed ratings
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire associated with the maximum The chart below lists many of the dif-
size designation. You will need this load the tire can carry. ferent speed ratings currently being
information when selecting replace- H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the used for passenger vehicles. The
ment tires for your car. The following speed rating chart in this section speed rating is part of the tire size
explains what the letters and num- for additional information. designation on the sidewall of the
bers in the tire size designation tire. This symbol corresponds to that
mean. tire's designed maximum safe oper-
Wheel size designation ating speed.
Example tire size designation:
Wheels are also marked with impor-
(These numbers are provided as an tant information that you need if you Speed
example only; your tire size designa- ever have to replace one. The follow- Rating Maximum Speed
tor could vary depending on your ing explains what the letters and Symbol
vehicle.) numbers in the wheel size designa- S 180 km/h (112 mph)
P205/55R16 89H tion mean.
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
P - Applicable vehicle type (tires H 210 km/h (130 mph)
marked with the prefix “P’’ are Example wheel size designation:
V 240 km/h (149 mph)
intended for use on passenger 6.0JX16
vehicles or light trucks; however, Z 240 km/h (Above 149 mph)
not all tires have this marking).
6.0 - Rim width in inches.
205 - Tire width in millimeters.
J - Rim contour designation.
55 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its 16 - Rim diameter in inches.
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
16 - Rim diameter in inches.
7 50
Maintenance
3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire 5. Maximum permissible inflation

Identification Number) WARNING - Tire age pressure
Any tires that are over 6 years old, Replace tires within the recom- This number is the greatest amount
based on the manufacturing date, mended time frame. Failure to of air pressure that should be put in
(including the spare tire) should be replace tires as recommended the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
replaced by new ones. You can find can result in sudden tire failure, permissible inflation pressure. Refer
the manufacturing date on the tire which could lead to a loss of to the Tire and Loading Information
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the control and an accident. label for recommended inflation
wheel), displaying the DOT Code. pressure.
The DOT Code is a series of num-
bers on a tire consisting of numbers 4. Tire ply composition and mate-
and English letters. The manufactur- 6. Maximum load rating
rial
ing date is designated by the last four This number indicates the maximum
The number of layers or plies of rub-
digits (characters) of the DOT code. load in kilograms and pounds that
ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
can be carried by the tire. When
manufacturers also must indicate the
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO materials in the tire, which include
always use a tire that has the same
The front part of the DOT means a steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
load rating as the factory installed
plant code number, tire size and The letter "R" means radial ply con-
tire.
tread pattern and the last four num- struction; the letter "D" means diago-
bers indicate week and year manu- nal or bias ply construction; and the
factured. letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
struction.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1615 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2015.
7 51
Maintenance
7. Uniform tire quality grading Tires degrade over time, even when Traction - AA, A, B & C
Quality grades can be found where they are not being used. Regardless The traction grades, from highest to
applicable on the tire sidewall of the remaining tread, we recom- lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
between tread shoulder and maxi- mend that tires be replaced after grades represent the tires ability to
mum section width. approximately six (6) years of nor- stop on wet pavement as measured
mal service. Heat caused by hot cli- under controlled conditions on spec-
For example: mates or frequent high loading con- ified government test surfaces of
TREADWEAR 440 ditions can accelerate the aging asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
TRACTION A process. C may have poor traction perform-
TEMPERATURE A These grades are molded on the ance.
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires. The traction grade assigned to this
The tires available as standard or tire is based on straight-ahead brak-
Tread wear optional equipment on your vehicles ing traction tests, and does not
The tread wear grade is a compara- may vary with respect to grade. include acceleration, cornering,
tive rating based on the wear rate of hydroplaning, or peak traction char-
the tire when tested under controlled acteristics.
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times (1½) as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
7 52
Maintenance
Temperature -A, B & C Tire terminology and definitions Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of
The temperature grades are A (the Air Pressure: The amount of air air pressure in a tire, measured in
highest), B and C representing the inside the tire pressing outward on pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
tire's resistance to the generation of the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pascals (kPa) before a tire has built
heat and its ability to dissipate heat pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo- up heat from driving.
when tested under controlled condi- pascal (kPa). Curb Weight: This means the weight
tions on a specified indoor laboratory Accessory Weight: This means the of a motor vehicle with standard and
test wheel. combined weight of optional acces- optional equipment including the
Sustained high temperature can sories. Some examples of optional maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
cause the material of the tire to accessories are, automatic coolant, but without passengers and
degenerate and reduce tire life, and transaxle, power seats, and air con- cargo.
excessive temperature can lead to ditioning. DOT Markings: The DOT code
sudden tire failure. Grades B and A Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a includes the Tire Identification
represent higher levels of perform- tire's height to its width. Number (TIN), an alphanumeric des-
ance on the laboratory test wheel Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords ignator which can also identify the
than the minimum required by law. that is located between the plies and tire manufacturer, production plant,
the tread. Cords may be made from brand and date of production.
steel or other reinforcing materials. GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
Bead: The tire bead contains steel GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
wires wrapped by steel cords that Rating for the Front Axle.
hold the tire onto the rim. GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in Rating for the Rear axle.
which the plies are laid at alternate
angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
7 53
Maintenance
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: Pneumatic tire: A mechanical
side of an asymmetrical tire, that The sum of curb weight; accessory device made of rubber, chemicals,
must always face outward when weight; vehicle capacity weight; and fabric and steel or other materials,
mounted on a vehicle. production options weight. that, when mounted on an automo-
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for Normal Occupant Weight: The tive wheel, provides the traction and
air pressure. number of occupants a vehicle is contains the gas or fluid that sustains
designed to seat multiplied by 150 the load.
Light truck (LT) tire: A tire designat-
ed by its manufacturer as primarily pounds (68 kg). Production options weight: The
intended for use on lightweight trucks Occupant Distribution: Designated combined weight of installed regular
or multipurpose passenger vehicles. seating positions. production options weighing over 2.3
kg (5 lb.) in excess of the standard
Load ratings: The maximum load Outward Facing Sidewall: The side items which they replace, not previ-
that a tire is rated to carry for a given of a asymmetrical tire that has a par- ously considered in curb weight or
inflation pressure. ticular side that faces outward when accessory weight, including heavy
Load Index: An assigned number mounted on a vehicle. The outward duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
ranging from 1 to 279 that corre- facing sidewall bears white lettering heavy duty battery, and special trim.
sponds to the load carrying capacity or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or Recommended Inflation Pressure:
of a tire. Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-
deeper than the same moldings on
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The the inner facing sidewall. ed tire inflation pressure and shown
maximum air pressure to which a on the tire placard.
cold tire may be inflated. The maxi- Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire
used on passenger cars and some Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
mum air pressure is molded onto the which the ply cords that extend to the
sidewall. light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles. beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
Maximum Load Rating: The load centerline of the tread.
rating for a tire at the maximum per- Ply: A layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords. Rim: A metal support for a tire and
missible inflation pressure for that tire. upon which the tire beads are seated.
7 54
Maintenance
Sidewall: The portion of a tire Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num- All season tires
between the tread and the bead. ber of designated seating positions Kia specifies all season tires on
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the some models to provide good per-
code assigned to a tire indicating the rated cargo and luggage load. formance for use all year round,
maximum speed at which a tire can Vehicle Maximum Load on the including snowy and icy road condi-
operate. Tire: Load on an individual tire due tions. All season tires are identified
Traction: The friction between the to curb and accessory weight plus by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud
tire and the road surface. The maximum occupant and cargo and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow
amount of grip provided. weight. tires have better snow traction than
Tread: The portion of a tire that Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire: all season tires and may be more
comes into contact with the road. Load on an individual tire that is appropriate in some areas.
determined by distributing to each
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow axle its share of the curb weight,
bands, sometimes called "wear bars," accessory weight, and normal occu- Summer tires
that show across the tread of a tire pant weight and driving by 2.
when only 2/32 inch of tread remains. Kia specifies summer tires on some
Vehicle Placard: A label permanent- models to provide superior perform-
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality ly attached to a vehicle showing the ance on dry roads. Summer tire per-
Grading Standards, a tire information original equipment tire size and rec- formance is substantially reduced in
system that provides consumers with ommended inflation pressure. snow and ice. Summer tires do not
ratings for a tire's traction, tempera- have the tire traction rating M+S
ture and treadwear. Ratings are (Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.
determined by tire manufacturers If you plan to operate your vehicle in
using government testing proce- snowy or icy conditions, Kia recom-
dures. The ratings are molded into mends the use of snow tires or all
the sidewall of the tire. season tires on all four wheels.
7 55
Maintenance
Snow tires Radial-ply tires Longer wearing tires can be more

If you equip your car with snow tires, Radial-ply tires provide improved susceptible to irregular tread wear. It
they should be the same size and tread life, road hazard resistance and is very important to follow the tire
have the same load capacity as the smoother high speed ride. The radi- rotation interval shown in this section
original tires. Snow tires should be al-ply tires used on this vehicle are to achieve the tread life potential of
installed on all four wheels; other- of belted construction and are select- these tires. Cuts and punctures in
wise, poor handling may result. ed to complement the ride and han- radial-ply tires are repairable only in
dling characteristics of your vehicle. the tread area, because of sidewall
Snow tires should carry 28 kPa (4 flexing. Consult your tire dealer for
psi) more air pressure than the pres- Radial-ply tires have the same load radial-ply tire repairs.
sure recommended for the standard carrying capacity as bias-ply or bias
tires on the tire label on the driver's belted tires of the same size and use
side of the center pillar, or up to the the same recommended inflation
maximum pressure shown on the tire pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires
sidewall, whichever is less. with bias-ply or bias belted tires is
Do not drive faster than 120 km/h (75 not recommended. Any combina-
mph) when your vehicle is equipped tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias
with snow tires. belted tires when used on the same
vehicle will seriously deteriorate
vehicle handling. The best rule to fol-
low is: identical radial-ply tires should
always be used as a set of four.
7 56
Maintenance
Low aspect ratio tire ✽ NOTICE

(if equipped) CAUTION
• It is not easy to recognize the tire
Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect Because the sidewall of the low damage with your own eyes. But if
ratio is lower than 50, are provided aspect ratio tire is shorter than there is the slightest hint of tire
for sporty looks. the normal, the wheel and tire of damage, even though you cannot
the low aspect ratio tire is easi- see the tire damage with your own
Because the low aspect ratio tires er to be damaged. So, follow the
are optimized for handling and brak- eyes have the tire checked or
instructions below. replaced because the tire damage
ing, it may be more uncomfortable to
ride in and there is more noise com- - When driving on a rough road may cause air leakage from the
pare with normal tires. or off road, drive cautiously tire.
because tires and wheels may • If the tire is damaged by driving
be damaged. And after driving, on a rough road, off road, pothole,
inspect tires and wheels. manhole, or curb stone, it will not
- When passing over a pothole, be covered by the warranty.
speed bump, manhole, or curb • You can find out the tire informa-
stone, drive slowly so that the tion on the tire sidewall.
tires and wheels are not dam-
aged.
- If the tire is impacted, we rec-
ommend that you inspect the
tire condition or contact an
- To prevent damage to the tire,
inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 3,000km.
7 57
Maintenance
FUSES
■ Blade type A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-
tected from electrical overload dam- WARNING - Fuse replace-
age by fuses. ment
This vehicle has 2 fuse panels, one • Never replace a fuse with any-
Normal Blown located in the driver’s side panel bol- thing but another fuse of the
■ Cartridge type
ster, the other in the engine compart- same rating.
ment near the battery. • A higher capacity fuse could
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces- cause damage and possibly a
sories, or controls do not work, check fire.
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse • Never install a wire or alu-
has blown, the element inside the minum foil instead of the prop-
Normal Blown fuse has melted. er fuse - even as a temporary
■ Multi fuse If the electrical system does not repair. It may cause extensive
work, first check the driver’s side wiring damage and a possible
fuse has melted. fire.
Before replacing a blown fuse, dis-
connect the negative battery cable.
Always replace a blown fuse with CAUTION - Fuse replace-
Normal Blown
one of the same rating. ment
If the replacement fuse blows, this Do not use a screwdriver or any
indicates an electrical problem. Avoid other metal object to remove
using the system involved and imme- fuses because it may cause a
diately consult an authorized Kia short circuit and damage the
dealer. system.
Normal Blown Three kinds of fuses are used: blade
OXM073122 type for lower amperage rating, car- Do not arbitrarily modify or add-on
tridge type, and multi fuse for higher electric wiring to the vehicle.
amperage ratings.
7 58
Maintenance
✽ NOTICE Instrument panel fuse replace-

The actual fuse/relay panel label WARNING - Electrical Fire ment
may differ depending on equip- • Always ensure replacements
ment/options. fuses and relays are securely
fastened when installed.
Failure to do so can result in a
CAUTION - Fuse replace- vehicle fire.
ment • We recommend that you do not
Do not input any other objects remove fuses, relays and termi-
except fuses or relays into nals that are fastened with
fuse/relay terminals such as a bolts or nuts. If they are not
driver or wiring. It may cause completely re-installed, such
contact failure and system mal- looseness may cause electrical
function. arcing and a possible fire. If
OYDDMC2009
fuses, relays and terminals fas-
tened with bolts or nuts need 1. Turn the ignition switch and all
replacement, consult with an other switches off.
authorized Kia dealer. 2. Open the fuse panel cover.
7 59
Maintenance
If the headlights or other electrical Fuse switch

components do not work and the
fuses are OK, check the fuse panel
in the engine compartment. If a fuse
is blown, it must be replaced.
OYDDMC2010
3. Pull the suspected fuse straight OYDDMC2040
out. Use the removal tool provided
in the engine compartment fuse Your vehicle is equipped with a fuse
panel. switch to prevent battery discharge if
your vehicle is parked without being
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it operated for prolonged periods.
if it is blown.
Use the following procedures before
5. Push in a new fuse of the same parking the vehicle for prolonged
rating, and make sure it fits tightly periods.
in the clips.
1. Turn off the engine.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
Kia dealer. 2. Turn off the headlights and tail
lights.
If you do not have a spare, use a
fuse of the same rating from a circuit 3. Open the driver’s side panel cover
you may not need for operating the and move the fuse switch up to the
vehicle, such as the cigarette lighter OFF position.
fuse.
7 60
Maintenance
✽ NOTICE Engine compartment fuse 3. Check the removed fuse; replace it

• If the fuse switch is in the OFF replacement if it is blown. To remove or insert
position, the warning chime, the fuse, use the fuse puller in the
audio, clock and interior lamps, engine compartment fuse panel.
etc., will not operate. Some items 4. Push in a new fuse of the same
must be reset after replacement. rating, and make sure it fits tightly
Refer to “Battery” in this chapter. in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult
• Even when the fuse switch is in the an authorized Kia dealer.
OFF position, the battery can still
be discharged by operation of the CAUTION - Fuse panel
headlights or other electrical covers
devices.
After checking the fuse panel in
the engine compartment,
OYDDMC2011 securely install the fuse panel
1. Turn the ignition switch and all
cover. If not, electrical failures
other switches off.
may occur from water contact.
2. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling the
cover up. When the blade type
fuse is disconnected, remove it by
using the clip designed for chang-
ing fuses located in the engine
room fuse box. Upon removal,
securely insert reserve fuse of
equal quantity.
7 61
Maintenance
Main fuse Multi fuse

CAUTION
Visually inspect the battery cap
to ensure it is securely closed. If
the battery cap is not securely
closed, moisture may enter the
system and damage the electri-
cal components.
OMD070021 OMD070022
If the main fuse is blown, it must be If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows: removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine. 1. Remove the fuse panel in the
2. Disconnect the negative battery engine compartment.
cable. 2. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
3. Remove the nuts shown in the pic- ture above.
ture above. 3. Replace the fuse with a new one
4. Replace the fuse with a new one of the same rating.
of the same rating. 4. Reinstall in the reverse order of
5. Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.
removal.
7 62
Maintenance
Fuse/relay panel description
OYDDMC2012
Inside the fuse/relay panel covers,

you can find the fuse/relay label
describing fuse/relay name and
capacity.
✽ NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the OYDNMC5014
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer
to the fuse panel label.
7 63
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse

panel
OYDDMC2013
✽ NOTICE
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
OYDNMC5015
7 64
Maintenance
Engine room
(Battery terminal cover)
OYDNMC2059
✽ NOTICE
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
OYDNMC2048
7 65
Maintenance
Instrument panel fuse panel

Fuse Name Fuse rating Circuit Protected
P/SEAT DRV 30A Driver IMS Module, Driver Seat Manual Switch
SPARE 4 25A -
P/WDW RH 25A Smart Junction Box (Power Window RH Relay), Passenger Safety Power Window Module
TRUNK 10A Smart Junction Box (Trunk Relay)
P/WDW LH 25A Smart Junction Box (Power Window LH Relay), Driver Safety Power Window Module
DR LOCK 20A Smart Junction Box (Door Lock Relay, Door Unlock Relay), ICM Relay Box (Two Turn Unlock Relay)
SPARE 3 20A -
POWER OUTLET 1 20A Power Outlet
S/HEATER RR 20A Rear Seat Warmer LH/RH
MODULE 8 10A BCM, Smart Key Control Module
SPARE 2 7.5A -
SPARE 1 15A -
Smart Key Control Module, BCM, Digital Clock, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Power Outside
MODULE 1 10A
Mirror Switch, DC-DC Converter, MTS Module
A/CON 7.5A A/C Control Module, Cluster Ionizer, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Blower Relay, GSL PTC Relay)
MODULE 5 7.5A Sunroof, Driver CCS Control Module, Passenger Seat Warmer Module, Rear Seat Warmer LH/RH
HTD MIRR 10A ECM/PCM, A/C Control Module, Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror
Trunk Room Lamp, Glove Box Lamp, Vanity Lamp LH/RH, Room Lamp, Overhead Console Lamp,
INTERIOR LAMP 7.5A
Ignition Key ILL. & Door Warning Switch (W/O Smart Key)
MODULE 6 7.5A Sport Mode Switch, Key Solenoid
PDM 2 7.5A [With Smart Key] Smart Key Control Module [W/O Smart Key] Immobilizer Module
SUNROOF 20A Sunroof
Electro Chromic Mirror, Multipurpose Check Connector, A/C Control Module, Driver CCS Switch, Driver
CCS Control Module, Passenger Seat Warmer Module Driver IMS Module, Passenger Seat Warmer
MODULE 2 10A
Switch, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, DC-DC Converter, MTS Module, ATM Lever Indicator, PAS Off
Switch Rear Seat Warmer LH/RH, Rear Power Window Switch LH/RH
7 66
Maintenance

HTD STRG 15A Steering Wheel Heater
IG 1 20A W/O Smart Key : E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Fuse - TCU, ECU 3, ABS 3)
WIPER FRT 25A Wiper Motor, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Wiper Relay), Multifunction Switch (Wiper)
MULTIMEDIA 2 7.5A Telematics Unit
Driver IMS Module, Driver Smart Key Outside Handle, Passenger Smart Key Outside Handle, BCM, Tire
Pressure Monitoring Module, Auto Light & Photo Sensor Instrument Cluster, Data Link Connector,
MEMORY 7.5A
Multipurpose Check Connector, Digital Clock, A/C Control Module, Electro Chromic Mirror, Driver Power
Outside Mirror Passenger Power Outside Mirror
MODULE 7 10A ICM Relay Box (Turn Signal Lamp Sound Relay, Folding Relay, Unfolding Relay)
PDM 3 7.5A [With Smart Key] Smart Key Control Module [W/O Smart Key] Immobilizer Module
MDPS 7.5A MDPS Unit
MODULE 3 7.5A Instrument Cluster
[With Burglar Alarm & W/O Smart Key & W/O IMMO.] ICM Relay Box (Burglar Alarm Relay)
START 7.5A [W/O Burglar Alarm or With Smart Key or With IMMO.] Transaxle Range Switch (A/T), E/R Fuse & Relay
Box (Start 1 Relay), Smart Key Control Module, ECM
MULTIMEDIA 1 15A Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, DC-DC Converter
BRAKE SWITCH 10A Stop Lamp Switch, Smart Key Control Module
PDM 1 20A Smart Key Control Module
POWER OUTLET 2 20A Power Outlet
A/BAG IND 7.5A Instrument Cluster (Air Bag IND.)
Crash Pad Switch, Tire Pressure Monitoring Module, Stop Lamp Switch, Digital Clock, BCM, ISG Off
MODULE 4 10A Switch, Rear Parking Assist Sensor LH (Out/In) Rear Parking Assist Sensor RH (Out/In), Front Parking
Assist Sensor LH/RH
A/BAG 15A SRS Control Module, Passenger Weight Classification Sensor
7 67
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel

MDPS 80A MDPS Unit
Smart Junction Box (ARISU-LT IPS 1 (4CH), Fuse - MODULE 6, MODULE 7, P/WDW LH,
B+1 60A
P/WDW RH, TRUNK)
ABS 1 40A ESC Module
C/FAN 40A C/Fan 1 Relay, C/Fan 2 Relay
MULTI FUSE
RR HTD 40A RR HTD Relay
BLOWER 40A Blower Relay
GSL PTC 60A GSL PTC Relay
Smart Junction Box (ARISU-LT IPS 3 (4CH), ARISU-LT IPS 4 (4CH), IPS 5 (2CH), Fuse - PDM
B+2 60A
1, P/SEAT DRV BRAKE SWITCH, S/HEATER RR)
A/T : Electro Chromic Mirror, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Rear Combination Lamp (In)
B/UP LAMP 10A
LH/RH Smart Junction Box (IPS Control Module), M/T : Back-Up Lamp Switch
Transaxle Range Switch, Vehicle Speed Sensor, Oil Pump Inverter, E/R Fuse & Relay Box
TCU 1 15A
(Fuse - B/UP LAMP )
ABS 3 10A ESC Module, Yaw Rate Sensor
ECU 3 10A ECM/PCM
A/CON
10A A/C Control Module, Blower Motor, Blower Relay, ECM/PCM, Blower Resistor
FUSE SWITCH
WIPER 10A ECM/PCM, Wiper Motor, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (Wiper Relay)
B+3 50A Smart Junction Box (Leak Current Autocut Device, Fuse - PDM 2, DR LOCK, SUNROOF)
EMS 40A EMS Box (Engine Control Relay, Fuse -ECU 4, A/CON, F/PUMP)
ISG
50A Oil Pump Inverter
INVERTER
DEICER 15A ICM Relay Box (Front Deicer Relay)
F/PUMP 20A F/Pump Relay
7 68
Maintenance

STOP LAMP 15A Stop Signal Electronic Module
S/HEATER
20A Driver CCS Control Module, Passenger Seat Warmer Module
FRT
HORN 15A Horn Relay, ICM Relay Box (Burglar Alarm Horn Relay)
FUSE ECU 5 15A G4NC : ECM/PCM
W/O Smart Key : Ignition Switch, Start Relay,
IG 2 40A
With Smart Key : PDM 4 (IG2) Relay, Start 1 Relay
ABS 2 40A ESC Module
IG 1 40A W/O Smart Key : Ignition Switch, With Smart Key : PDM 3 (IG1) Relay, PDM 2 (ACC) Relay
7 69
Maintenance
Engine compartment fuse panel (EMS BOX)

F/PUMP 15A F/Pump Relay
ECU 4 15A ECM/PCM
A/CON 10A A/CON COMP Relay
INJECTOR 10A Injector #1/#2/#3/#4, F/Pump Relay, A/CON COMP Relay
ECU 2 10A ECM/PCM
IGN COIL 1 20A Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4, Condenser
SPARE 20A -
Oxygen Sensor (Up), Oxygen Sensor (Down), Variable Intake Solenoid Valve, Oil Control Valve #1/#2 Purge
SENSOR 2 10A
Control Solenoid Valve, Canister Close Valve, E/R Fuse & Relay Box (C/Fan 1 Relay, C/Fan 2 Relay)
SENSOR 1 10A Camshaft Position Sensor #1/#2
7 70
Maintenance
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care Finish maintenance After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
Washing oughly with lukewarm or cold water.
Exterior general caution Do not allow soap to dry on the fin-
It is very important to follow the label To help protect your vehicle’s finish ish.
directions when using any chemical from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least After washing the vehicle, test the
cleaner or polish. Read all warning
once a month with lukewarm or cold brakes while driving slowly to see if
and caution statements that appear
water. they have been affected by water. If
on the label.
braking performance is impaired, dry
If you use your vehicle for off-road the brakes by applying them lightly
driving, you should wash it after each
CAUTION - Headlight off-road trip. Pay special attention to
while maintaining a slow forward
Lens speed.
the removal of any accumulation of
To prevent damage, do not salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign
clean headlight lens with chem- materials. Make sure the drain holes
ical solvents or strong deter- in the lower edges of the doors and
gents. rocker panels are kept clear and
clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar
deposits can damage your vehicle’s
finish if not removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain
water may not completely remove all
these deposits. A mild soap, safe for
use on painted surfaces, may be
used.
7 71
Maintenance
High-pressure washing
CAUTION • When using high-pressure wash-
• Do not use strong soap, chem- ers, make sure to maintain suffi-
ical detergents or hot water, cient distance from the vehicle.
and do not wash the vehicle in Insufficient clearance or excessive
direct sunlight or when the pressure can lead to component
body of the vehicle is warm. damage or water penetration.
• Be careful when washing the • Do not spray the camera, sensors
side windows of your vehicle. or its surrounding area directly with
Especially, with high-pressure a high pressure washer. Shock
water. Water may leak through applied from high pressure water
the windows and wet the inte- may cause the device to not oper- OJB037800
rior. ate normally.
• To prevent damage to the • Do not bring the nozzle tip close to CAUTION - Wetting engine
plastic parts and lamps, do boots (rubber or plastic covers) or • Water washing in the engine
not clean with chemical sol- connectors as they may be dam- compartment including high
vents or strong detergents. aged if they come into contact with pressure water washing may
high pressure water. cause the failure of electrical
circuits located in the engine
compartment.
• Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as
this may damage them.
7 72
Maintenance
Waxing Finish damage repair Underbody maintenance

Wax the vehicle when water will no Deep scratches or stone chips in the Corrosive materials used for ice and
longer bead on the paint. painted surface must be repaired snow removal and dust control may
Always wash and dry the vehicle before promptly. Exposed metal will quickly collect on the underbody. If these
waxing. Use a good quality liquid or rust and may develop into a major materials are not removed, acceler-
paste wax, and follow the manufactur- repair expense. ated rusting can occur on underbody
er’s instructions. Wax all metal trim to parts such as the fuel lines, frame,
protect it and to maintain its luster. floor pan and exhaust system, even
Removing oil, tar, and similar materi- ✽ NOTICE though they have been treated with
als with a spot remover will usually If your vehicle is damaged and rust protection.
strip the wax from the finish. Be sure to requires any metal repair or Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-
re-wax these areas even if the rest of replacement, be sure the body shop body and wheel openings with luke-
the vehicle does not yet need waxing. applies anti-corrosion materials to warm or cold water once a month,
the parts repaired or replaced. after off-road driving and at the end
CAUTION - Drying vehicle of each winter. Pay special attention
Bright-metal maintenance to these areas because it is difficult
• Wiping dust or dirt off the • To remove road tar and insects, to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
body with a dry cloth will use a tar remover, not a scraper or more harm than good to wet down
scratch the finish. other sharp object. the road grime without removing it.
• Do not use steel wool, abra- • To protect the surfaces of bright- The lower edges of doors, rocker
sive cleaners, or strong deter- metal parts from corrosion, apply a panels, and frame members have
gents containing highly alka- coating of wax or chrome preser- drain holes that should not be
line or caustic agents on vative and rub to a high luster. allowed to clog with dirt; trapped
chrome-plated or anodized water in these areas can cause rust-
aluminum parts. This may • During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts ing.
result in damage to the protec-
tive coating and cause discol- with a heavier coating of wax or
oration or paint deterioration. preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum
jelly or other protective compound.
7 73
Maintenance
Aluminum wheel maintenance Corrosion protection High-corrosion areas

The aluminum wheels are coated Protecting your vehicle from corro- If you live in an area where your vehi-
with a clear protective finish. sion cle is regularly exposed to corrosive
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner, By using the most advanced design materials, corrosion protection is
polishing compound, solvent, or and construction practices to combat particularly important. Some of the
wire brushes on aluminum wheels. corrosion, we produce vehicles of common causes of accelerated cor-
They may scratch or damage the the highest quality. However, this is rosion are road salts, dust control
finish. only part of the job. To achieve the chemicals, ocean air and industrial
long-term corrosion resistance your pollution.
• Clean the wheel when it has
cooled. vehicle can deliver, the owner's
cooperation and assistance is also Moisture breeds corrosion
• Use only a mild soap or neutral required.
detergent, and rinse thoroughly Moisture creates the conditions in
with water. Also, be sure to clean which corrosion is most likely to
the wheels after driving on salted Common causes of corrosion occur. For example, corrosion is
roads. This helps prevent corro- The most common causes of corro- accelerated by high humidity, partic-
sion. sion on your vehicle are: ularly when temperatures are just
• Avoid washing the wheels with above freezing. In such conditions,
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is the corrosive material is kept in con-
high-speed car wash brushes. allowed to accumulate underneath tact with the vehicle surfaces by
• Do not use any alkaline or acid the vehicle. moisture that is slow to evaporate.
detergent. It may damage and cor- • Removal of paint or protective
rode the aluminum wheels coated Mud is particularly corrosive
coatings by stones, gravel, abra- because it dries slowly and holds
with a clear protective finish. sion or minor scrapes and dents moisture in contact with the vehicle.
which leave unprotected metal Although the mud appears to be dry,
exposed to corrosion. it can still retain the moisture and
promote corrosion.
7 74
Maintenance
High temperatures can also acceler- Keep your vehicle clean • When cleaning lower door panels,
ate corrosion of parts that are not The best way to prevent corrosion is rocker panels and frame mem-
properly ventilated so the moisture to keep your vehicle clean and free bers, be sure that drain holes are
can be dispersed. For all these rea- of corrosive materials. Attention to kept open so that moisture can
sons, it is particularly important to the underside of the vehicle is partic- escape and not be trapped inside
keep your vehicle clean and free of ularly important. to accelerate corrosion.
mud or accumulations of other mate-
rials. This applies not only to the vis-
ible surfaces but particularly to the • If you live in a high-corrosion area Keep your garage dry
underside of the vehicle. — where road salts are used, near Don't park your vehicle in a damp,
the ocean, areas with industrial poorly ventilated garage. This cre-
pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you ates a favorable environment for cor-
To help prevent corrosion should take extra care to prevent rosion. This is particularly true if you
You can help prevent corrosion from corrosion. In winter, hose off the wash your vehicle in the garage or
getting started by observing the fol- underside of your vehicle at least drive it into the garage when it is still
lowing: once a month and be sure to clean wet or covered with snow, ice or
the underside thoroughly when mud. Even a heated garage can con-
winter is over. tribute to corrosion unless it is well
• When cleaning underneath the ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
vehicle, give particular attention to
the components under the fenders
and other areas that are hidden
from view. Do a thorough job; just
dampening the accumulated mud
rather than washing it away will
accelerate corrosion rather than
prevent it. Water under high pres-
sure and steam are particularly
effective in removing accumulated
mud and corrosive materials.
7 75
Maintenance
Keep paint and trim in good condi- Interior care

tion CAUTION - Leather
Interior general precautions
Scratches or chips in the finish When cleaning leather products
Prevent chemicals such as perfume, (steering wheel, seats etc.), use
should be covered with "touch-up"
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand clean- neutral detergents or low alco-
paint as soon as possible to reduce
er, and air freshener from contacting hol content solutions. If you use
the possibility of corrosion. If bare
the interior parts because they may high alcohol content solutions
metal is showing through, the atten-
cause damage or discoloration. If or acid/alkaline detergents, the
tion of a qualified body and paint
they do contact the interior parts, color of the leather may fade or
shop is recommended.
wipe them off immediately. See the the surface may get stripped off.
instructions for the proper way to
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are
clean vinyl.
highly corrosive and may damage
painted surfaces in just a few hours.
Always remove bird droppings as CAUTION - Electrical
soon as possible. components
Never allow water or other liq-
Don't neglect the interior uids to come in contact with
Moisture can collect under the floor electrical/electronic compo-
mats and carpeting and cause corro- nents inside the vehicle as this
sion. Check under the mats periodi- may damage them.
cally to be sure the carpeting is dry.
Use particular care if you carry fertil-
izers, cleaning materials or chemi-
cals in the car.
These should be carried only in
proper containers and any spills or
leaks should be cleaned up, flushed
with clean water and thoroughly
dried.
7 76
Maintenance
Cleaning the upholstery and inte- Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt

rior trim webbing CAUTION - Rear windows
Vinyl Clean the belt webbing with any mild Do not scrape or scratch the
soap solution recommended for inside of the rear window. This
Remove dust and loose dirt from
cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow may result in damage to the rear
vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum
the instructions provided with the window defroster grid.
cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a
vinyl cleaner. soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the
webbing because this may weaken it.
Fabric
Cleaning the interior window
Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-
ric with a whisk broom or vacuum glass
cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu- If the interior glass surfaces of the
tion recommended for upholstery or vehicle become fogged (that is, cov-
carpets. Remove fresh spots imme- ered with an oily, greasy or waxy
diately with a fabric spot cleaner. If film), they should be cleaned with
fresh spots do not receive immediate glass cleaner. Follow the directions
attention, the fabric can be stained on the glass cleaner container.
and its color can be affected. Also, its
fire-resistant properties can be
reduced if the material is not proper-
ly maintained.
Using anything but recommended
cleaners and procedures may affect
the fabric’s appearance and fire-
resistant properties.
7 77
Maintenance
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

The emission control system of your Caution for the Inspection and 1. Crankcase emission control
vehicle is covered by a written limited Maintenance Test (With Electronic system
warranty. Please see the warranty Stability Control (ESC) system)
The positive crankcase ventilation
information contained in the • To prevent the vehicle from mis- system is employed to prevent air
Warranty & Consumer Information firing during dynamometer test- pollution caused by blow-by gases
manual in your vehicle. ing, turn the Electronic Stability being emitted from the crankcase.
Your vehicle is equipped with an Control (ESC) system off by This system supplies fresh filtered air
emission control system to meet all pressing the ESC switch. to the crankcase through the air
applicable emission regulations. • After dynamometer testing is intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
There are three emission control completed, turn the ESC system the fresh air mixes with blow-by
systems, as follows. back on by pressing the ESC gases, which then pass through the
switch again. PCV valve into the induction system.
(1) Crankcase emission control sys-
tem 2. Evaporative emission con-
(2) Evaporative emission control sys- trol (including ORVR:
tem Onboard Refueling Vapor
(3) Exhaust emission control system Recovery)
system
In order to assure the proper function The Evaporative Emission Control
of the emission control systems, it is System is designed to prevent fuel
recommended that you have your vapors from escaping into the atmos-
vehicle inspected and maintained by phere.
an authorized Kia dealer in accor- (The ORVR system is designed to
dance with the maintenance sched- allow the vapors from the fuel tank to
ule in this manual. be loaded into a canister while refu-
eling at the gas station, preventing
the escape of fuel vapors into the
atmosphere.)
7 78
Maintenance
Canister 3. Exhaust emission control Engine exhaust gas precautions

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel system (carbon monoxide)
tank are absorbed and stored in the The Exhaust Emission Control • Carbon monoxide can be present
onboard canister. When the engine is System is a highly effective system with other exhaust fumes.
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in which controls exhaust emissions Therefore, if you smell exhaust
the canister are drawn into the surge while maintaining good vehicle per- fumes of any kind inside your vehi-
tank through the purge control sole- formance. cle, have it inspected and repaired
noid valve. immediately. If you ever suspect
exhaust fumes are coming into
Vehicle modifications your vehicle, drive it only with all
Purge Control Solenoid Valve This vehicle should not be modified. the windows fully open. Have your
(PCSV) Modification of your vehicle could vehicle checked and repaired
The purge control solenoid valve is affect its performance, safety or immediately.
controlled by the Engine Control durability and may even violate gov-
Module (ECM); when the engine ernmental safety and emissions reg-
coolant temperature is low during ulations. WARNING - Exhaust
idling, the PCSV closes so that evap- In addition, damage or performance Engine exhaust gases contain
orated fuel is not taken into the problems resulting from any modifi- carbon monoxide (CO). Though
engine. After the engine warms up cation may not be covered under colorless and odorless, it is
during ordinary driving, the PCSV warranty. dangerous and could be lethal if
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to inhaled. Follow the instructions
• If you use unauthorized electronic on this page to avoid CO poi-
the engine. devices, it may cause the vehicle to soning.
operate abnormally, wire damage,
battery discharge and fire. For your
safety, do not use unauthorized
electronic devices.
7 79
Maintenance
• Do not operate the engine in con- Operating precautions for catalyt- • Use only UNLEADED FUEL for
fined or closed areas (such as ic converters (if equipped) gasoline engines.
garages) any more than what is • Do not operate the vehicle when
necessary to move the vehicle in or WARNING - Fire there are signs of engine malfunc-
out of the area. tion, such as misfire or a noticeable
• Do not park, idle or drive the
• When the vehicle is stopped in an vehicle over or near flamma- loss of performance.
open area for more than a short ble objects, such as grass, • Do not misuse or abuse the
time with the engine running, vegetation, paper, leaves, etc. engine. Examples of misuse are
adjust the ventilation system (as A hot exhaust system can coasting with the ignition off and
needed) to draw outside air into the ignite flammable items under descending steep grades in gear
vehicle. your vehicle. with the ignition off.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped • Also, do not remove the heat • Do not operate the engine at high
vehicle for any extended time with sink around the exhaust sys- idle speed for extended periods (5
the engine running. tem, do not seal the bottom of minutes or more).
• When the engine stalls or fails to the vehicle or do not coat the • Do not modify or tamper with any
start, excessive attempts to restart vehicle for corrosion control. part of the engine or emission con-
the engine may cause damage to It may present a fire risk under trol system. All inspections and
the emission control system. certain conditions. adjustments must be made by an
WARNING - Catalytic Your vehicle is equipped with a cat- • Avoid driving with a extremely low
converter alytic converter emission control fuel level. Running out of fuel could
Keep away from the catalytic device. cause the engine to misfire, dam-
converter and exhaust system Therefore, the following precautions aging the catalytic converter.
while the vehicle is running or must be observed: Failure to observe these precautions
immediately thereafter. The could result in damage to the catalyt-
exhaust and catalytic systems ic converter and to your vehicle.
are very hot and may burn you. Additionally, such actions could void
your warranties.
7 80
Specifications & Consumer information
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Weight/volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Recommended lubricants and capacities. . . . . . . . 8-6
• Recommended sae viscosity number . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Vehicle certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8
ENGINE
Item 1.8 MPI 2.0 GDI 1.6 Turbo GDI
Displacement [cc.cc (in)] 1,797 (109.66) 1,999 (121.99) 1,591 (97.1)
Bore x Stroke [mm (in)] 81 x 87.2 (3.19 x 3.43) 81 x 97 (3.19 x 3.82) 77 x 85.4 (3.03 x 3.36)
Firing order 1→3→4→2 1→3→4→2 1→3→4→2
No. of cylinders 4, In-line 4, In-line 4, In-line
DIMENSIONS
Item mm (in)
4 Door 4,560 (179.5)
Overall length 5 Door 4,350 (171.3)
2 Door 4,530 (178.3)
Overall width 1,780 (70.1)
4 Door 1,430 (56.3)
Overall height 5 Door 1,450 (57.1)
2 Door 1,410 (55.5)
P195/65 R15 (Steel) 1,563 (61.5)
P205/55 R16 (Steel) 1,553 (61.1)
Front tread P205/55 R16 (Alloy) 1,555 (61.2)
P215/45 R17 (Alloy) 1,557 (61.3)
P225/40 R18 (Alloy) 1,545 (60.8)
P195/65 R15 (Steel) 1,576 (62.0)
P205/55 R16 (Steel) 1,566 (61.6)
Rear tread P205/55 R16 (Alloy) 1,568 (61.7)
P215/45 R17 (Alloy) 1,570 (61.8)
P225/40 R18 (Alloy) 1,558 (61.3)
Wheelbase 2,700 (106.3)
8 2
BULB WATTAGE
Light Bulb Wattage Bulb type
Headlamps(Low) 55 H11
Headlamps(Low)- HID * 25 D8S
Headlamps(High) 55 H1
Front turn signal lamps 28 PY28W/8W
Front position lamps * 5 PY28W/8W
Front Front position lamps (LED type)* LED LED
Front fog lamps * 35 H8
Side Repeater lamps 5 WY5W
Side Repeater lamps (Outside Mirror) * LED LED
Daytime running lamps 55 H1
Side marker 5 W5W
Bulb Rear Stop/Tail lamps (outside) 28/8 PY28/8
type Rear tail lamps (Inside) 8 P28/8
LED Rear Stop/Tail lamps (outside) LED LED
type Rear Stop/tail lamps (Inside) LED LED
Rear Rear turn signal lamps 27 PY27W
Back-up lamps 16 W16W
Bulb type 21 P21W
High mounted stop lamp
LED type LED LED
License plate lamps 5 W5W
Map lamps * 8 FESTOON
Room lamps 8 FESTOON
Interior Vanity mirror lamps * 5 FESTOON
Trunk room lamp * 5 FESTOON
Glove box lamp 5 FESTOON
* : If equipped
8 3
TIRES AND WHEELS

Inflation pressure kPa (psi)
Wheel lug nut torque
Item Tire size Wheel size Normal load *1 Maximum load
kg•m (lb•ft, N•m)
Front Rear Front Rear
P195/65R15 89T 6.0J X15
P205/55R16 89H 6.5J X16
Full size tire 230 (33) 230 (33) 230 (33) 230 (33)
P215/45R17 87H 7.0J X17 9~11
P225/40R18 88V 7.5J X18 (65~79, 88~107)
T125/80D15 95M 4.0T×15
Compact spare tire *2 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60)
T125/80D16 97M * 3
4.0T×16
*1 : Normal load : Up to 3 persons

*2 : If your vehicle is not equipped with a compact spare tire, it will be equipped with a Tire Mobility Kit
*3 : Only for P225/40R18 Tire Size
CAUTION
Using tires of a different size may damage the related parts or cause them to operate improperly.
✽ NOTICE
We recommend replacing tires with the same make and model originally supplied with the vehicle;
not doing so may affect driving performance.
8 4
WEIGHT/VOLUME
1.8 MPI 2.0 GDI 1.6 Turbo GDI
Item
4 Door 4 Door 5 Door 2 Door 5 Door 2 Door
Gross vehicle weight M/T 1,740 (3,836) 1,750 (3,858) 1,780 (3,924) 1,760 (3,880) 1,810 (3,990) 1,790 (3,946)
kg (lbs.) A/T 1,760 (3,880) 1,770 (3,902) 1,800 (3,968) 1,780 (3,924) 1,840 (4,057) 1,820 (4,012)
Luggage volume
421 (14.9) 421 (14.9) 657 (23.2) 378 (13.3) 657 (23.2) 378 (13.3)
l (cu ft)
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

Item Weight of volume Classification
530 ± 25g
Refrigerant R-134a
18.70 ± 0.88 oz
110 ± 10g
Compressor lubricant PAG (FD46XG)
3.87 ± 0.35 oz
We recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer for more details.
8 5
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.
The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Lubricant Volume Classification

Engine oil (drain and refill)
*1 *2
API Service SM,
MPI/GDI engine 4.0 l (4.23 US qt.)
Recommends ILSAC GF-4 or above*3
Turbo GDI engine 4.5 l (4.8 US qt.) ACEA A5 or above
1.7 ~ 1.8 l
MPI/GDI engine
(1.8 ~ 1.9 US qt.)
Manual transaxle fluid API GL-4, SAE 75W/85 or SAE 70W, fill for-life
1.7 ~ 1.8 l
Turbo GDI engine
(1.8 ~ 1.9 US qt.)
MICHANG ATF SP-IV, SK ATF SP-IV

Automatic transaxle fluid 7.1 l (7.5 US qt.)
NOCA ATF SP-IV
MPI/GDI M/T 6.0 l (6.34 US qt.)

engine A/T 5.9 l (6.23 US qt.) Mixture of antifreeze and water
Coolant (Ethylene-glycol with phosphate
Turbo GDI M/T 6.1 l (6.45 US qt.) based coolant for cooling device)
engine A/T 5.7 l (6.02 US qt.)
8 6
Lubricant Volume Classification

0.7~0.8 l
Brake/clutch fluid FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
(0.7~0.8 US qt.)
Fuel 50 l (13.2 US gal.) Unleaded gasoline
*1 Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.

*2 Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel econ-
omy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure
in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*3 If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.
8 7
Recommended SAE viscosity Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has Using oils of any viscosity other than
number an effect on fuel economy and cold those recommended could result in
weather operation (engine start and engine damage. When choosing an
Always be sure to clean the area
engine oil flowability). Lower viscosi- oil, consider the range of tempera-
around any filler plug, drain plug, or
ty engine oils can provide better fuel ture your vehicle will be operated in
dipstick before checking or draining
economy and cold weather perform- before the next oil change. Proceed
any lubricant. This is especially
ance, however, higher viscosity to select the recommended oil vis-
important in dusty or sandy areas
engine oils are required for satisfac- cosity from the chart.
and when the vehicle is used on
tory lubrication in hot weather.
unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug
and dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the engine and Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
other mechanisms that could be -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
Temperature
damaged. -10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Engine Oil 10W-30
(MPI/GDI) *1 5W-20, 5W-30
Engine Oil 5W-30, 5W-40

(Turbo GDI) *2
*1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine

oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4).
However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select
the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
*2. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine
oil of a viscosity grade 5W-30 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4 / ACEA
A5 or above). However, if the engine oil is not available in your
country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil vis-
cosity chart.
8 8
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) VEHICLE CERTIFICATION-

Frame Number VIN Label LABEL
OMD080001 OVQ076002N
The vehicle identification number VIN label OFS080002
(VIN) is the number used in register- The VIN is also on a plate attached The vehicle certification label
ing your vehicle and in all legal mat- to the top of the dashboard. The attatched on the driver’s side center
ters pertaining to its ownership, etc. number on the plate can easily be pillar gives the vehicle identification
seen through the windshield from number (VIN).
outside.
8 9
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND ENGINE NUMBER

PRESSURE LABEL
OMD083003N
OMD0620012N The engine number is stamped on
The tires supplied on your new vehi- the engine block as shown in the
cle are chosen to provide the best drawing.
performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's
side center pillar gives the tire pres-
sures recommended for your vehicle.
8 10
Index
I
Index
Manual heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
A System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
Active eco system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40 Automatic transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Air bag-supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 Automatic transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Air bag warning label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 B
Ari bag system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Curtain air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49 Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Do not install a child restraint on a front passenger’s Battery recharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 For best battery service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Driver’s and passenger’s front air bag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45 Reset items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Inflation/non-inflation conditions of air bag . . . . . . 3-50 Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Occupant detection system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40 Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Side air bag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48 Anti-lock brake system (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
SRS Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55 Electronic stability control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
SRS components and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 Hill-start assist control (HAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Filter replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36 Power brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Vehicle stability management (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Appearance care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71 Brake/clutch fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Exterior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71 Checking the brake/clutch fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Interior care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76 Bulb wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
Aux, USB and iPod® port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149 C
Glass antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
Steering wheel audio control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148 Child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120 Lower anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Automatic heating and air conditioning. . . . . . . . . 4-121 Tether anchor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
I 2
Index
Using a child restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Evaporative emission control
Climate control air filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37 (including ORVR: Onboard Refueling Vapor
Filter inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37 Recovery) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-78
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 Exhaust emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-79
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
D Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6, 7-3
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109 Changing the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Front wiper deicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109 Checking the coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31
Rear window defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109 Engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Changing the engine oil and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Auto door lock/unlock feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Child-protector rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 Engine start/stop button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
From inside. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 ENGINE START/STOP button position . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
From outside. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 Illuminated ENGINE START/STOP button . . . . . . . 5-7
Impact sensing door unlock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . . . 7-25
Speed sensing door lock system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 Exterior overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
E F
Economical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 Fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Closing the fuel filler lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
If the engine overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Opening the fuel filler lid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Fuel requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Push-starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Do not use methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Emission control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-78 Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Crankcase emission control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-78 Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol . . . . . . . . 1-3
I 3
Index
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58 Using the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Engine compartment fuse panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64 In case of an emergency while driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Engine compartment fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . 7-61 If engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Engine room (Battery terminal cover) . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65 If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing . . . . . . 6-3
Fuse/relay panel description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63 If you have a flat tire while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Instrument panel fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59 Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
H Instrument Cluster Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
LCD Display Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Transaxle Shift Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
Closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Opening the hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Interior features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
I Climate control seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-142
Clothes hanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
If the engine will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
If engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly . . . . 6-4 Floor mat anchor(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145
If engine turns over normally but does not start . . . . 6-4 LCD monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144
If you have a flat tire (with spare tire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
Changing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143
Jack and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Seat warmer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
Jack label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22 Sliding armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-139
Removing and storing the spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 Sunvisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
If you have a flat tire (with tire mobility kit) . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
Components of the TireMobilityKit. . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 Automatict turn off function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Glove box lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit . . . . . 6-9 Map lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
I 4
Index
Room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
Trunk room lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
M
Vanity mirror lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107 Maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Interior overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Owner maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Owner’s responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
K Manual climate control system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-110
Climate control air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
Key positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Refrigerant and compressor lubricant . . . . . . . . . . 4-119
Key operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 System operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
Record your key number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Manual transaxle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Manual transaxle operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
L Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Inside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
LCD display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61 Outside rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
A/V Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
LCD Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
O
Turn By Turn Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66 Owner maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
User Settings Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63 Owner maintenance schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
Battery saver function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
P
Daytime running light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97 Parking assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
Front fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101 Non-operational conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
Headlamp escort function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
High - beam operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99 Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
Lighting control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
Turn signals and lane change signals. . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
I 5
Index
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35 Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Checking the parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35 Seatback pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
R Care of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Pre-tensioner seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Rearview camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95 Seat belt (3-point system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Recommended lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Seat belt precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Recommended sae viscosity number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Seat belt warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Remote keyless entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Smart key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Smart key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Remote keyless entry system operations . . . . . . . . . . 4-9 Special driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Transmitter precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Driving at night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Road warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Driving in flooded areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Hazard warning flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Driving in the rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45
Driving off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
S Hazardous driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Highway driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Scheduled maintenance service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Rocking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Maintenance under severe usage conditions . . . . . . 7-23 Smooth cornering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Normal maintenance schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Driver position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Electronic power steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Folding the rear seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Flex steer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Front seat adjustment - Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Front seat adjustment - Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Headrest (Front seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Tilt & telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Headrest (Rear seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 Storage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135
I 6
Index
Center console storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135 Tire replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Cool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136 Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-135 Tire sidewall labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Sunglass holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136 Tire traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 Wheel alignment and tire balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Resetting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40 Wheel replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Sliding the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Sunroof open warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 Emergency towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Sunshade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 Removable towing hook. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Tilting the sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 Towing service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
T Trip computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Theft-alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Armed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Trip A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Disarmed stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Theft-alarm stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Closing the trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Tire specification and pressure label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Emergency trunk safety release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Tires and wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44 Opening the trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
All season tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45 V
Low aspect raito tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57
Radial-ply tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56 Vehicle break-in process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures. . . . . . . 7-44 Vehicle certification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Snow tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56 Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data Recorders
Summer tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55 Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Tire care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44 Vehicle load limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
Tire maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49 Certification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
I 7
Index
Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50 Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Vehicle weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55 Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Base curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55 Blade inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Cargo weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55 Blade replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
GAW (Gross axle weight) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55 Wipers and washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55 Windshield washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
GVW (Gross vehicle weight). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55 Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
Vehicle curb weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
W
Warning and indicator lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Checking the washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Weight/volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Welcome system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Headlamp welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Puddle lamp and pocket lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Windshield defrosting and defogging. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
Automatic climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131
Defogging logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132
Manual climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
I 8

Kia, The Company: Drive Safely and Enjoy Your Kia!

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Kia, The Company: Drive Safely and Enjoy Your Kia!

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Kia, THE COMPANY

Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle.

All information contained in this Owner’s Manual was accurate at the

Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!

Your vehicle at a glance 2

Safety features of your vehicle 3

Features of your vehicle

Specifications & Consumer information 8

How to use this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Other fuels Gasoline containing MMT

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

Exterior overview .I. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

10. Door locks ........................................4-18

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1. Driver position memory system

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-29

Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 • Occupant detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40

• 5 Door Front passenger’s seat

WARNING - Loose WARNING - Driver WARNING - Driver’s seat

Front seat adjustment - manual

Front seat adjustment - power Forward and backward

Seatback angle Seat cushion height Lumbar support

Driver position memory system Recalling positions from memory

• With smart key system The driver's and front passenger's

You can activate or deactivate this

Adjusting the height up and down

Removal and installation 3. Press the headrest release button ■ Type A

OYD034102 To reinstall the headrest :

The driver and front passenger's The seatback pocket is provided on

Rear seat adjustment For maximum effectiveness in case

Armrest Folding the rear seat

When returning the rear seatbacks to WARNING - Cargo

and chime will stop immediately.

Seat belts - Front passenger and It automatically adjusts to the proper

Shoulder belt extension guide

Pre-tensioner seat belt 2. Emergency Fastening Device

The pre-tensioner seat belts may be

To obtain maximum benefit from a ✽ NOTICE

Because the sensor that activates the Seat belt precautions

Larger children Restraint of pregnant women

Injured person Care of seat belts When to replace seat belts

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

Using a child restraint system For safety reasons, we recommend

Placing a passenger seat belt

The lap/shoulder belt automatically

Securing a child restraint seat This symbol indicates the

Child restraint hook holders are

When you install your child's restraint

AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

Even in vehicles with air bags, you

Noise and smoke Installing a child restraint on a

Air bag warning light Have the system checked by an

The purpose of the air bag warning

The SRSCM continually monitors all

B240B01L B240B02L B240B03L

Passenger’s front air bag ✽ NOTICE Occupant detection system

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection

B990A08O 1KMN3663 1KMN3665

OVQ036014N 1KMN3662 1KMN3664